Home

Allen Bradley PowerFlex 700 User Manual

1. Parameter Name Number Group Page Parameter Name Number Group Page Fault 1 Code 243 Faults 3 46 Man Ref Preload 193 HIM Ref Config 3 36 Fault 1 Time 244 Faults 3 46 Marker Pulse 421 Speed Feedback 3 16 Fault 2 Code 245 Faults 3 46 Maximum Freq 55 Torg Attributes 3 11 Fault 2 Time 246 Faults 3 46 Maximum Speed 82 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 Fault 3 Code 247 Faults 3 46 Maximum Voltage 54 Torq Attributes 3 11 Fault 3 Time 248 Faults 3 46 Max Rod Speed 640 Oil Well Pump 3 66 Fault 4 Code 249 Faults 3 46 Max Rod Torque 638 Oil Well Pump 3 65 Fault 4 Time 250 Faults 3 46 MicroPos Scale 611 Torq Proving 3 64 Fault 5 Code 251 Faults 3 46 Min Ad Voltage 661 Adjust Voltage 3 67 Fault 5 Time 252 Faults 3 46 Minimum Speed 81 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 Fault 6 Code 253 Faults 3 46 Min Rod Speed 639 Oil Well Pump 3 66 Fault 6 Time 254 Faults 3 46 MOP Adj VoltRate 663 Adjust Voltage 3 67 Fault 7 Code 255 Faults 3 46 MOP Mask 284 Masks A Owners 3 51 Fault 7 Time 256 Faults 3 46 MOP Owner 296 Masks amp Owners 3 52 Fault 8 Code 257 Faults 3 46 MOP Rate 195 MOP Config 3 36 Fault 8 Time 258 Faults 3 46 MOP Reference 11 Metering 3 7
2. a Ouer e vel EES m wyj eS apo buypds o1 L A L 1 e 18S gJey endo enbioL Sousen enbio T 0 t SE T 0 lt je o Kret He anisnpxg pa En deeg ae duey o J t oer lt ez gt e Zs L dis L 0 pa DEER lt 4 lt SCH A 7 JE eau T Se Caz es vey aha H peadg papuewwog o Krzr Ee Proveid or o K var andino uogeinByuog ld sunna wm span i pajouog DE E Ts ED eea K T 1 0 J APA Id ubs Co ES amb o K ver XPA andino yz E A ajeog a T z PI Wi i s eounog Ca Cra Cao o Kre lt Mere mm a ue span le le s Ce ieS eege Id L Y s e vzr Lo Km ER duey K Casi YK me Em dwey Cr Cel lt gt panu ris em le EI CEN un Car URED d E Ve E nano lt dye rT O1 IH i Yy 1 Iekomgg set gt Cer Car lt a ve Jaa NANO ld ue END ser spy le 48N JEH ld CEP les eave td Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 32 Application Notes Reverse Speed Limit Figure C 14 Rev Speed Limit parameter 454 set to zero 10V Maximum Speed i I Reverse Forward Speed y Speed Minimum l l Speed 0 Maximum i Speed 10V 10V Maximum i Speed Minimum 1 l Speed 0
3. 240V Single Phase AC Input 208V Single Phase AC Input Drive Three Phase Drive a Three Phase Catalog E Hp Input Output Catalog E Hp Input Output Temp Number Rating Amps VAC Amps Number Rating Amps VAC Amps C 20BB2P2 0 0 25 1 5 0 230 1 1 20BB2P2 0 0 25 1 7 0 200 1 3 25 20BB4P2 0 0 5 28 0 230 12 1 20BB4P2 0 0 5 3 2 0 200 2 4 25 20BB6P8 1 1 5 1 0 230 124 20BB6P8 1 1 5 9 0 200 3 9 25 20BB9P6 1 11 5 Te 0 230 4 8 20BB9P6 1 15 8 3 0 200 5 5 25 20BB015 1 25 11 9 0 230 7 7 20BB015 1 25 13 6 0 200 8 8 25 20BB022 1 3 75 17 3 0 230 11 20BB022 1 3 75 19 9 0 200 12 7 25 20BB028 2 5 22 2 0 230 14 20BB028 2 5 25 7 0 200 16 1 25 20BB042 3 7 5 33 4 0 230 21 20BB042 3 7 5 38 5 0 200 24 2 25 20BB052 3 10 41 3 0 230 26 20BB052 3 10 44 6 0 200 28 25 20BB070 4 12 5 55 6 0 230 35 20BB070 4 12 5 62 3 0 200 39 1 25 20BB080 4 15 63 6 0 230 40 20BB080 4 15 73 3 0 200 46 25 20BB104 5 20 84 6 0 230 52 20BB104 5 20 97 9 0 200 60 25 20BB130 5 25 105 7 0 230 65 20BB130 5 25 106 1 0 200 65 25 20BB154 6 30 125 2 0 230 TT 20BB154 6 30 144 4 0 200 88 5 25 20BB192 6 37 5 156 1 0 230 96 20BB192 6 37 5 180 3 0 200 110 5 25 20BB260 6 50 211 4 0 230 130 20BB260 6 50 212 1 0 200 130 25 380 480 Volt Single Phase AC Inp
4. oR 68 Es Es 9 eH Optional op Ges i Communications 68 0000 Module oH ss lel h A S sle re 3 pe o U E fo S S N i I L 53309 Egma _ wm U e t 0000 YS 00000 Tei c SSeS SI SSS No Connector Description O DPI Port 1 HIM connection when installed in cover DPI Port 2 Cable connection for handheld and remote options DPI Port 3 or 2 Splitter cable connected to DPI Port 2 provides additional port O DPI Ports Cable connection for communications adapter Publication 20B UM002D EN P B 2 HIM Overview Figure B 2 Port Locations Frames 7 10 d Q O Important Verify metal ground tab is bent 90 and is under the adapter before tightening screw After tightening the screw verify that continuity exists between the head of the screw and drive ground o No Connector Description O DPI Port 1 HIM connection DI Port 2 Cable connection for handheld and remote options Located on side of chassis for Frame 7 IP20 NEMA UL Type 1 DPI Port 3 or 2 Splitter cable connected to DPI Port 2 provides additional port O DPI Port 5 Cable connection for communications adapter LCD Display Elements Display Description P gt
5. lt 37 6 1 48 lt 259 r 10 20 y R O D B el E Ste r hh A L gt 6 5 0 26 12 5 308 9 12 16 644 5 25 37 8 A 10 84 225 0 8 86 A 27 gt _ 6 5 0 26 gt Le 15 0 0 59 Zem Le C gt ol Cho Inn N EI Eo IUT DT 8 pe P Lifting Holes 4 Places 12 7 0 50 Dia Approx Weight 2 kg Ibs Drive amp Packaging 49 50 109 0 625 0 24 61 37 19 82 0 Refer to Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings for frame information Weights include HIM and Standard I O Add 2 70 kg 6 0 lbs for the 20BC140 drive When using the supplied junction box 100 Hp drives Only add an additional 45 1 mm 1 78 in to this dimension Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 28 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 6 PowerFlex 700 Frame 6 gt lt 8 5 0 33 gt lt 18 0 0 71 DL Detail c e k o O y x i 7 Y C TL Detail Old Style Junction Box SL L gi Holes ares 4 97 13 5 0 53 E 12 7 0 50 Dia lt New Style Junction Box gt 0 33 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight 3 kg Ibs Drive amp Packaging 100 9 222 0
6. Publication 20B UM002D EN P MOV Input Filter Cap Power Source Type Solid Ground 1 CM Cap jumper wire should be connected to ground with a metal screw Verify e Series C Drives If necessary remove the nylon screw spacer and insert a metal M5 x 8 screw Torque to 3 2 Nem 28 Ibein e Series A amp B Drives Remove the I O Cassette see User Manual for details The green yellow CM Cap jumper wire is located on the back of chassis and should be connected to ground with a metal screw If necessary remove the insulation from the wire terminal and connect to chassis with a metal M5 x 10 screw Torque screw to 3 2 Nem 28 bein MOV Input Filter Cap jumper wires should be connected to ground with a metal screw Verify If necessary remove the nylon screw spacer and insert a metal M5 x 12 screw Non Solid Ground 1 CM Cap jumper wire should be insulated from ground Verify e Series C Drives If necessary remove the metal screw and insert a M5 x 15 nylon screw spacer e Series A 8 B Drives Remove the I O Cassette see User Manual for details If necessary insulate secure jumper wire to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components MOV Input Filter Cap jumper wires should be insulated from ground with a nylon screw spacer Verify If necessary remove the met
7. Slip Comp Slip Adder gt Open i Loop Spd Ref py Linee Ramp gt Spd Cmd Process P PI Ref fe Process Pl PEE Controller PIFbk ke PI Enabled Speed Control PI Enable The output of the PI loop can be turned on enabled or turned off disabled This control allows the user to determine when the PI loop is providing part or all of the commanded speed The logic for enabling the PI loop is shown below The drive must be running for the PI loop to be enabled The loop will be disabled when the drive is ramping to a stop unless Stop Mode is configured in PI Configuration jogging or the signal loss protection for the analog input s is sensing a loss of signal Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 30 Application Notes Drive Bit 0 of Drive Ramping Drive PI Control 1 The PI Loop Running to Stop Jogging enabled Signal Loss S Enabled HH AAA HAD Jr N Digital Input is Reflected Bito Dr A Digital Input The Configured n IS l Sw PI Configuration is Configured Digital Input to PI Enable is Closed If a digital input has been configured to PI Enable two events are required to enable the loop the digital input must be closed AND bit 0 of the PI Control parameter must be 1 Tf no digital input is configured to PI Enable then only the Bit 0 1 condition must be met If the bit is permanent
8. no o E Parameter Name A Description o 2 se page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 213 Speed Ref Source Default Read Only 090 Displays the source of the speed Options 0 PI Output 093 reference to the drive 1 1 Analog In 1 ei 2 Analog In 2 101 1 Options not listed are reserved for 7 Pulse In future use 8 Encoder 9 MOP Level 10 Jog Speed 1 11 17 Preset Spd1 7 1822 DPI Port 1 5 24 Autotune 25 Jog Speed 2 2629 Scale Block 1 4 30 Pos Spd Prof 31 Position Reg 32 Micro Pos 33 Homing 34 Decel Switch 35 End Switch 36 Unipolar Lim 37 Rev Dis Lim 38 Max Spd Lim a 39 Min Spd Lim ZS 40 Rev Spd Lim S 41 Load Trq Lim S A3 HighRes Ref A 214 Start Inhibits Read Only Displays the inputs currently preventing the drive from starting KE E Z Z E iS ZAE AEAEE v xix olo ololo 1jololol1jololojo Ae rue pits 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 54 3210 SR Bit Description Fast Brake bit 7 Either a digital input is configured for Fast Stop and is enabled or TorqProve Setup parameter 601 bit 0 is enabled 215 Last Stop Source Default Read Only 361 Displays the source that initiated the Options 0 Pwr Removed most recent stop sequence It will be 1 1 5 DPI Port 1 5 363 cleared set to 0 during the next start 7 Digital In E
9. JMP3 1 2 Do Not Use Y 2 3 1 Bypass 7 E IBI Pi J 1 Y JMP3 W3 JMP2 W2 JMP1 W1 II Default setting Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 52 Installation Wiring EMC Instructions Frames 0 6 CE Conformity Conformity with the Low Voltage LV Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European Norm EN standards published in the Official Journal of the European Communities PowerFlex Drives comply with the EN standards listed below when installed according to this User Manual and the Wiring amp Grounding Guidelines Manual CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at http www ab com certification ce docs Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC s EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations EMC Directive 89 336 EEC EN61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods General Notes e Some drives are equipped with an adhesive label on the top of the drive If the adhesive label is removed from the top of the drive the drive must be installed in an enclosure with side openings less than 12 5 mm 0 5 in and top openings less than 1 0 mm 0 04 in to maintain compliance with the LV Directive e The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic
10. 1 AC input drives only MOV s and input filter caps do not exist on DC input drives 2 When removing MOV s the input filter capacitor must also be removed Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 30 Installation Wiring o 2 E Factory Default Jumper Settings E ZS E ES MOV InputFilter DC Bus Common Zes og 1 2 CSG Ge Caps Mode Caps 5 C 140 Two green Green yellow wire to yellow wires CM Cap Board is connected to the connected to ground Power Terminal Block rail F 052 Two green Green yellow wire to W 060 yellow wires CM Cap Board is connected to the connected to ground Power Terminal Block rail MOV CM Cap MOV Input Filter Cap Publication 20B UM002D EN P Power Source Type Solid Ground 1 CM Cap jumper wire should be connected to ground with a metal screw Verify If necessary remove the nylon screw spacer and insert a metal M5 x 8 screw Torque to 3 2 Nem 28 bein MOV Input Filter Cap jumper wires should be connected to ground with a metal screw Verify If necessary remove the nylon screw spacer and insert a metal M5 x 12 screw Non Solid Ground
11. x x x x x x x xix x x 0 x 0 0 0 1 Condition True pal 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 0 Condition False x Reserved Bit 1 Firmware 6 002 and later 23 o Alarm 2 Fault Captures and displays Drive Alarm 2 at the time of the last fault Read Only 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 Condition True pal 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 0 Condition False x Reserved Bit Publication 20B UM002D EN P nm kek kak IND INO A N K Se Mo erg In N IO LE SE S g Programming and Parameters 3 45 no S Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 234 Testpoint 1 Sel Default 499 236 Testpoint 2 Sel Min Max 0 65535 Selects the function whose value is Units 1 displayed value in Testpoint x Data These are internal values that are not accessible through parameters 2 See Testpoint Codes and Functions on 5 page 4 18 for a listing of available codes a and functions 235 Testpoint 1 Data Default Read Only 237 Testpoint 2 Data Min Max 2147483648 The present value of the function Units 1 selec
12. x x x x x 0 x 1 pis 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 0 x Reserved Bit 1 For current limit except FVC Vector mode Factory Default Bit Values 2 Firmware 6 002 and later Option Descriptions Reflect Wave Disables reflected wave overvoltage protection for long cable lengths typically enabled Enable Jerk In non FVC Vector modes disabling jerk removes a short S curve at the start of the accel decel ramp Ixo AutoCalc Not functional reserved for future enhancements Xsistor Diag 0 disables power transistor power diagnostic tests which run at each start command 1 enables transistor diagnostic tests Rs Adapt FVC w Encoder Only Disabling may improve torque regulation at lower speeds typically not needed Mir Lead Rev Reverses the phase rotation of the applied voltage effectively reversing the motor leads Note This bit is reset to 0 when parameters are reset to factory defaults PWM Freq Lock Keeps the PWM frequency from decreasing to 2 kHz at low operating frequencies in FVC Vector mode without encoder Digln DatLog Enable Digln DataLogic parameter 411 NoSyncPWM Disables synchronous PWM MOTOR CONTROL Torq Attributes 057 Flux Up Mode Default 0 Manual 053 Auto Flux is established for a calculated Options 0 Manual 058 time period based on motor nameplate 1 Automatic data Flux Up Time is not used Manual Flux is establis
13. Frames 0 amp 1 Frame 2 Frame 5 DC Input Drives Only Frame 6 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Figure 1 2 Component Locations Frame 7 offofofoffoffofiofiofiogo El RH Refer to page 1 15 for TB specifications Component Power Terminal Block Installation Wiring 1 17 a RA 407 Bz Es Br E SE ll O n Ur Ut A E EA cd 11 Component Nameplate PE Ground Precharge Boar
14. Fan studs are installed in alternating directions indicates that the stud points in all others point out Fan Stud Pointing Out Ce Outside of Enclosure Enclosure Wall Fan Stud Pointing In Inside of Enclosure 343 0 13 50 as T 4 55 9 2 20 66 6 ge 4 E US E SEH am Su gg 2 E D SR 2A e o ar as Q N E O G rm oun SS SS 3 Bm Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Important Backplate and extension are a single piece Drive chassis Publication 20B UM002D EN P can be removed from backplate to mount in user supplied IP54 NEMA UL Type 12 enclosure HIM Overview Appendix B For information on See page For information on See page External amp Internal Connections B 1 Viewing and Editing Parameters B 6 LCD Display Elements B 2 Removing Installing the HIM B 3 ALT Functions B 3 Menu Structure B 4 External amp Internal Connections The PowerFlex 700 provides a number of cable connection points Figure B 1 Port Locations Frames 0 6 0 Frame shown a wai RE
15. Brake Set Normally Open Brake Set Q 115V AC Clear Faults Float Micro Brake Contactor Lifting Torque Proving Application Programming The PowerFlex 700 lifting application is mainly influenced by parameters 600 through 611 in the Torque Proving group of the Application file Figure C 3 and the paragraphs that follow describe programming Figure C 3 Torque Proving Flow Diagram Operator Run Run Commands Command Command Released ek hhh a S J L J Brk Release Time ZeroSpdFloatTime Brk Set Time Parameter 604 Parameter 605 Parameter 607 Drive Torque Brake Float Brake Brake Actions Prove Initiated Released Initiated Set Slip Test All times between Drive Actions are programmable and can be made very small i e Brake Release Time can be 0 1 seconds Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 9 Torque Proving When the drive receives a start command to begin a lifting operation the following actions occur 1 The drive first performs a transistor diagnostic test to check for phase to phase and phase to ground shorts A failure status from either of these tests will result in a drive fault and the brake relay will NOT be energized brake remains set The drive will then provide the motor with flux as well as perform a check for current flow through all three motor phases This ensures that torque will be delive
16. PS PS Go O OJO OlO THO OOO Sos ooo 0101010 OF OO Jo Jo ojo RNE lt o o Le 0 0 21010 OBO whe Q See i PS o 125 200 Hp o o jf o iii o i o ji oho use 756 COPPER WIRE Konad Y Ww PE PE R S T SGE Ln T2 T3 U L2 L3 enw STET SE Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 22 Installation Wiring Power Terminal Blocks continued o E Ss L C Terminal Block AC Input DC Input N pE peg Or pe pies pesa pes pe oer er D D PE PE R Li S12 H AIT WI WI Bus Input Output EE PE D DC UTI vm Wm BUS OUTPU DC Bus Brake top of drive DC Bus Brake top of drive 10 DC Bus Brake top of drive gt IP20 Versions Only Terminal Description Notes BR1 DC Brake DB Resistor Connection Important Only one DB resistor BR2 DC Brake can be used with Frames 0 3 C
17. 1 Jumper selectable 5 12V is available on 20B ENC 1 Encoder Boards Hl Z channel can be used as a pulse input while A amp B are used for encoder Figure 1 8 Encoder Board Jumper Settings A amp lt mt 5 12V 20B ENC 2 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 5 12V 20B ENC 1 Series B J2 Intput Config Installation Wiring 1 43 Figure 1 9 Sample Encoder Wiring UO Connection Example UO Connection Example Encoder ype Encoder Power 8 H ae Power internal len Commit External Drive Power sle 70 sono fe Power Internal drive 8 7 Source EN 12V DC alia til 250mA 119 Encoder Be Encoder A aiai Signal UIZ Signal 7 Single Ended 17 Differential ati Dual Channel 2 Dual i er ale Channel gt tH 2110 2 110 1 A II SHLD connection is on drive chassis see page 1 16 Hardware Enable Circuitry Vector Control Option Only By default the user can program a digital input as an Enable input The status of this input is interpreted by drive software If the application requires the drive to be disabled without software interpr
18. MOV and AC EMI Capacitor Phase to Ground Common Mode Capacitor to Ground Frames 0 6 Only R L1 a S L2 T T L3 1 A oT T A gt Jumper Wire Jumper Wire Important 325 650 amp 810V PowerFlex 700 DC input common bus drives and 240 480 amp 600V AC input drives are shipped without the DC bus common mode capacitors referenced to ground Specific drive catalog numbers are listed below Type Voltage Cat No AC Input 240 20BB 480 20BD 600 20BE DC Input 325 20BN Common Bus 650 20BJ 20BR 810 20BT See Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES IN001 for information on ungrounded systems Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 25 Before proceeding ensure that all power to the drive has been removed frequency AC drives and associated machinery should perform maintenance repair of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC amp DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block refer to the User Manual for location The voltage must be zero ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the installation Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the no
19. 98 48C W 98 420 W SL 02 02 6 CL 6 26 Lg V9 Sg es os v D S 0 Ld93903 a 0y8 380 N 08 329 de SL EI 9 6 9 6S ey BEI UE 0s T H 0 6de3803 x 929 3Z9 N SL DL 9 8t g e LO U L 0s v L Z 0 dc3903 e S Se 918 320 SL 9 C T C 9 C ZE ile EL 0s y 0 L 01 Ldbagoe ER I OV HOA 009 S 1 Op suaquiny Bojejeo elgeneny XEM 1 XEW 1 XEN 1 WA a XEN py UW 99S UI L 20072 eau sduy do ZH1 GH ON 3 J9QqUINN a IU Abuey i n esny Aejaq asny ejag sduy yndjno suey q bau Guney 3 ioi Wan gi0RISnIpV YUM 10 99 01q 101014 NOEL 1701991019 1942319 SWIL UON all juela 3 ynduy duet Wd du ud HA PNAU Jeng ea Joo 1 sajon 40 03 Y abed ass sao1nag uolda 01q Mdu Dy HOA 009 D V ALL Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 19 Supplemental Drive Information 00y DG L DBC Ost 8 amp 2 BIL 6LL ZEL Stk 108 Z ULL 1 URT SZ 00 SL ele OCL cyl SOL SEL 1008 C cb 9 erbsgoe GLE BC L 003 Sel 961 lvl 86 ELL Lp 0S cl 06 1 G 00t Os osz ost BIL EL BUI Zeb SLL 0S C gt OlL 9 6LL480Z Sle GIE DUL 003 00 Dt ECL 28 ppp 62 UDP CI GL 1 GLE GLE Sel 003 Sel Lek 804 86 Ell LG 10p H 06 9 8604803 Gee BCC 09 Sel 08 03 06 0916991 6 0S c 99 1 GLE GLE 001 003 001 eel 06 28 vrv6 BL 0S S gt GZ 9 2904906 SLL GLI 09 OLL 09 PUL E
20. 98 380 N 98 4z0 W D D D 9 DL 9 GL gs S CE BEI pos T H 0 Odsagoe a E 0y8 380 N 0y8 329 N SL CL T 8 T 9 sy FEI de DC pos Fi EL Z 0 bdEOg0e Scg 320 N E Sk 8 E 9 ZE ve Ke FL 9b 009 y S20 L 0 bdeqaoe e 918 329 E SL 9 E E E ERR Cl KL Zo 60 pos y ee0 GO 0 LdLagos 2 ul OV HOA 08t o 1 Op siequiny Bojejeo app XEN 19 XEN 1 XEN a UI T a XEN a WN 099 uy L 7002 WAY sduy ZH 1 GH ON aquinN n vir 6uey 1 u esny ej q esny Aejaq sdwy nd no suey duat beu Buey 3 Bolereg Wan jqezsnfpy UM 10 99 O1q 10101 NOEL 101991014 194ea1g OWIL UON ou juaua 3 yndu Wiel du Ha HDD HNM leng o Joo sa 0N 40 0z V abed ass sooihe UOnzaioid mduj DY HOA 08 3 V 9 0eL Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 17 Supplemental Drive Information 006 00l2 00LZ 006 005 006 00yL OSOL 00Z 655 Z9 0r z 009 w S 003 0093 0093 DULL 0061 DULL ELEL 96 98 669 8 por H 00Z 0L 980802 008 0081 0081 D I UUE L 0SZ 003 006 009 64h S por z 00S w 5 006 ooz 00L3 006 00S 006 S60L 08 0 Z Seel Z9 0r H 009 6 O Zag0e a S El 002 0091 0091 002 003 002 0ZOL 08 SES zzv PLS por z URP w gt 008 0081 0081 DSL DUEL D I 006 099 009 64h 249 por H 00S 8 0090803 002 00pL 00pL 009 0001 009 096 col L t
21. Adj Volt Preset5 Adj Volt Preset6 Adj Volt Preset7 xaxx0000 2 o00 00 16 AdjV Sel Adj Volt Sel amp Speed ref A Sel Adj Volt preset amp Speed Ref B Sel Adj Volt Preset2 amp Speed Preset 2 Adj Volt Preset3 amp Speed Preset 3 Adj Volt Preset4 amp Speed Preset 4 Adj Volt Preset5 amp Speed Preset 5 Adj Volt Preset6 amp Speed Preset 6 Adj Volt Preset7 amp Speed Preset 7 Mixing selections 63 65 with 60 62 or 15 17 will cause a type 2 alarm Ee Digin DataLogic Provides data to the logical operations that will be done with the digital inputs when parameter 056 is set to option 9 Digln DatLog Ra E be a 2 e o N E gt a wo 2x2 EECH EH CH rh ech E E h OO O 0 0 0 I gt CO I gt 0 1 Logical 1 0 0 Logical 0 x Reserved A x lt Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 60 Programming and Parameters File 37 Ko 380 384 388 INPUTS amp OUTPUTS Digital Outputs Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Dig Out Setpt Sets the digital output value from a communication device Example Set Data In B1 to 379 The first three bits of this value will determine the setting of Digital Outx Sel which should be set to 30 Param Cntl IIS Ly SE 1 Ou
22. Non Solid Ground 1 CM Cap jumper wire should be _ MOV insulated from ground with a nylon screw spacer Verify If necessary remove the metal screw and insert a M5 x 15 nylon screw spacer 2 MOV jumper wire should be insulated T from ground with a nylon screw spacer Verify If necessary remove CM Cap T T T EZ offo x i o G o A the metal screws and insert a M5 x Input Filter 20 nylon screw spacer la n Cap i l 2 Input Filter Cap jumper wire should MOV be insulated from ground with a nylon screw spacer Verify If necessary remove the metal screws and inserta M5 x 15 nylon screw spacer 1 AC input drives only MOV s and input filter caps do not exist on DC input drives 2 When removing MOV s the input filter capacitor must also be removed Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 32 Installation Wiring o 2 z 5 Factory Default Jumper Settings ES S MOV Input Filter DC Bus Common e 28 Se Caps 2 Mode Caps 5 NEMA UL Type 12 Drives D Al Two green Green yellow wire is R yellow wires insulated from connected to ground chassis ground C Al Two green Green yellow wire is P yellow wires connected to ground connected to chassis ground CM Cap Series A amp B CM Cap Series C
23. Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 14 Programming and Parameters Kal o S Parameter Name amp Description o 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 430 Torq Ref A Div Default 1 0 053 Defines the value of the divisor for the Min Max 0 1 3276 7 Torque Ref A Sel selection Units 0 1 434 Torque Ref B Mult Default 1 0 053 Defines the value of the multiplier for the Min Max 32767 0 Torque Ref B Sel selection Units 0 1 435 Torque Setpoint1 Default 0 0 053 Provides an internal fixed value for Min Max 800 0 Torque Setpoint when Torque Ref x Sel Units 0 1 is set to Torque Geint 436 Pos Torque Limit Default 200 0 053 Defines the torque limit for the positive Min Max 0 0 800 0 torque reference value The reference will Units 0 1 not be allowed to exceed this value 437 Neg Torque Limit Default 200 0 053 Defines the torque limit for the negative Min Max 800 0 0 0 torque reference value The reference will Units 0 1 x not be allowed to exceed this value S 3 438 Torque Setpoint2 Default 0 0 3 2 Provides an internal fixed value for Min Max 800 0 O E Torque Setpoint when Torque Ref x Sel Units 0 1 s is set to Torque Setpt 2 S 440 Control Status Read Only 053 Displays a summary status of any condit
24. Vibration Publication 20B UM002D EN P 0 152 mm 0 006 in displacement 1G peak Category Environment continued Electrical Control Supplemental Drive Information A 3 Specification Sound Frame Fan Speed Sound Level 0 30 CFM 58 dB 1 30 CFM 59 dB 2 50 CFM 57 dB 3 120 CEM 61dB 4 190 CFM__ 59dB__ Note Sound pressure level is 5 200 CEM 71dB measured at 2 meters 6 300 CFM 72 dB 7 756 CFM 74dB 8 1200 CFM 78 dB 9 2800 CFM 82 dB 10 Inv 1850 CFM 78 dB 10 Cnv 1200 CFM 78 dB Voltage Tolerance See page C 45 for full power and operating range Input Frequency Tolerance 47 63 Hz Input Phases Three phase input provides full rating for all drives Single phase operation provides 50 of rated current see page A 10 Frames 0 7 Drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 18 pulse in an engineered package Displacement Power Factor 0 98 across entire speed range Efficiency 97 5 at rated amps nominal line volts Maximum Short Circuit Rating 200 000 Amps symmetrical Actual Short Circuit Rating Determined by AIC rating of installed fuse circuit breaker Method Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency Ratings apply to all drives refer to the Derating Guidelines in the PowerFlex Reference Manual The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 18 pulse in a configured package Carrier Frequency 2 4 8 amp 10 kHz Driv
25. Bus Regulation or Current Limit ka lt Allowable Output Frequency Range Normal Operation gt lower limit on this range can be 0 depending on the value of Speed Adder lt Allowable Speed Reference Range Maximum Voltage Motor NP Voltage lt Frequency Trim l I L I I sped l l due to Speed H H H l l I i Control Mode gt Limi Break l Voltage Start Boost Run Boost ap rdl preo i l Output Voltage l l fi I I l i Overspeed l l l 0 Minimum Break Motor NP Hz Maximum Output Maximum Speed Frequency Speed Frequency Frequency Frequency Limit Position Indexer Speed Profiler The PowerFlex 700 includes a position indexer speed profiler which provides either point to point positioning with a position regulator or speed profiling using a velocity regulator Point to point positioning can be either incremental moves or absolute moves which are referenced to home Encoder feedback incremental encoder is required for the position regulator Speed profiling steps can be time based or triggered by digital inputs encoder counts or parameter levels These speed profiling steps can be operated open loop or with an encoder The indexer is programmed by entering data into a 16 step array Each step has several variables for optimal customization see below The steps can be run in a continuous cycle or a single cycle The process c
26. The power system has power factor correction capacitors switched in and out of the system either by the user or by the power company The power source has intermittent voltage spikes in excess of 6000 volts These spikes could be caused by other equipment on the line or by events such as lightning strikes The power source has frequent interruptions 2 5 Hp or Less Drives in addition to 1 above The nearest supply transformer is larger than 100KVA or the available short circuit fault current is greater than 100 000A The impedance in front of the drive is less than 0 5 If any or all of these conditions exist it is recommended that the user install a minimum amount of impedance between the drive and the source This impedance could come from the supply transformer itself the cable between the transformer and drive or an additional transformer or reactor The impedance can be calculated using the information supplied in Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOO1 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 5 General Grounding Requirements The drive Safety Ground PE must be connected to system ground Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes The integrity of all ground connections should be periodically checked For installations within a cabinet a single safety ground point
27. When started the drive will ramp to the desired velocity hold speed and compare the parameter value of the parameter number programmed in Step Value to the Step Dwell level The sign of the Step Value defines less than or greater than Step Dwell When true the profile will transition to the next step End The drive ramps to zero speed and stops the profile It clears the current step bits and sets the Complete bit 14 in Profile Status parameter 700 Position Regulated Step Types and Parameters Each of the Position Regulated steps has the following associated parameters or functions Accel Decel Next Step Step Type Value Velocity Time Time Condition Dwell Batch Next Encoder Position amp Speed Accel Decel Ar Position Dwell NA Next Absolute Direction Rate Rate Time Step Encoder Position amp Speed Accel Decel At Position Dwell Batch Next Incremental _ Direction Rate Rate Time Number Step End Hold NA NA NA NA At Position Dwell NA Stop Position Time NA Function not applicable to this step type Encoder Absolute This is a move to an absolute position which is referenced from the home position When started the drive ramps to the desired velocity in the direction required holds the speed then ramps to zero speed landing or ending at the commanded position within the tolerance window Encoder Incremental Encoder Incr This is a
28. 6 C Max i 403 9 15 90 850 0 33 46 275 5 10 85 300 0 11 81 825 0 32 48 71 44 157 5 1 Refer to Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings for frame information 2 Junction Box can be removed if drive is mounted in a cabinet 3 Weights include HIM and Standard I O Add 13 60 kg 30 0 Ibs for the following drives 20BB260 20BC260 and 20BD248 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 29 Figure A 7 PowerFlex 700 Bottom View Dimensions Frame Rating 0 All Dimensions 96 0 3 78 gt gt 75 0 2 95 lt lt gt 55 0 2 17 lt gt 35 0 1 38 gt gt 185 0 7 28 D 41 9 1 65 gt 56 1 2 21 75 9 2 99 96 0 3 78 22 2 0 87 Dia 4 Places 1 All 108 5 4 27 87 5 3 44 67 5 2 66 47 5 1 87 28 6 1 13 Dia y 55 1 00 22 2 162 3 6 39 185 1 187 6 7 39 133 3 6 25 43 0 1 69 70 0 2 76 75 9 2 99 96 0 3 78 ei gt A 0 87 Dia 3 Places 7 29 2 All 156 9 6 18 gt 22 4 0 88 Dia e 167 5 6 59 gt gt 28 7 1 13 Dia 3 Places 2 Places NU m S 157 5 184 8 7 28 6 20 150 9 5 94 112 4 4 41 L O
29. Adjusted Skip Skip Band If the band is outside the limits the skip band is inactive Publication 20B UM002D EN P w Recalculated mmm mm mmm mmm mm mmm mmm Skip Frequency 0Hz 400 Hz Inacti Skip Frequency 1 Skp Band 60 Hz Max Frequency OHz Application Notes C 35 Sleep Wake Mode This function stops sleep and starts wake the drive based on separately configurable analog input levels rather than discrete start and stop signals When enabled in Direct mode the drive will start wake when an analog signal is greater than or equal to the user specified Wake Level and stop the drive when an analog signal is less than or equal to the user specified Sleep Level When Sleep Wake is enabled for Invert mode the drive will start wake when an analog signal is less than or equal to the user specified Wake Level and stop the drive when an analog signal is greater than or equal to the user specified Sleep Level Definitions e Wake A start command generated when the analog input value remains above Wake Level or below when Invert mode is active for a time greater than Wake Time e Sleep A Stop command generated when the analog input value remains below Sleep Level or above when Invert mode is active for a time greater than Sleep Time e Speed Reference The active speed command to the drive as selected by drive logic and Speed Ref x Sel e Start Comm
30. Micro Position refers to rescaling of the commanded frequency by a percentage entered in MicroPos Scale parameter 611 This allows for slower operation of a lift which provides an operator with better resolution when positioning a load Micro Position is activated only when the drive is running at or near zero speed This can be initiated by a digital input configured as Micro Pos or through a communication device TorqProve Setup which is the same digital input which signals the float condition To allow the Micro Position digital input to change the speed command while the drive is running enter a 1 in Parameter 600 Bit 2 MicroPosSel A 0 will require drive to reach zero speed for micro position speed to become active Fast Stop Fast Stop is intended to stop the load as fast as possible then set the mechanical brake The Fast Stop can be initiated from a digital input or through a communication device through TorqProve Setup The difference from a normal stop is that the decel time is forced to be 0 1 seconds When the Torque Proving function is enabled the Float time is ignored at the end of the ramp This feature can be used without enabling the Torque Proving function Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 11 Limit Switches for Digital Inputs The PowerFlex 700 includes digital input selections for decel and end limit switches These can be used for applications that use limit switches for de
31. e DC Bus Voltage displays the instantaneous value e DC Bus Memory displays a 6 minute running average of the voltage All drive reactions to power loss are based on DC Bus Memory This averages low and high line conditions and sets the drive to react to the average rather than assumed values For example a 480V installation would have a 480V AC line and produce a nominal 648V DC bus If the drive were to react to a fixed voltage for line loss detect i e 533V DC then normal operation would occur for nominal line installations Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 28 Application Notes However if a lower nominal line voltage of 440V AC was used then nominal DC bus voltage would be only 594V DC If the drive were to react to the fixed 533V level only 10 for line loss detect any anomaly might trigger a false line loss detection Line loss therefore always uses the 6 minute average for DC bus voltage and detects line loss based on a fixed percentage of that memory In the same example the average would be 594V DC instead of 650V DC and the fixed percentage 27 for Coast to Stop and 18 for all others would allow identical operation regardless of line voltage The PowerFlex 70 uses only these fixed percentages The PowerFlex 700 can selectively use the same percentages or the user can set a trigger point for line loss detect The adjustable trigger level is set using Power Loss Level see Power Loss Level on page 3
32. e High duty cycles frequent stops or speed changes connected The other methods may result in excessive motor heating Fast e Additional braking capability without use of an external More than Flux Brake brake resistor or regenerative unit but only effective Braking or DC during stop events not speed changes Brake Important For this feature to function properly the active Bus Reg Mode A or B must be set to Adjust Freq and NOT be Disabled Flux In some applications Flux Braking can provide a method More than DC Braking for fast speed changes or stops It is not suitable for high Brake inertia loads or high duty cycle operation for applications greater than 1 cycle per minute This feature supplies additional flux current to the motor and can cause motor thermistor or overvoltage faults in the drive e Fast speed changes and fast stopping time e Typical stop from speeds below 50 of base speed Flux Braking will likely stop the load faster than Fast Brake in this case Important This can be used in conjunction with Ramp or Ramp to Hold for additional braking power or with Fast Brake or DC Brake for speed changes Important For this feature to function properly the active Bus Reg Mode A or B must be set to Adjust Freq and NOT be Disabled DC e Additional braking capability without use of external Less than above Brake brake resistor or regenerative
33. for 1 second After the Step x Dwell time expires the profile transitions to the next step The absolute step is used to send the profile back to the home position This is accomplished by programming Step 4 Value to zero Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 27 Figure C 10 Encoder Incremental w Dwell Example 350 30 Complete payenesy suun Profile Status g 7 50 At Position 150 250 Encoder Speed 350 dais Wan Step 3 450 Time Encoder Speed 415 Profile Status 700 Units Traveled 701 Current Step Step x Step x Step x Step x Step x Stepx Stepx Step Step x Type Velocity AccelTime DecelTime Value Dwell Batch Next 1 Encoder Incr 100 0 5 0 5 10 00 1 00 1 2 2 Encoder Incr 200 0 5 0 5 10 00 1 00 1 3 3 Encoder Incr 300 0 5 0 5 10 00 1 00 1 4 4 Encoder Abs 400 0 5 0 5 0 00 100 N A 5 5 End Hold N A N A 0 5 N A 0 00 N A N A Position Power Loss Ride Through When AC input power is lost energy is being supplied to the motor from the DC bus capacitors The energy from the capacitors is not being replaced via the AC line thus the DC bus voltage will fall rapidly The drive must detect this fall and react according to the way it is programmed Two parameters display DC bus voltage
34. 1 CM Cap jumper wire should be insulated from ground with a nylon screw spacer Verify If necessary remove the metal screw and insert a M5 x 15 nylon screw spacer MOV Input Filter Cap jumper wires should be insulated from ground with a nylon screw spacer Verify If necessary remove the metal screw and insert a M5 x 20 nylon screw spacer Installation Wiring 1 31 Factory Default Jumper Settings MOV Input Filter DC Bus Common Caps 1 2 Mode Caps Power Source Type Two green Green yellow wire to Solid Ground yellow wires CM Cap Boardis 1 CM Cap jumper wire should be connected to _ insulated from connected to ground with a metal chassis ground ground screw Verify If necessary remove 082 Two green Green yellow wire to the nylon screw spacer and insert a 098 yellow wires CM Cap Board is metal M5 x 8 screw Torque to 3 2 connected to connected to ground Nem 28 lbein chassis ground 2 MOV jumper wire should be connected to ground with metal screws Verify If necessary remove the nylon screw spacers and insert a metal M5 x 12 screws 3 Input Filter Cap jumper wire should be connected to ground with a metal screw Verify If necessary remove the nylon screw spacer and insert metal M5 x 8 screw o Frame Voltage Code g Current N Rating o co oO m o ie
35. 139 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values PI Lower Limit Default Maximum Freq Sets the lower limit of the PI output 100 Min Max 400 0 Hz 800 0 Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 PI Upper Limit Default Maximum Freq Sets the upper limit of the PI output 100 Min Max 400 0 Hz 800 0 Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 PI Preload Default 0 0 Hz Sets the value used to preload the 100 0 integral component on start or enable Min Max PI Lower Limit PI Upper Limit Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 PI Status Read Only Status of the Process PI regulator y OAIE 1 Condition True x x x x x x x x x x x x o0jojojo de pits 1413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 0 Pacers False Bit PI Ref Meter Default Read Only Present value of the PI reference signal Min Max 100 0 Units 0 1 PI Fdback Meter Default Read Only Present value of the PI feedback signal Min Max 100 0 Units 0 1 PI Error Meter Default Read Only Present value of the Pl error Min Max 200 0 Units 0 1 PI Output Meter Default Read Only Present value of the Pl output Min Max 800 0 Units 0 1 PI BW Filter Default 0 0 Radians Provides filter for Process PI error signal Min Max 0 0 240 0 Radians The output of this filter is displayed in PI Units 0 1 Radians Error Meter Zero will disable the fil
36. 179 3 7 06 me lt 304 8 12 00 gt L lt 431 8 17 00 gt Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight kg Ibs Drive 170 375 Drive amp Packaging 196 433 A 39 lt 406 9 16 02 gt Lifting Holes 4 Places Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 40 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 15 1P20 NEMA UL Type 1 Frames 8 amp 9 B e Y 549 7 21 64 gt J L D O 0 9 4 8 2373 9 93 46 III DIDI Depth Drive A B Catalog No Behind Backplane Total Depth 208x365 415 481 254 0 10 00 889 0 35 00 208x535 600 730 381 0 15 00 1016 0 40 00 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight kg Ibs Frame Drive Drive amp Packaging 8 509 1122 556 1225 9 526 1159 603 1262 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1463 0 57 60 Supplemental Drive Information A 41 Figure A 16 IP20 NEMA UL Type 1 Frame 10 AC Input Shown for DC Input Dimensions use the Inverter Left Bay ses L 2373 9 93 46 1267 7 49 91 Dimensions
37. 3 21 Reference Mask 280 Masks A Owners 3 51 Testpoint X Data 235 237 Diagnostics 3 45 Reference Owner 292 Masks amp Owners 3 52 Testpoint X Sel 234 236 Diagnostics 3 45 Regen Power Limit 153 Load Limits 3 29 Torq Ref A Div 430 Torg Attributes 3 14 Reset Meters 200 Drive Memory 3 37 TorgAlarm Level 632 Oil Well Pump 3 65 Reset To Defalts 197 Drive Memory 3 37 TorgAlarm Action 633 Oil Well Pump 3 65 Rev Speed Limit 454 Speed Regulator 3 19 TorgAlarm Dwell 634 Oil Well Pump 3 65 Rod Load Torque 631 Oil Well Pump 3 65 TorgAlrm Timeout 635 Oil Well Pump 3 65 Run Boost 70 Volts per Hertz 3 15 TorgAlrm TO Act 636 Oil Well Pump 3 65 S Curve 146 Ramp Rates 3 28 TorqLim SlewRate 608 Torq Proving 3 64 Save HIM Ref 192 HIM Ref Config 3 36 TorqProve Cnfg 600 Torq Proving 3 63 Save MOP Ref 194 MOP Config 3 36 TorqProve Setup 601 Torq Proving 3 63 Save To User Set 199 Drive Memory 3 37 TorgProve Status 612 Torq Proving 3 65 ScaleX In Hi 477 495 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Torque Current 4 Metering 3 7 ScaleX In Lo 478 496 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Torque Ref B Mult 434 Torq Attributes 3 14 ScaleX In Value 476 494 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Torque Ref X Hi 428 432 Torg Attributes 3 13 ScaleX Out Hi 479 497 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Torque RefX Lo 429 433 Torq Attributes 3 13 ScaleX Out Lo 480 498 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Torque Ref X Sel 427 431 Torq Attributes 3 13 ScaleX Out Value 481 499 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Torque Setpoint 435 Torg Attributes 3
38. Cont 1Min 3Sec Fuse Fuse 2 20BC1P3 0 1057 0 25 4 50 13 i fe jie Je JKS 3 20BC2P1 0 10 75 055 4 50 2 1 21 24 32 6 JKS 6 20BC3P5 0 15 075 4 50 3 7 35 ke IG 8 JKS 8 20BC5P0 0 22 15 l4 50 5 3 5 55 175 10 JKS 10 20BC8P7 0 4 3 4 50 9 3 87 99 132 15 HSJ15 20BC011 0 55 l4 4 50 12 6 11 5 113 174 20 HSJ20 20BC015 1175 55 4 50 16 8 15 4 172 231 25 HSJ25 20BC022 Im 75 4 50 24 22 242 33 40 HSJ40 20BC030 2 le lu K 50 33 2 30 33 45 50 HSJ50 20BC037 2 185 15 l4 50 40 9 37 45 60 70 HSJ70 20BC043 3 22 1185 4 50 47 5 43 56 74 90 HSJ90 20BC056 3 30 22 l4 50 61 9 56 64 86 100 HSJ100 20BC072 3 37 130 4 500 80 5 72 84 112 125 HSJ125 208008585 4 145 l 4 45 95 1 85 94 128 150 HSJ150 37 l4 45 80 5 72 108 144 175 HSJ175 20BH1056 5 55 l 4 504 120 2 105 116 158 175 HSJ175 45 4 50 95 1 85 128 170 200 HSJ200 20BH1408 5 75 l 4 404 159 140 154 190 225 HSJ225 55 J4 40 120 2 105 158 190 225 HSJ225 20BH1708 5 6 on l 4 50 192 3 170 187 255 300 HSJ300 715 14 50M 159 140 210 280 300 HSJ300 20BH205 6 110 l 4 400 226 205 220 289 350 HSJ350 90 4 404 192 3 170 255 313 350 HSJ350 20BH2608 5 6 132 2 45 4 298 260 286 390 500 HSJ500 110 2 50 226 205 305 410 500 HSJ500 20BP292 7 160 4 40 342 185 292 322 438 500 170M6608 10 150 4 40 309 166 263 395 526 630 170M6610 10 20BP325 7 180 4 40 381 206 325 358 488 630 170M6610 10 180 4 40 381 206 32
39. Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 6 Preset Speed 7 Provides an internal fixed speed command value In bipolar mode direction is commanded by the sign of the reference Jog Speed 2 Sets the output frequency when Jog Speed 2 is selected Trim Setpoint Adds or subtracts a percentage of the speed reference or maximum speed Dependent on the setting of Trim Out Select parameter 118 Trim In Select Specifies which analog input signal is being used as a trim input Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options 10 0 Hz 300 0 RPM Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 1 RPM 5 0 Hz 150 RPM 10 0 Hz 300 RPM 20 0 Hz 600 RPM 30 0 Hz 900 RPM 40 0 Hz 1200 RPM 50 0 Hz 1500 RPM 60 0 Hz 1800 RPM Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 1 RPM 10 0 Hz 300 0 RPM Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 1 RPM 0 0 200 0 0 1 2 Analog In 2 See Speed Ref A Sel Trim Out Select Specifies which speed references are to be trimmed amp SES VIS x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 Bit2 Bit1 0 peenes dess 1 Trimmed 0 Add Not Trimmed Bit x Reserved Factory Default Bit Values Trim Hi Default 60 0 Hz Scales the upper value of the Trim In Min Max Maximum Speed Select selection when the source is an Units 0 1 Hz analo
40. gt Lal 44 0 1 73 gt 66 4 2 61 lt gt 128 0 5 04 e a 232 3 9 15 Le gt Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 32 Supplemental Drive Information Frame Rating Dimensions 6 All 34 9 1 37 Dia 22 2 0 87 Dia 56 2 2 21 Lae 3 Places 62 7 2 47 Dia 4 Places 45 6 1 80 gt gt 3 Places Removable Junction Box I as dh IT A O MN ran O A il HEAD AC 9 53 ad D T IU 8 62 ii l e e 7 30 185 d 00009000 wf OOOO o R f 151 8 1166 T OH 598 4 59 IS SI QO HOOK ORO 4 UD OO Y Y i i H Y 474 185 lt gt 52 1 2 05 lt 69 1 2 72 gt 130 1 5 12 gt gt 230 1 9 06 Le gt 280 1 11 03 Le gt 330 1 13 00 Le gt Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 33 Figure A 8 Frame 5 NEMA UL Type 12 Standalone 400 690V drives only 609 6 24 00 gt 25 4 1 00 gt Fe 558 8 22 00 gt gt 105 5 4 15 gt e A E 3 3 D H Air f d 1574 8 y 62 00 1543 0 1 5 62 75 0 06 1061 5 41 79 woo lR 5 51 os gt y Y y Du A Lol UU EE 13 5 0 53 Dia 12 7 0 5
41. 1 YN a Xew T yy 295 E UN 00 eu sdwy 2 28 GH dN ST San q Buey yuaang Di Di asny Leer asny Aejaq sdwyinding sGuyey duet haid Guney 3 Bojexe9 algejsnipy I 10199019 JOJOJA NOEL 101994014 96618 AUIIJ UON au JUaWely ndul WMd MA ama mam won eng 1010 Sa ON 40 02 y 2590 395 sa paaq uonoajo1d Indu DY HOA OOP J Y aide Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 15 Supplemental Drive Information 006 0012 0012 006 UUS L 006 00yL OSOL O0Z 98r 118 1 0y 00p 003 0093 0092 DULL 006 00LL ELEL 96 98 809 28 1 0p H DUS OF 19489807 008 0081 0081 URL 00 L 092 003L 006 009 Z y 209 1 0y Cl 05 m 006 00LZ 00LZ 006 DUS L 006 S601 08 O Z 98h 04 1 0b Z 00r 6 0 amp 20802 S fe 002 0091 0091 002 0031 002 0ZOL 08 Ses LZE LES 1 0y z 00 gt gt 008 0081 0081 URL UUE L URL 006 099 009 Ip 209 1 0p H OSE 8 00097906 ka e 002 00pL 00pL 009 0001 009 296 col 18p ves ERP 1 0y z 082 E DUL 0091 0091 002 0021 002 08 68S SES ZZE Les 1 0b H 00 8 8 SeS9E80 e 009 00 1 0031 Ses 006 Ges DER 29 Sly 882 Oly 1 0y c Ove S G DUL DUEL DUEL 009 0001 009 col 0 S L8b pee 8y 1 0p H 082 8 090906 S 009 0001 0001 Sly 008 Sly DEI 8rs S9E C 99 1 0y z DUG S 009 003 003 Ge
42. 3 32 249 Fault 4 Code Faults 3 46 170 Flying StartGain Restart Modes 3 32 250 Fault 4 Time Faults 3 46 174 Auto Rstrt Tries Restart Modes 3 32 251 Fault 5 Code Faults 3 46 175 Auto Rstrt Delay Restart Modes 3 32 252 Fault 5 Time Faults 3 46 177 Gnd Warn Level Power Loss 3 34 253 Fault 6 Code Faults 3 46 178 Sleep Wake Mode Restart Modes 3 33 254 Fault 6 Time Faults 3 46 179 Sleep Wake Ref Restart Modes 3 34 255 Fault 7 Code Faults 3 46 180 Wake Leve Restart Modes _ 3 34 256 Fault 7 Time Faults 3 46 181 Wake Time Restart Modes 3 34 257 Fault 8 Code Faults 3 46 182 Sleep Leve Restart Modes 3 34 258 Fault 8 Time Faults 3 46 183 Sleep Time Restart Modes _ 3 34 259 Alarm Config 1 Alarms 3 47 184 Power Loss Mode Power Loss 3 34 261 Alarm Clear Alarms 3 47 185 Power Loss Time Power Loss 3 34 262 269 Alarm X Code Alarms 3 47 186 Power Loss Level Power Loss 3 35 270 DPI Baud Rate Comm Control 3 49 187 Load Loss Level Power Loss 3 35 271 Drive Logic Rslt Comm Control 3 49 188 Load Loss Time Power Loss 3 35 272 Drive Ref Rslt Comm Control 3 49 189 Shear Pin Time Power Loss 3 35 273 Drive Ramp Rslt Comm Control 3 49 190 Direction Mode Direction Config 3 35 274 DPI Port Sel Comm Control 3 50 192 Save HIM Ref HIM Ref Config _ 3 36 275 DPI Port Value Comm Control 3 50 193 Man Ref Preload HIM Ref Config 3 36 276 Logic Mask Masks amp Owners 3 50 194 Save MOP Ref MOP Config 3 36 Security 3 54 195 MOP Rate MOP Config 3 36 277 Start Mask
43. 3 p 33 T 58 B 93 113 183 153 z a Note there is no At Position P indication when using timed steps 20 3 150 a 15 250 o 10 3 Step 5 S 350 Ed Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 5 450 0 Time Encoder Speed 415 Profile Status 700 _ Units Traveled 701 Current Step Step x Step x Step x Step x Step x Stepx Step x Step x Step Type Velocity AccelTime DecelTime Value Dwell Batch Next 1 Time 100 0 5 0 5 5 00 1 00 i 2 2 Time 200 0 5 0 5 5 00 1 00 1 3 3 Time 300 0 5 0 5 5 00 1 00 1 4 4 Encoder Abs 400 0 5 0 5 0 00 1 00 i 5 5 End N A N A 0 5 N A 0 00 N A N A Example 2 Six Step Velocity Profile Digital Input Based In each step the drive ramps at Step x AccelTime to Step x Velocity in the direction of the sign of Step x Velocity until a digital input is detected When the input is detected it transitions to the next step in the profile This continues through Digital Input 6 activating step 5 Step 5 is defined as a Parameter Level step Digital Inputs used in the profile must be defined as Prof Input Important A transition is required to start each step If the input is already true when transitioning to a digital input step the indexer will not go to the next step Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 26 Application Notes Figure C 9 Digital Input Example 350 250 150 Profile Status Scaled Encoder Speed Digi 15
44. 600 MCM 14 AWG 87 bein 87 Ibein connections see Note 9 O SHLD 08 Terminating point 1 6Nem 1 6 Nem Terminal for wiring shields 14 Ibein 14 bein O AUX 0 4 Auxiliary Control 1 5 mm 0 2 mm Terminal Voltage 16 AWG 24 AWG Block e PS PS 40mm2 05mm2 0 6Nem 0 6 Nem 12 AWG 22 AWG 5 3 Ibein 5 3 Ibein 7 10 4 0mm 0 049mm2 0 6Nem 0 6 Nem 12 AWG 30 AWG 5 3 Ibein 5 3 Ibein O Fan 5 6 User Supplied 4 0mm2 0 5mm2 0 6Nem 10 6 Nem Terminal Fan Voltage 12 AWG 22 AWG 5 3 bein 5 3 Dein Block 7 4 0mm2 0 5mm2 0 9Nem 0 6 Nem 12 AWG 22 AWG 8 0 bein 5 3 Ibein 8 10 4 0mm 0 5mm2 0 6Nem 10 6 Nem 12 AWG 22 AWG 5 3 bn 5 3 Ibein 1 External control power select drives only see Auxiliary Control Power Supply on page 1 14 for details EI Maximum minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept these are not recommendations 3 If may be necessary to connect multiple wires in parallel to these terminals using multiple lugs 4 Refer to the terminal block label inside the drive Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 16 Installation Wiring Figure 1 1 Component Locations Frames 0 6
45. Default 0 Disabled 091 327 Analog In 2 Loss 0 Disabled 092 Selects drive action when an analog Options 0 Disabled signal loss is detected Signal loss is 1 Fault 2 defined as an analog signal less than 1V 2 Hold Input z or 2mA The signal loss event ends and 2 Set Input Lo 5 normal operation resumes when the 4 Set Input Hi input signal level is greater than or equal 5 Goto Preset1 o to 1 5V or 3mA 6 Hold OutFreq r a 340 Anlg Out Config Selects the mode for the analog outputs Sy Ss 9 dal Se KEE 10 9 Bly 654 82 4 0 road 2 Bit 2 Factory Default Bit Values El 2 341 Anlg Out Absolut E Selects whether the signed value or absolute value of a parameter is used before lt being scaled to drive the analog output SS AS dada e EE 817 6 5413 21 0 Ra Bit Factory Default Bit Values Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 56 Programming and Parameters File Group Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Publication 20B UM002D EN P analog out scale Entering 0 0 will disable this scale and max scale will be used Example If Analog Out Sel Commanded Trq a value of 150 150 scale in place of the default 800 342 Analog Out Sel Default 0 Output Freq 345 Analog Out2 Sel Options See Table Selects the source of the value that drives the analog ou
46. Freq Raise Maximum Freq or lower Maximum Speed and or Overspeed Limit so that the sum is less than or equal to Maximum Freq The value at the thermistor terminals has been exceeded Motor Type has been set to Synchr Reluc or Synchr PM and one or more of the following exist e Motor Cntl Sel Sensrls Vect SV Economize or Fan Pmp V Hz e Flux Up Time is greater than 0 0 Secs e Speed Mode is set to Slip Comp e Autotune Static Tune or Rotate Tune Publication 20B UM002D EN P Alarm NP Hz Conflict PI Config Conflict Power Loss Precharge Active Prof Step Cflct PTC Conflict Sleep Config Speed Ref C lct Start At PowerUp TB Man Ref Cflct TorqProve Cflct UnderVoltage VHz Neg Slope Waking 3 No CC O typel o O Troubleshooting 4 13 Description Fan pump mode is selected in Motor Cnt Sel and the ratio of Motor NP Hertz to Maximum Freq is greater than 26 Check PI Configuration both AdjVoltTrim amp Torque Trim are selected Drive has sensed a power line loss Drive is in the initial DC bus precharge state An error is detected in trend step s s Set if Sleep Mode is enabled e Setif any profile step uses Encoder Incr and or Enc Absolute and Motor Cntl Sel parameter 53 is not set to FVC Vector and Feedback Select parameter 80 is not set to
47. HP Motor Drive Output Nominal Motor Voltage 10 gt Drive Rated Voltage gt Nominal Motor Voltage gt Drive Rated Voltage 10 N Actual Line Voltage Drive Input Example Calculate the maximum power of a 5 Hp 460V motor connected to a 480V rated drive supplied with 342V Actual Line Voltage input e Actual Line Voltage Nominal Motor Voltage 74 3 e 74 3 x 5 Hp 3 7 Hp e 74 3 x 60 Hz 44 6 Hz At 342V Actual Line Voltage the maximum power the 5 Hp 460V motor can produce is 3 7 Hp at 44 6 Hz a T 70 3 7 HP HP Motor Drive Output 342V gt t 480V gt i H 460V gt 528V gt i Actual Line Voltage Drive Input Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 46 Application Notes Notes Publication 20B UM002D EN P Appendix D Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives in Group Il Category 2 G D Applications with ATEX Approved Motors For information on See page General D 1 Motor Requirements D 2 Drive Wiring D 3 Drive Configuration D 3 Start Up 8 Periodic Drive Testing Requirement D 4 General This document provides information on operation of an ATEX Approved drive and ATEX approved motor The motor is located in a defined hazardous environment while the drive is not A protective system is required to stop current flow to the motor when an over temperature condition has been sensed in the motor When sensed the drive will go into a fault stop condition The
48. See Manual and allow bit 1 of Parameter 600 to be changed to a 1 enabling encoderless TorqProve TorqProve Manual Start Up It is possible to use the Assisted Start Up see page 2 3 to tune the motor However it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the hoist crane equipment during the routine If this is not possible refer to steps 1 through 12 on the following pages ATTENTION To guard against personal injury and or equipment damage caused by unexpected brake release verify the Digital Out 1 brake connections and or programming The default drive configuration energizes the Digital Out 1 relay when power is applied to the drive The PowerFlex 700 drive will not control the mechanical brake until TorqProve is enabled If the brake is connected to this relay it could be released If necessary disconnect the relay output until wiring programming can be completed and verified Initial Static Auto Tune Test 1 Set the following parameters as shown No Name Value Notes 380 Digital Oun Sel 9 At Speed keeps brake engaged during test 041 045 MotorNP Iper nameplate erter motor nameplate data 053 Motor Cntl Sel 4 FVC Vector 080 Feedback Select 3 Encoder 061 Autotune 1 Static Tune 2 Press the Start key on the HIM Parameters 062 064 will be updated Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 6 Application Notes Motor Rotation Encoder Direct
49. kHz oC Amps Cont 1Min 3Sec Fuse Delay Fuse 20BB2P2 0 05 033 4 50 2 2 2 2 4 3 3 5 JKS 5 20BB4P2 0 1 0 75 4 50 3 8 4 2 4 8 6 4 10 JKS 10 20BB6P8 112 15 4 50 6 9 6 8 9 12 15 HSJ15 20BB9P6 1 3 2 4 50 9 7 9 6 10 6 14 4 20 HSJ20 20BB015 1 3 4 50 16 15 3 16 8 23 30 HSJ30 20BB022 11175 5 4 50 23 3 22 24 2 33 45 HSJ45 20BB028 2 10 T5 4 50 30 28 33 44 60 HSJ60 20BB042 3 15 10 4 50 45 42 46 2 63 90 HSJ90 20BB052 3 20 15 4 50 55 52 63 80 100 HSJ100 20BB070 4 25 20 4 50 75 3 70 78 105 150 HSJ150 20BB080 4 30 25 4 50 86 8 80 105 140 175 HSJ175 20BN104 8 5 40 4 50 114 1 104 115 175 200 HSJ200 30 4 50 85 8 80 120 160 200 HSJ200 20BN1306 5 50 4 50 142 6 130 143 175 200 HSJ200 40 4 50 114 1 104 156 175 200 HSJ200 20BN154 8 6 60 4 50 169 154 169 231 300 HSJ300 50 4 50 142 6 130 195 260 300 HSJ300 20BN1928 j6 175 4 50 210 6 192 211 1988 350 HSJ350 60 4 50 169 154 231 308 350 HSJ350 20BN260 9 6 100 2 45 285 3 260 286 390 400 HSJ400 75 2 50 210 6 205 305 410 400 HSJ400 Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 22 Supplemental Drive Information Table A J 540 Volt DC Input Protection Devices See page A 24 for Notes e PWM Temp DC Input Non Time DriveCatalog E KW Rating Freq 1 Ratings Output Amps Delay Number GC ND HD kHz C Amps kW
50. logic will cause the drive to do a fast decel 0 1 sec and turn off This Stop limit will be enforced only in the direction the drive was running when the switch was activated momentarily or continuously see C in Figure C 4 A Start command in the same direction will only allow 0 Hz to be commanded A Start in the opposite direction will allow motion with a speed command from the selected speed reference If TorqProve is Enabled the drive will hold zero speed for a time determined by ZeroSpdFloat Time parameter 605 Two different input switches can be connected in series to one digital input to provide an end limit at both ends of the application e g lift conveyor etc With proper set up the drive will automatically apply the proper stopping based on the direction of the load even though only one digital input is being used Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 12 Application Notes Limit Switch Set up 1 Move the load to a position between the two decel switches A in Figure C 4 2 Select the switches in Digital In1 6 Select If switches are only used on one end of travel simply keep the load off of both switches when selecting in Digital In1 6 Select If the set up is done incorrectly the application will not move or will move at an incorrect slower speed This can be corrected by selecting Not Used for both limit switches in Digital In1 6 Select Then move the load between the Decel S
51. r 102 0 40 Min 13 50 12 00 gt le N 304 8 m FI ejo Q O JY Olo OO T Y o ole 50 8 2 00 A A gt 25 4 1 00 og 287 0 L1 11 30 214 4 8 44 35 3 1 39 t Y o T Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 46 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 22 IP00 NEMA UL Type Open Frame 10 AC Input Shown for DC Input Dimensions use the Inverter Left Bay 445 8 17 55 353 8 FS 13 93 Publication 20B UM002D EN P f 543 1 21 38 591 3 23 28 eer 757 7 503 7 L lt 29 83 1267 7 gt lt 19 83 49 91 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight kg Ibs Type Drive Drive amp Packaging DC Input 305 672 352 775 AC Input 532 1172 623 13
52. 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Present Direction X Local 0 No Local Control Control 1 Local Control X MOD 0 Not Increment Increment 1 Increment X X Accel Rate 00 No Command 01 Use Accel Time 1 10 Use Accel Time 2 11 Use Present Time X X Decel Rate 00 No Command 01 Use Decel Time 1 10 Use Decel Time 2 11 Use Present Time X X X Reference 000 No Command Select 001 Ref 1 Ref A Select 010 Ref 2 Ref B Select 011 Ref 3 Preset 3 100 Ref 4 Preset 4 101 Ref 5 Preset 5 110 Ref 6 Preset 6 111 Ref 7 Preset 7 D MOP 0 Not Decrement Decrement 1 Decrement 1 A0 Not Stop condition logic 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive The Start command acts as a momentary Start command A 1 will start the drive but returning to O will not stop the drive 2 3 This Start will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 is programmed for 2 Wire Control option 7 8 or 9 This Reference Select will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 is programmed for Speed Sel 1 2 or 3 option 15 16 or 17 When using the Logic Command Word for the Speed Reference Selection always set bit 12 13 or 14 to 1 Note that Reference Selection is Exclusive Ownership see Reference Owner on page 3 52 Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 8 Supp
53. 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 16 Group No 41 o 41 o 420 421 422 O 5 Gi S SL oO re E E SR S 423 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Fdbk Filter Sel Selects the type of feedback filter desired Light uses a 35 49 radian feedback filter Heavy uses a 20 40 radian feedback filter Notch FilterFreq Sets the center frequency for an optional 2 pole notch filter Filter is applied to the torque command 0 disables this filter Notch Filter K Sets the gain for the 2 pole notch filter Marker Pulse Latches the raw encoder count at each marker pulse Pulse In Scale Sets the scale factor gain for the Pulse Input when P423 is set to Pulse Input Calculate for the desired speed command as follows for Hz Pulse In Scale Input Pulse Rate Hz Desired Cmd Hz for RPM Pulse In Scale Input Pulse Rate Hz 120 Desired Cmd RPM Motor Poles Encoder Z Chan Defines if the input wired to terminals 5 amp 6 of the Encoder Terminal Block will be used as a Pulse or Marker input Options 1 amp 3 detect a loss of signal when using differential inputs regardless of the Feedback Select param 080 setting When option 2 or 3 is used with Profile Indexer mode the homing routine will position to the nearest marker pulse
54. 11 17 Preset Volt1 7 1822 DPI Port 1 5 652 Adj Volt Ref Hi Default 100 0 Scales the upper value of the Adj Volt Min Max 100 0 of Drive Rated Select selection when the source is an Units Volts o analog input 0 1 D Z 653 Adj Volt Ref Lo Default 0 0 o Scales the lower value of the Adj Volt Min Max 100 0 of Drive Rated Sl Select selection when the source is an Units Volts 2 analog input 0 1 654 Adj Volt Preset1 Default 0 0 VAC 655 Adj Volt Preset2 l 656 Adj Volt Preset3 wie j GE Se 657 Adj Volt Preset4 658 Adj Volt Preset5 659 Adj Volt Preset6 660 Adj Volt Preset7 Provides an internal fixed voltage command value that is available as a selection for Adj Volt Select 661 Min Adj Voltage Default 0 0 VAC Sets the low limit for the voltage Min Max 0 0 Drive Rated Volts reference when Motor Cntrl Sel is set to Units 0 1 VAC Adj Voltage 662 Adj Volt Command Default Read Only Displays the voltage value of the Min Max 0 0 Drive Rated Volts reference specified in Adj Volt Select Units 0 1 VAC 663 MOP Adj VoltRate Default 1 0 V s Sets the rate for the MOP Min Max 0 1 100 0 V s Units 0 1 V s Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 68 Programming and Parameters F Parameter Name amp Description GZ See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 669 Adj Volt TrimSel Default 2 Analog I
55. 2 0 001 Scale 3 amp 4 0 0 32767 000 0 1 Scale 1 amp 2 0 001 Scale 3 amp 4 0 0 32767 000 0 1 Scale 1 amp 2 0 001 Scale 3 amp 4 0 0 32767 000 0 1 Scale 1 8 2 0 001 Scale 3 amp 4 Read Only 32767 000 0 1 Scale 1 amp 2 0 001 Scale 3 amp 4 Related Programming and Parameters Communication File 3 49 2 COMMUNICATION Comm Control Group Parameter Name amp Description 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 270 DPI Baud Rate Default O Sets the baud rate for attached drive Options peripherals When changing this value the drive must be reset for the change to take affect Drive Logic Rslt The final logic command resulting from the combination of all DPI and discrete inputs This parameter has the same structure as the product specific logic command received via DPI and is used in peer to peer communications 271 ES Z Sy SOOO MK SS VVVV VEGAS PYLE s 8 SVP H PY PPL IIS 0101010111111011 1010101111010 pits 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 210 Bit Bits 1 14 13 12 Description D 0 0 No Command Man Mode 0 ID 1 RefA Auto 0 11 JO RefB Auto O 1 1 Preset3 Auto 1 O O Preset4Auto 1 O i Preset5 Auto 1 1 O Preset 6 Auto 1 1 1 Preset 7 Auto 272 Drive Ref Rsit Default Present frequency reference scaled as a M
56. 2513 480V 0 5 11 42 53 1 19 44 63 2 31 45 76 3 46 46 93 5 78 87 164 75 115 79 194 10 134 84 218 15 226 99 326 20 303 91 394 25 339 102 441 30 357 103 459 40 492 117 610 50 568 148 717 60 722 207 930 75 821 286 1107 100 1130 397 1527 125 1402 443 1845 150 1711 493 2204 200 1930 583 2513 600V 0 5 9 37 46 1 14 40 54 2 25 40 65 3 41 42 83 5 59 83 142 T5 83 75 157 10 109 77 186 15 177 93 270 20 260 83 343 25 291 95 385 30 324 95 419 40 459 109 569 50 569 141 710 60 630 195 825 75 1053 308 1361 100 1467 407 1874 125 1400 500 1900 150 1668 612 2280 480V T5 873 234 1107 100 1237 290 1527 125 1563 282 1845 150 1874 330 2204 200 2100 413 2513 600V 75 1091 270 1361 100 1537 337 1874 125 1584 316 1900 150 1895 385 2280 Supplemental Drive Information A 5 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information IP20 NEMA UL Type 1 Frames 7 10 Voltage 400 480V Hp Rating Dissipation Watts AC Input DC Input CND HD External Internal Total External Internal Total 7 250 200 3422 514 3936 3098 497 3595 250 250 4224 618 4842 3848 599 4447 8 300 250 3125 569 3694 2698 547 3245 350 300 3588 681 4269 3091 655 3746 400 350 4284 850 5133 3692 816 4510 450 400 4850 1000 5850 4178 965 5
57. 3 28 Load Loss Alarm 4 12 Load Loss Fault 4 7 Load Loss Level 3 35 Load Loss Time 3 35 Local Mask 3 51 Local Owner 3 52 Logic Command Word A 7 Logic Mask 3 50 3 54 Logic Mask Act 3 54 Logic Status Word A 8 Low Voltage Directive 1 52 M Man Ref Preload 3 36 Manual Conventions P 2 Manual Mode 1 46 Manual Auto Control 1 47 Marker Pulse 3 16 Masks amp Owners Group 3 50 Max Rod Speed 3 66 Max Rod Torque 3 65 MaxFreq Conflict Alarm 4 12 Maximum Freq 3 11 Maximum Speed 3 17 Maximum Voltage 3 11 Memory Retention Motor Overload C 16 Menu Structure HIM B 5 Metering Group 3 7 MicroPos Scale 3 64 Min Adj Voltage 3 67 Min Rod Speed 3 66 Minimum Clearances 1 2 Minimum Speed 3 17 C 12 MOD LED 4 2 Modes Auto Manual 1 46 Monitor File 3 7 MOP Adj VoltRate 3 67 MOP Config Group 3 36 MOP Mask 3 51 MOP Owner 3 52 MOP Rate 3 36 MOP Reference 3 7 Motor Cable Lengths 1 8 Motor Cntl Sel 3 10 Motor Control File 3 9 Motor Control Technology C 12 Motor Data Group 3 9 Motor Fdbk Type 3 15 Motor NP FLA 3 9 Motor NP Hertz 3 9 Motor NP Power 3 9 Motor NP RPM 3 9 Motor NP Volts 3 9 Motor OL Count 3 42 Motor OL Factor 3 10 Motor OL Hertz 3 10 Motor OL Mode 3 10 Motor Overload C 14 Motor Overload Fault 4 7 Motor Overload Memory Retention C 16 Motor Poles 3 10 Motor Sheave 3 66 Index 7 Motor Thermistor Alarm 4 12 Motor Thermistor Fault 4
58. 3 40 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description File See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 211 Drive Alarm 1 Alarm conditions that currently exist in the drive Prof SetHome will be set if the alarm is configured in Alarm Config 1 Prof Indexer is configured in Speed Torque Mod and the homing routine has not been successfully completed X xX x x x x x x x x xj0 x Pst 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Bit 4 1 Firmware 6 002 and later UTILITY Diagnostics Alarm conditions that currently exist in the drive piel 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Bit Publication 20B UM002D EN P Read Only 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved 212 Drive Alarm 2 Read Only A SS Y e N DAVANA OS ESE SC SEM S SIS ORLY YP SISSI ne Conaition rue 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Condition False IR 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Bit 4 S ds AH ESAS YSL 7 xix xxix xixlxixlx xixl0 010 0 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved Related M kek ND Po lak kak Programming and Parameters 3 41
59. 35 Figure C 11 Power Loss Mode Coast Nominal Bus Voltage 73 Motor Speed eor mo Power Loss Output Enable Figure C 12 Power Loss Mode Decel Bus Voltage Nominal 82 Power Loss f Output Enable Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 29 Process PID The internal PI function of the PowerFlex 700 provides closed loop process control with proportional and integral control action The function is designed for use in applications that require simple control of a process without external control devices The PI function allows the microprocessor of the drive to follow a single process control loop The PI function reads a process variable input to the drive and compares it to a desired setpoint stored in the drive The algorithm will then adjust the output of the PI regulator changing drive output frequency to try and make the process variable equal the setpoint It can operate as trim mode by summing the PI loop output with a master speed reference Slip Comp Slip Adder gt Open j Loop Spd Ref _ AAA UTP gt Spd Cmd Process L e PI Ref l HAD Process Pl Controller PI Fbk K PI Enabled Speed Control Or it can operate as control mode by supplying the entire speed reference This method is identified as exclusive mode
60. 4 8 Drive Overload 4 5 Drive Powerup 4 5 Encoder Loss 4 6 Encoder Quad Err 4 6 Excessive Load 4 5 Fatal Faults 4 6 Faults Cleared 4 6 Fit QueueCleared 4 6 FluxAmpsRef Rang 4 6 Ground Fault 4 6 Hardware Fault 4 6 Hardware PTC 4 6 Heatsink LowTemp 4 6 Heatsink OvrTemp 4 6 HW OverCurrent 4 6 1 0 Comm Loss 4 7 1 0 Failure 4 7 Incompat MCB PB 4 7 Input Phase Loss 4 7 IR Volts Range 4 7 IXo VoltageRange 4 7 Load Loss 4 7 Motor Overload 4 7 Motor Thermistor 4 7 NVS I O Checksum 4 7 NVS I O Failure 4 7 Output PhaseLoss 4 7 OverSpeed Limit 4 7 OverVoltage 4 8 Parameter Chksum 4 8 Params Defaulted 4 8 Phase Short 4 8 Phase to Grnd 4 8 Port 1 6 DPI Loss 4 8 Power Loss 4 8 Power Unit 4 8 Pulse In Loss 4 9 Pwr Brd Chksum 4 9 Pwr Brd Chksum2 4 9 Replaced MCB PB 4 9 See Manual 4 9 Shear Pin 4 9 Software 4 9 SW OverCurrent 4 9 TorqPrv Spd Band 4 9 Trnsistr OvrTemp 4 9 UnderVoltage 4 9 UserSet Chksum 4 9 Faults Cleared Fault 4 6 Faults Group 3 45 Faults Clearing 4 4 Fdbk Filter Sel 3 16 Feedback Select 3 17 FGP 3 3 File Applications 3 63 Communication 3 49 Dynamic Control 3 28 Inputs amp Outputs 3 54 Monitor 3 7 Motor Control 3 9 Pos Spd Profile 3 69 Speed Command 3 17 Utility 3 35 File Group Parameter 3 3 Filter RFI 1 5 Find Home Ramp 3 70 Find Home Speed 3 70 First Environment Installations 1 53 Flange Mount Dimensions A 33 A 34 A 36 A 37 A 3
61. 8 1 45 lt gt gt 50 7 2 00 gt 63 8 2 51 Le 112 0 4 41 _ gt gt 180 0 7 09 Le Publication 20B UM002D EN P Frame Supplemental Drive Information A 31 Rating Dimensions 75 Hp Le 104 0 4 09 gt 34 9 1 37 Dia 480V Le 93 2 3 67 gt 2 Places ee 55kW 400V KR 00V A o MB 4 ell 62 7 2 47 Dia Normal R A SEN N 2 Places Duty 9 52 l 4 I i 229 5 Drive 9 04 ar ae E 220 0 S Y p 2 8 66 o E 184 0 7 24 Loe 159 5 6 28 96 0 ii 3 78 REH LT T te 280 110 gt lt 45 0 1 77 gt 85 0 3 35 Le 150 0 5 91 e 215 0 8 46 Le gt 255 0 10 04 Le gt 100 Hp 34 9 1 37 Dia f 480V 42 6 1 68 gt 22 2 0 87 Dia frp 2 47 Dia Normal 31 9 1 26 gt SE Removable Junction Box Duty a ean Drive A y A IO o 241 9 9 52 223 5 J 8 80 L A 188 5 7 42 E Z 184 3 7 26 o e 153 5 6 04 96 0 ii 3 78 yY y 28 0 1 10
62. Actv 3 39 Dyn UsrSet Cnfg 3 38 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Index 4 Dyn UsrSet Sel 3 38 Dynamic Brake Resistor Selection 3 31 Setup 3 31 Dynamic Control File 3 28 E Earthing see Grounding Editing Parameters 3 1 Elapsed kWh 3 8 Elapsed MWh 3 7 Elapsed Run Time 3 7 EMC Directive 1 52 Instructions 1 52 EMI RFI Filter Grounding RFI Filter 1 5 Enc Position Fdbk 3 15 Enclosure Rating 1 2 Encoder Loss Fault 4 6 Encoder Pos Tol 3 70 Encoder PPR 3 15 Encoder Quad Err Fault 4 6 Encoder Speed 3 15 Encoder Terminal Block 1 39 1 42 Encoder Wiring 1 43 Encoder Z Chan 3 16 ESD Static Discharge P 3 Excessive Load Fault 4 5 External Brake Resistor C 3 F Factory Defaults Resetting to 3 37 B 5 Fan Connections Frame 10 1 13 Frame 7 1 10 Frame 8 1 11 Frame 9 1 12 Frames 5 amp 6 1 10 Fan Transformer Specifications Fusing 1 11 Fan Blower Terminal Blocks 1 11 Fan Pump Parameter Set 3 37 Fatal Faults Fault 4 6 Fault amp Alarm Types 4 1 Fault 1 Time 3 46 Fault Amps 3 43 Fault Bus Volts 3 43 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Fault Clear 3 45 Fault Clear Mode 3 45 Fault Clr Mask 3 51 Fault Config x 3 45 Fault Descriptions 4 5 Fault Queue B 5 Fault Speed 3 43 Fault x Code 3 46 Faults Analog In Loss 4 5 Anlg Cal Chksum 4 5 Auto Rstrt Tries 4 5 AutoTune Aborted 4 5 Auxiliary Input 4 5 Cntl Bd Overtemp 4 5 DB Resistance 4 5 Decel Inhibit 4 5 DPI Port 1 6
63. Alarm Description O User Configurable These alarms can be enabled or disabled through Alarm Config 1 on page 3 47 2 Non Configurable These alarms are always enabled Publication 20B UM002D EN P 4 2 Troubleshooting Drive Status The condition or state of your drive is constantly monitored Any changes will be indicated through the LEDs and or the HIM if present Front Panel LED Indications Figure 4 1 Typical Drive Status Indicators _ 90 Frames 7 10 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Troubleshooting 4 3 Name Color State Description PWR Green Steady Illuminates when power is applied to the drive Power O STS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running amp no faults are present Status Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing A start inhibit condition exists the drive cannot be See Drive Stopped started Check parameter 214 Start Inhibits page 4 11 Flashing An intermittent type 1 alarm condition is occurring Drive Running Check parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Steady A continuous type 1 alarm condition exists Drive Running Check parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Red Flashing Fault has occurred Check Fault x Code or Fault Queue See Steady A non resettable fault has occurred page 4 5 PORT Green Status of DPI
64. Analog In 2 is not a valid selection if it 18 DPI Port 1 was selected for any of the following 19 DPI Port 279 Trim In Select 20 DPI Port 3 2 PI Feedback Sel PI Reference Sel Current Lmt Sel Sleep Wake Ref 2 Requires a Series B HIM with firmware v5 004 or greater Selects the HIM to provide the manual speed reference when a digital input is configured for Auto Manual or Manual Auto Additionally if Man Ref Preload parameter 193 is set to Enabled the automatic speed reference will be preloaded into the HIM when the drive switches to Manual mode from Automatic mode or to Automatic mode from Manual mode e Set Save HIM Ref parameter 192 bit 1 Manual Mode as desired Set TB Man Ref Sel to the desired drive reference when in Manual Mode If set to one of the DPI Ports then Man Ref Preload must be set to enable or disable g reference preload of the current speed Connect a HIM to the DPI Port selected 5 e When Manual mode is requested through the terminal block digital input the drive evaluates if Manual mode can be granted o Z s If TB Man Ref Sel is set to a DPI Port and Man Ref Preload is enabled the ES 3 drive transfers the last value of the automatic speed reference to the HIM The uw Z HIM is now the speed reference source The terminal block has exclusive control n oi based on Save HIM Ref bit 1 Manual Mode If Man Ref Preload is disabled the HIM is
65. CRI F99 Got 1009 PI St 1 See See 08 Sel 08 06 99 09 689 2 9 1106 T 99 9 0904803 DCL DCL 0s 06 0s CD 69 9 8v FOr 0S t GLE 1 BILL GIL 09 DL 09 EI 26 cs FoS 69p 108 T Sy S 2904906 1 OW HOA 069 Wy XEN ou XW y UN a XENI NT 909 E uw L 2007 YAY sdwy 2 Z GH ON 8 Sam 1 40199 04d 1 405918 asni Aejaq asny ejeg sduwymdno sbu ey ydweL Baid Bugs 3 Bojejeg ynog mam au u0N ou 1ueuen mdu Wiel MA ana 10301 jeng 1 S891AaQ UO 99101d Indu Dy HOA 069 H V age Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 20 Ire MUS YUIS Eau OU 10 D Op pue PJLOG oU OU JO Jo 99 S Buel aunyesadwa ay Uad O d L YWAN 00d 404 L d L TN VWAN OZdl 40 S Dune ounyesadwiey aal JWI 2U 0 SCUEIduU0O SUILNSJEp 0 Joen ay yo piqisuodse y s y an10aJ1g abeyop mo7 ay Jesu 0 pauejoap axe pp sawel4 sduy Moo SAAUP Sept A009 Mun suajs s jddns 1amod penau papunolb ou Oy A08Y PUE DY ADDF YUM aSN JO payed 9 ele SOAUP QLL WEI Dune 19yyo ye pajesado aq Aew ap ay suoneo1dde Mnp neay 104 auo pue suoreo1dde Mnp pewou Jo auo sHulyes zuana penp aney Sau eo doy e BABY JOU OP 9 9 G sawe anyesadway SIL je SALI ayesado 0 peAowal aq snw jaqe do ausaUpg ay uado ad L IN VINAN 40 S Bug eunyesodwia 7 9 sewes eng uado adAL TN VWAN 0041 29 Uu BUR eunsojoua p od Wen pue 19081 doy ane Isny Do Ob SI SOAUP UOJL PULIS YSdI ZL ed L IN au 404 ainyesadwi
66. Compensation FGP Maximum Freq A Hz 25 lt gt 400 00 Par 55 FGP Par 55 90 00 Hz 25 lt gt 400 00 Tf using a HIM with a numeric keypad press the ALT key and the key to access the parameter by typing its number Publication 20B UM002D EN P Step 1 Select a valid destination parameter see Table B B to be linked refer to page B 6 HIM Overview B 7 Linking Parameters Most parameter values are entered directly by the user However certain parameters can be linked so the value of one parameter becomes the value of another For Example the value of an analog input can be linked to Accel Time 2 Rather than entering an acceleration time directly via HIM the link allows the value to change by varying the analog signal This can provide additional flexibility for advanced applications Each link has 2 components e Source parameter sender of information e Destination parameter receiver of information Most parameters can be a source of data for a link except parameter values that contain an integer representing an ENUM text choice These are not allowed since the integer is not actual data it represents a value Table B B lists the parameters that can be destinations All links must be established between equal data types parameter value formatted in floating point can only source data to a destination parameter value that is also floating point A maximum o
67. D IND I gt Ki IN D 00 IND Ge Kal IN OO k Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 48 Group Scaled Blocks Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Scale1 In Value Scale2 In Value Scale3 In Value Scale4 In Value Displays the value of the signal being sent to ScaleX In Value using a link Scale1 In Hi Scale2 In Hi Scale3 In Hi Scale4 In Hi Scales the upper value of ScaleX In Value Scale In Lo Scale2 In Lo Scale3 In Lo Scale4 In Lo Scales the lower value of ScaleX In Value Scale1 Out Hi Scale2 Out Hi Scale3 Out Hi Scale4 Out Hi Scales the upper value of ScaleX Out Value Scale1 Out Lo Scale2 Out Lo Scale3 Out Lo Scale4 Out Lo Scales the lower value of ScaleX Out Value Scale1 Out Value Scale2 Out Value Scale3 Out Value Scale4 Out Value Value of the signal being sent out of the Universal Scale block Typically this value is used as the source of information and will be linked to another parameter Publication 20B UM002D EN P Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 0 0 32767 000 0 1 Scale 1 amp 2 0 001 Scale 3 amp 4 0 0 32767 000 0 1 Scale 1 8
68. Defaults Resetting to 3 37 B 5 Diagnostic Data Viewing B 5 Diagnostics Group 3 39 Dig In Conflict Alarm 4 11 Dig In Status 3 42 Dig Out Invert 3 61 Dig Out Mask 3 62 Dig Out Param 3 62 Dig Out Setpt 3 60 Dig Out Status 3 42 Dig Outx Level 3 61 Dig Outx OffTime 3 61 Dig Outx OnTime 3 61 Digln DataLogic 3 59 Digital Inputs Group 3 58 Digital Inx Sel 3 58 Digital Outputs Group 3 58 Index 3 Digital Outx Sel 3 60 Dimensions Bottom View A 29 Drive A 25 Flange Mount A 33 A 34 A 36 A 37 A 38 Frame 5 Cutout A 35 Minimum Clearances 1 2 Direction Config Group 3 35 Direction Mask 3 51 Direction Mode 3 35 Direction Owner 3 52 Discrete Speeds Group 3 22 Distribution Systems 1 24 Resistive Grounded 1 4 Unbalanced 1 4 Ungrounded 1 4 DPI Baud Rate 3 49 DPI Fdbk Select 3 50 DPI Port 1 6 Fault 4 8 DPI Port Locations B 1 DPI Port Sel 3 50 DPI Port Value 3 50 DPI Ref Select 3 50 Drive Alarm 1 3 40 Drive Alarm 2 3 40 Drive Checksum 3 38 Drive Data Group 3 8 Drive Frame Size P 3 Drive Grounding 1 5 Drive Logic Rslt 3 49 Drive Memory Group 3 37 Drive OL Count 3 42 Drive OL Level Alarm 4 12 Drive OL Mode 3 28 Drive Overload Fault 4 5 Drive Powerup Fault 4 5 Drive Ramp Delt 3 49 Drive Ratings A 9 Drive Ref Det 3 49 Drive Status 1 3 39 Drive Status 2 3 39 Drive Status 3 3 43 Drive Temp 3 42 DriveExecutive 3 1 DriveExplorer 3 1 Droop RPM FLA 3 29 Dyn UserSet
69. Encoder or Simulator and Speed Torque Mod parameter 88 7 Pos Spd Prof e a Step Type is configured for Dig Input and the Step Value is greater than 6 less than 6 or zero or the digital input selected with Digital Inx Sel is not set to 57 Prof Input e Cleared if none of the above occur PTC is enabled for Analog In 1 which is configured as a 0 20 mA current source in Anlg In Config Sleep Wake configuration error With Sleep Wake Mode Direct possible causes include drive is stopped and Wake Level lt Sleep Level Stop CF Run Run Forward or Run Reverse is not configured in Digital Inx Sel Speed Ref x Sel or PI Reference Sel is set to Reserved Start At PowerUp is enabled Drive may start at any time within 10 seconds of drive powerup Occurs when e Auto Manual is selected default for Digital In3 Sel parameter 363 and e TB Man Ref Sel parameter 96 has been reprogrammed No other use for the selected analog input may be programmed Example If TB Man Ref Sel is reprogrammed to Analog In 2 all of the factory default uses for Analog In 2 must be reprogramed such as parameters 90 117 128 and 179 See also page 1 47 To correct e Verify reprogram the parameters that reference an analog input or s Reprogram Digital In3 to another function or Unused When TorqProve Cnfg is enabled Motor Cntl
70. GIL BIZ GLL 093 BBL 0 L Z 0S CCL 0S bi 09 W E URZ URT 009 DUZ 00 DUC LEZ 691 Sl F09 GPL oS T 09 9 pslegos x E E DL 00 00y Sel BCC Sel Sl DCL POL 907 86 os t Ov R W ka ke Ka URZ GLE 00S GLI BIZ GIL SL EPL 0 L Z 0S CCL 09 T 061 S ELO 0006 NINO 00 00 00 DUL GLL 00L 091 DC L 09 GO eZ 09 bi 0 i W S ba DL 00 Dk Sel See Sel SLL SLL Ol 90 86 oS T Up 1 S pOlaEoe 0006 NWO a 00 00 00 001 081 004 UPL SOL 08 S08 ZEL os Pl G i 0 T 0809807 0006 NWO 00 BLZ BIZ 06 DCL 06 SOL 8l 0 93 349 09 Pl 03 BZ b 009902 0089 NNO a i 00 003 003 09 004 09 08 9 ca 861 lp 0s t Gk DIE lt soga0s 00 9 NINO St9 384 W 0s DCL D I 0S 06 0s 9 cov cy Ob Cp 0s Y Ob S j lt rogeoz 0007 NWO 2 0 383 W 0s 00 00 se 09 se vv ER 82 Z0l Z S os Y GL Ob zi 8coga0s 00S2 NWO SZ9 384 W SZ9 380 W 920 3209 UC 09 09 Ge D BC EE ove cl 8 66L os T G SLI zzoggoz 919 3831 9L9 48C W 919 320 0 09 09 oz 0 oz 89l ESH 25 LEL 09 T S Li 9108807 019 3841 0L0 48C W 0 9 3Z9 W CL GE se CL oz CL vv 90L D I VE ER 09 T C Ui 9469803 010 384 019 380 010 429 W SL ER EG DL SL DL cl 6 89 F 6S os Pl Ss Z 8d9ga0 98 48d W 98 320 l N D CL CL S 8 G v9 8t cv FL EE os t SZ0 L 0 dd 929 380 N 979 3Z9 W SL DL E 9 8 Se vo ce 20 EL 09 t 0 90 0 dcgeos 1 DW HOA OFZ 1 OPE Slaquiny Dog
71. GLE GLE Os EIS os DG 88L Gell zel LLL 1 009 g Sel 5 W URZ 007 007 GLI 00 GLI 9LZ 8SL vbL Lol GEL pos H 061 9 prlagoe WEI GLE GLE Sel 002 Sel 861 DPL 66 996 EB pos Z DUL 1 URZ SZE SZE DCL osz URL 881 BEL Sel ecb LLL 008 C BGL 9 9241380z 0006 NWO E ES 00 00 00 DUL GLI 00 DEL 9LL ZL VSL Ei 0r Gl 9 w os BLIC Sle Sel ooz Sel DCL 601 66 9 96 676 0t H 001 9 6603903 00 9 NINO s DUL WE osz 06 Sel 06 93 v6 9 G09 28S pos Z 09 1 0006 NWO 00 00 00 06 URL 06 OL E ZL SL C 009 H 94 9 203903 00 9 NWO E SS 001 See Gee 08 Sel 08 POL 84 Z9 9 09 Cp 0s Z 0S 09 c903803 00 9 NNO 001 003 003 09 DLL 09 z8 F9 C8 967 lp os t Oti 09 z90380z 000b NINO St9 384 N e 001 WEI WEI 0s 06 0S P Hp l UBE OLE WI y DEI 0vp 1v03803 DODkNW 20 383 5 D Sel Sel Ov OL Ov vS SUP ce BUE YOC os Pl G i DEIEI ceoJa0s c 00S NWO 520 383 gt 0s 001 DUL se 09 se vr EE le LS 8 v2 0s y D i Se z c03803 ZS 00S2 NWO S 0 484 W S20 48C W S20 320 W 0 08 08 0 06 0 FEI sc cc b co os t Sb 02 zz0380z E 919 384 919 380 9L9 320 N D 0s 09 03 0p oz S S Leb ZE al Sb WI y Ob St Li ZLO3803 L 010 383 010 480 W 019 4 0 W Sk Ov ov SL Ge GL 8 Gel LLI ZOL 66 0s t GL Ob L LLo3g0S e 0L0 384 W 010 48d W 010 3297 SL 0 se DL 03 DL SEL 66 6 18 ER 0s T S GZ 0 0d63803 7
72. I 283 3 e 11 20 Y Y Y Y A K 16 8 0 66 4 13 5 0 53 Dia 12 7 0 50 Dia 4 Places See Note A Lifting Holes Note A 487 8 Mount with 0 50 Inch UNC Grade 5 or Higher Screws 19 20 Max or M12 Material Class 5 6 or Higher Screws l Use Flat Washer with each Fastener 80 Air Inlet 0 30 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight 1 kg be Description Drive Packaging 6 Standalone 176 90 390 0 229 07 505 0 UI Weights include HIM and Standard I O Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 37 Figure A 12 Frame 6 NEMA UL Type 12 Flange Mount 400 690V drives only 584 0 E LOT 556 0 lt 21 90 gt h 14 0 7 90 deisde Fa S 7 S gt WT A s Y ei ol 105 8 gt p 419 H JA Ii 1100 0 S R i f i 43 30 e 2 j 1078 0 2 H 42 40 eer J S y 60 0 H d R A la t aA tliat Tek o e 137 2 1273 a Se a he 11 0 om A A 0 43 Me PEM Stud 5 5 0 22 Dia Holes for Supplied Mounting Hardware oo 44 Places 294 7 DL Ens 11 60 l 2 4 0 10 Pes gt compres lll 1997 ceset 20 Ge Ya Ly Y ee E 5 2
73. Inertia Tune run during Start Up motor tests Important If using rotate tune for Sensrls Vect mode the motor should be uncoupled from the load or results may not be valid With FVC Vector either a coupled or uncoupled load will produce valid result Ready Parameter returns to this Q 2 setting following a completed inertia tune EK Inertia Tune A temporary command 2 eg Sg E E that initiates an inertia test of the motor oc load combination The motor will ramp up S 3 and down while the drive measures the oi amount of inertia 427 Torque Ref A Sel Default 0 Torque Stpt1 053 431 Torque Ref B Sel 24 Disabled O Selects the source of the external torque Options 0 Torque Gutt reference to the drive How this reference 1 Analog In 1 is used is dependent upon Speed 2 Analog In 2 Torque Mod 3 17 Reserved a e 1822 DPI Port 1 870 See Appendix B for DPI port locations 23 Reserved 24 Disabled 2528 Scale Block1 4 29 Torque Stpt2 428 Torque Ref A Hi Default 100 0 053 432 Torque Ref B Hi 100 0 Scales the upper value of the Torque Ref Min Max 800 0 x Sel selection when the source is an Units 0 1 analog input 429 Torque Ref A Lo Default 0 0 053 433 Torque Ref B Lo 0 0 Scales the lower value of the Torque Ref Min Max 800 0 x Sel selection when the source is an Units 0 1 analog input
74. Installing the HIM B 3 Menu Structure 04 B 4 Viewing and Editing Parameters B 6 Linking Parameters B 7 Adjustable Voltage Operation Cl External Brake Resistor C 3 Lifting Torque Proving CA Limit Switches for Digital Inputs C 11 Minimum Speed C 12 Motor Control Technology C 12 Motor Overload n on aaa nannaa C 14 Motor Overload Memory Retention C 16 Oyerspeed 5 gna SIE cese erer C 16 Position Indexer Speed Profiler C 17 Power Loss Ride Through C 27 Process TR avec tints gnaw detente C 29 Reverse Speed Limit C 32 Skip Frequency e e e e nnnna C 33 Sleep Wake Mode C 35 Start At Bowen C 37 Stop Mode C 37 Voltage Tolerance CAN General gd d e RR R N owes D 1 Motor Requirements D 2 Drive Winn RE sar detent Ae D 3 Drive Configuration D 3 Start Up amp Drive Testing Requirement D 4 Preface Overview The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information needed to install start up and troubleshoot the PowerFlex 700 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive with Vector Control For information on See page Who Should Use this Manual P 1 What Is Not in this Manual P 1 Reference Materials P 2 ATEX Approved Drives amp Motors P 1 Manual Conventions P
75. Motor Fdbk Type 412 Fdbk Filter Sel 416 Marker Pulse 421 Encoder PPR 413 Notch Filter Freq 419 Pulse In Scale 422 Enc Position Fdbk 414 Notch Filter K 420 Encoder Z Chan 423 Encoder Speed 415 Speed Spd Mode amp Speed Units 079 Overspeed Limit 083 Skip Freq Band 087 Command Limits Feedback Select 080 Skip Frequency 1 084 Speed Torque Mod 088 E Minimum Speed 081 Skip Frequency 2 085 Rev Speed Limit 454 ee Maximum Speed 082 Skip Frequency 3 086 Speed Speed Ref A Sel 090 Speed RefBHi 094 TB Man Ref Hi 097 References Speed Ref AH 091 Speed RefBLo 095 TB Man bei Lo 098 Re Speed Hei Alo 092 TB Man Ref Sel 096 Pulse Input Ref 099 Speed Ref B Sel 093 Discrete Speeds Jog Speed 1 100 Preset Speed 1 7 101 107 Jog Speed 2 108 Speed Trim Trim In Select 117 Trim Hi 119 Trim Setpoint 116 Trim Out Select 118 Trim Lo 120 Slip Comp Slip RPM O FLA 121 Slip Comp Gain 122 Slip RPM Meter 123 Process Pl PI Configuration 124 PI Upper Limit 132 Pl Reference Lo 461 PI Control 125 PI Preload 133 Pl Feedback Hi 462 Pl Reference Sel 126 PI Status 134 Pl Feedback Lo 463 PI Setpoint 127 PI Ref Meter 135 PI BW Filter 139 Pl Feedback Sel 128 PI Fdback Meter 136 PI Deriv Time 459 Pl Integral Time 129 PI Error Meter 137 PI Output Gain 464 PI Prop Gain 130 PI Output Meter 138 PI Lower Limit 131 Pl Reference Hi 460 Speed Regulator Ki Speed Loop 445 Spd Err Filt BW 448 Speed Loop Meter 451 Kp Speed Loop 446 Speed Desired BW 449 Kf
76. ODA AO OSIRIS O 5 OLDO y DOI 39 3 57 2 72 7 106 0 139 4 177 4 1 55 2 25 2 86 4 17 5 49 6 98 Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 30 Supplemental Drive Information Frame Rating Dimensions 3 All Le 105 3 4 15 p gt except 22 2 0 87 Dia lt lt 94 7 3 73 gt 37 3 1 47 Dia 50H cian 2 Places p 28 7 1 13 Dia 480V E EE 37 kW i ht FE 400V j 184 5 es 7 26 151 4 160 1 5 95 T 6 30 sa RS T VTT OOOO PREO OO T T D 22 7 0 89 gt le 29 0 1 14 66 0 2 60 gt 97 0 3 82 e a 137 2 5 40 187 0 7 36 H wel a rs E 37 kW Lae 94 7 3 73 gt 46 7 1 84 Dia R 28 7 1 13 Dia giang 400V 2 Places gt Normal Duty 7 l jo e 184 5 Drive E 726 6 50 160 1 H f I 6 30 ea OLOR 6 03 OSO VIELE 0000 KO h i O OC 0 fent Plate Es 27009 Le 29 0 1 14 Le 66 0 2 60 lt gt 130 0 5 12 186 0 7 32 Le gt 4 All 76 0 2 99 Le 28 7 1 13 Dia 47 0 1 85 Dia 2 Places 2 Places 65 3 2 57 lt gt 54 1 2 13 Dia 22 2 0 87 Dia 2 Places 189 7 AR B ert lr OO 7 00 157 9 6 21 141 9 5 59 a 4 14 26 8 1 06 L 36
77. Out 2 Voltage mode limit current to 5 mA 9 Analog Out2 Current mode max load is 400 ohms 10 HW PTC Input 1 1 8k ohm PTC Internal 3 32k ohm pull up 238 resistor 259 11 Digital Out 1 N C Fault Max Resistive Load 380 13 Digital Out 1 N O NOT Fault Max Current 5A Min Load 10 mA E Kr de 105W B Dial at as oo Run Max Current 3 5A Min Load 10 mA 17 Current In Jumper Placing a jumper across terminals 17 amp 18 Analog In 1 18 or 19 amp 20 will configure that analog 19 Current In Jumper input for current 20 Analog In 2 21 10V Pot Reference 2k ohm minimum load 22 10V Pot Reference 23 HW PTC Input 2 See above 24 24VDC Drive supplied logic input power 25 Digital In Common 26 24V Common Common for internal power supply 27 Digital In 1 Stop CE 115V AC 50 60 Hz Opto isolated 361 28 Digital In 26 Start Low State less than 30V AC 366 29 Digital In 36 Auto Man High State greater than 100V AC 5 7 mA 30 Digital In 40 Speed Sel 1 PEA GE S o Dial d Hadas Speed S s High State greater than Sid DO 10 mA Enable see pg 1 43 DC Digital Input Impedance 21k ohm Important 0 20mA operation requires a jumper at terminals 17 amp 18 or 19 amp 20 Drive damage may occur if jumper is not installed These inputs outputs are dependant on a number of parameters see Related Parameters Differential Is
78. Outputs 3 60 245 Fault 2 Code Faults 3 46 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters Number Parameter Name Group Page Number Parameter Name Group Page 380 Digital OutX Sel Digital Outputs 3 60 606 Float Tolerance Torg Proving 3 64 384 388 607 _ Brk Set Time Torq Proving 3 64 381 DigOutX Level Digital Outputs 3 61 608 TorqLim SlewRate Torq Proving 3 64 385 389 _ _ 609 BrkSlip Count Torq Proving 3 64 A 390 Dig OutX OnTime Digital Outputs 3 61 610 Brk Alarm Travel Torq Proving 3 64 J 611 MicroPos Scale Torq Proving 3 64 e 391 Ge 612 TorqProve Status Torq Proving 3 65 392 Dig Out Invert Digital Outputs 3 61 613 Brake Test Torg Torq Proving 3 65 393 DigOutParam Digital Outputs 3 62 631 Rod Load Torque Oil Well Pump 3 65 394 Dig Out Mask Digital Outputs 3 62 632 TorgAlarm Level Oil Well Pump 3 65 41T Dain DataLogic Digital Inputs 3 59
79. P 3 58 wn E gt D 2 o o Ra E E a Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Digital In1 Sel Digital In2 Sel Digital In3 Sel Digital In4 Sel Digital In5 Sel Digital In6 Sel 10 Selects the function for the digital inputs 1 Speed Select Inputs 3 12 1 Auto Reference Source Reference A Reference B Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 6 1 1 PresetSpeed7 To access Preset Speed 1 set Speed Ref x Sel to Preset Speed 1 Type 2 Alarms Some digital input programming may cause conflicts that will result in a Type 2 alarm Example Digital In1 Sel set to 5 Start in 3 wire control and Digital In2 Sel set to 7 Run in2 wire See Table 4 C for info on resolving this type of conflict o 0 0 11 110 1 1 o 0 o j1 1 J0 22220000 3 2 1 Spd Trq Mode 0 JO O ZeroTorque 0 JO 1 SpdReg 0 i O Torque Reg 0 i 1 Min Spd Trq 1 JO JO Max Spd Trq 1 0 1 Sum Spd Trq 1 1 0 Absolute 1 1 11 Pos SpdProf Il When Digital Inx Sel is set to option 2 Clear Faults the Stop button cannot be used to clear a fault condition Hl Typical 3 Wire Inputs Only 3 wire functions are allowed Including 2 wire selections will cause a type 2 alarm 5 Typical 2 Wire Inputs Only 2 wire functions can be chosen Including 3 wire selections
80. P 3 Cassette I O 1 39 Catalog Number Explanation P 5 CE Conformity 1 52 Requirements 1 53 Checklist Start Up 2 1 Circuit Breakers Input 1 6 Clear Fault Clr Owner 3 52 Clearing Alarms 4 11 Clearing Faults 4 4 Cntl Bd Overtemp Fault 4 5 Comm Control Group 3 49 Commanded Speed 3 7 Commanded Torque 3 8 Common Bus 1 51 Common Mode Capacitors 1 24 Common Mode Interference 1 38 Common Symptoms and Corrective Action 4 15 Communication File 3 49 Communications Logic Command Word A 7 Logic Status Word A 8 Programmable Controller Configurations A 6 Compensation 3 11 Conduit 1 8 Contactors Bypass 1 23 Input 1 23 Output 1 23 A 9 Control Options 3 3 Control Status 3 14 Control SW Ver 3 9 Control Wire 1 39 Control Auto Manual 1 47 Conventions Manual P 2 Copycat B 5 Counts per Unit 3 70 Cover Opening 1 1 Cross Reference Parameter by Name 3 76 by Number 3 79 Current Lmt Gain 3 28 Current Lmt Sel 3 28 Current Lmt Val 3 28 Current Rate Limit 3 29 Cutout Dimensions A 35 D Data In Ax 3 52 Data Out Ax 3 53 Data Saving B 5 Datalinks Group 3 52 DB Resistance Fault 4 5 DB Resistor 3 66 DB Resistor Type 3 31 DB While Stopped 3 29 DC Brake Level 3 30 DC Brake Time 3 30 DC Brk Levl Sel 3 30 DC Bus Memory 3 8 DC Bus Voltage 3 7 DC Input 1 51 Decel Inhibit Fault 4 5 Decel Inhibt Alarm 4 11 Decel Mask 3 51 Decel Owner 3 52 Decel Time x 3 28
81. Pos Spd Prof Cmd ProfSetup Status 3 69 464 PI Output Gain Process Pl 3 26 707 Encoder Pos Tol ProfSetup Status 3 70 476 494 ScaleX In Value Scaled Blocks 3 48 708 Counts Per Unit ProfSetup Status 3 70 477 495 ScaleX In Hi Scaled Blocks 13 48 711 Vel Override ProfSetup Status 3 70 478 496 ScaleX In Lo Scaled Blocks 3 48 713 Find Home Speed ProfSetup Status 3 70 479 497 ScaleX Out Hi Scaled Blocks 3 48 714 FindHomeRamp _ ProfSetup Status_ 3 70 480 498 ScaleX Out Lo Scaled Blocks 1249 718 Pos Reg Filter ProfSetup Status 3 70 481 499 ScaleX Out Value Scaled Blocks 13 48 719 _ Pos Reg Gain ProfSetup Status 3 70 595 PortMask Ac Security 3 53 720 Step x Type Profile Setup 3 71 596 Write Mask Cfg Security 3 53 721 Step x Velocity Profile Setup 3 72 597 Write Mask Act Security 3 53 722 StepxAccelTime _ Profile Setup 3 72 598 Logic Mask Act Security 3 54 723 Step x DecelTime Profile Setup 3 73 600 TorqProve Cnig Torq Proving 3 63 724 Step x Value Profile Setup 3 73 601 TorqProve Setup Torq Proving 3 63 725 Step x Dwell Profile Setup 1277 602 Spd Dev Band Tord Proving 3 63 726 Step x Batch Profile Setup 3 74 603 SpdBand Integrat Torq Proving 3 63 727 Step x Next Profile Setup 3 75 604 Brk Release Time Torq Proving 3 64 605 ZeroSpdFloatTime Torq Proving 3 64 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 82 Programming and Parameters Notes Publication 2
82. Related InN Es IV File UTILITY Alarms 25 co 26 ke 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Alarm Config 1 Enables disables alarm conditions that will initiate an active drive alarm RR gt Dec DUINA Se EE Y SEVESE a voan o ojojo o x o o ojo ojo See pits 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 54 32 1 0 B Bit D Da S SESS BS Ee EE SALS YIRA Y 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x x x x x x x x ix x x 0 0 0 0 0 p 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 2019 18 17 16 Reserved Bit 1 Firmware 6 002 and later Description OW Trq Level bit 19 For the Rod Torque Process Display to work the Oil Well Torque Level must be enabled Alarm Clear Default 0 Ready Resets all Alarm 1 8 Code parameters Options 0 Ready to zero 1 Clr Am Que Alarm 1 Code Default Read Only Alarm 2 Code Alarm 3 Code e si E Alarm 4 Code Alarm 5 Code Alarm 6 Code Alarm 7 Code Alarm 8 Code A code that represents a drive alarm The codes will appear in the order they occur first 4 alarms in first 4 out alarm queue A time stamp is not available with alarms 3 47 Related IND O INO IN G 00 Ino O ES IN ez jon IND I gt
83. Sb Si E DL 00 007 BGL BCC BC L es QL SOL 9 69 9 004 1 05 T 99 S S0kOg0e 00 00 BIZ 06 GLI 06 vr 80 cl BLE 689 USP El le Sg Os 00 00 OLL 003 OLL BC L P 8 79S vl8 UST T Sb ti 5800903 E G 001 osz 053 06 Os 06 H ve cl 8 ly 689 up F 08 4s amp 2409802 00 003 003 UL BC L DL 98 9 D I IO eS 105 vb ec DEI 9909807 09 URL URL 09 06 09 bl ER vy 8 CUP 0S y sel i v09803 S0 384 W S 3 D Sel Sel St 08 St 09 Sy 18 EYZ se 1 05 py SLIF8L Z 2 09903 Ce0 383 M D DCL DCL se 09 se Sy EE DEI 26 YRZ 0S vi Li St d 0 09803 620 383 20 380 N S20 320 lN 0 08 08 0 Sp UC EE ove ec e vl 902 105 vb GL Dit ze0980z 029 384 029 380 029 3Z9 W oz 09 09 oz 0 D Kee EI vSt oi FR 0S PI GS Sl S109807 9 9 384 N 919 380 N 9L 9 3Z9 W Sl St Sp GL BC GL FLL eb FLLI GZ got pos T TPI GS 0 LLOO90Z 010 383 M OL9 380 N OLO 320 N Sl 0 0 SL SL SL cel 66 DIE Pr 108 FI 4G t 0 1489803 99 380 W 98 320 N DH UZ UZ 9 DL 9 GL gs S de oF 1 05 vb FLI ZG 0 OdSOd02 0y8 380 1N 0t9 3Z9 WN de SL CL 9 JL 9 9 Sy SEI d SE 0S y SZ0 st 0 Sd 9807 S 929 380 W S28 320 N D GL 8 9 ZE F Ke EL EN 0S t so S20 0 1420803 918 320 E SL 9 E E 61 FL EHAO LL 108 y S20 80 0 dL 9803 ul IV HOA 00p OPE SISQUINN Dose aJgeneny T AE XR Wy XEN
84. Sel Feedback Select and Motor Fdbk Type must be properly set refer to page C 7 The bus voltage has dropped below a predetermined value Torq Perf Mode Custom V Hz amp the V Hz slope is negative The Wake timer is counting toward a value that will start the drive 1 See page 4 1 for a description of alarm types Publication 20B UM002D EN P 4 14 Troubleshooting Table 4 D Alarm Cross Reference No 1 Alarm No 1 Alarm Nol Alarm 1 Precharge Active 14 Load Loss 26 FluxAmpsRef Rang 2 UnderVoltage 15 Ground Warn 27 Speed Ref Cflct 3 Power Loss 16 Brake Slipping 28 an Vit Rang 4 Start At PowerUp 17 Dig In ConflictA 29 Sleep Config 5 Analog in Loss 18 Dig In ConflictB 30 TB Man Ref Cflct 6 IntDBRes OvrHeat 19 Dig In ConflictC 31 PTC Conflict 8 Drive OL Level 1 20 Bipolar Conflict 32 Brake Slipped 9 Drive OL Level 2 21 Motor Type Cflct 33 AdjVoltRef Cflct 10 Decel Inhibt 22 NP Hz Conflict 34 Home Not Set 11 Waking 23 MaxFreq Conflict 49 Torq Prove Cflct 12 Motor Thermistor 24 VHz Neg Slope 50 Prof Step Cflct 13 In Phase Loss 25 IR Volts Range 52 PI Config Conflict U Alarm numbers not listed are reserved for future use 2 Firmware 6 002 and later only Publication 20B UM002D EN P Troubleshooting 4 15 Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions Drive does not Start from Start or Run Inputs wired to the terminal block Cause s I
85. Sel Parameter 090 01010 Frequency Reference Speed Ref B Sel Parameter 093 01011 oa Funai lod Functions Preset Speed 2 Parameter 102 01110 Aito Lal Skip Clamp Preset Speed 3 Parameter 103 01H 1 Y Direction etc Preset Speed 4 Parameter 104 11010 d y Preset Speed 5 Parameter 105 10 1 b Min Max Speed Preset Speed 6 Parameter 106 11 0 i 11114 I Commanded Preset Speed 7 Parameter 107 R 4 4 Frequency DPI Port Ref 1 6 See Parameter 209 gt DP Command 1 1 Manual Speed Ref Options W an ani HIM Requesting Auto Manual el Man S Curve TB Man Ref Sel Parameter 096 Digital Input 1 1 Post Ramp Jog Speed Parameter 100 gt Jog Command l to follower drive for Speed Adders Speed Mode 1 Frequency Reference PI Output I gt 2 Process Pi 4 4 Slip Compensation LK 1 Slip Comp 4 None gt 0 Open Loop Output Frequency Auto Manual Examples PLC Auto HIM Manual A process is run by a PLC when in Auto mode and requires manual control from the HIM during set up The Auto speed reference is issued by the PLC through a communications module installed in the drive Since the internal communications is designated as Port 5 Speed Ref A Sel is set to DPI Port 5 with the drive running from the Auto source Attain Manual Control Press ALT then Auto Man on the HIM When the HIM attains manual control the drive speed command comes from the HIM speed control
86. Shield O Fan Terminal Block TB10 Heatsink Fan PE Connection Point IP00 O Nameplate DC Bus Brake Terminals G Main Control Board HIM Comm Module Optional O Installation Wiring 1 21 Figure 1 6 Power Terminal Block Terminal Block amp 1 Notes Shaded BR1 amp BR2 Terminals will only be present on drives ordered with the Brake Option Precharge Resistor Fuse DCT12 2 2 DC input drives w precharge only A O M8 Stud All Terminals 7 T Max Lug Width 25 4 mm 1 in BRI BR2DC DC U V W R S T M8 Stud All Terminals wa om Max Lug Width 31 8 mm 1 25 in s AS 4 7 BR1BR2DC DC U V W R S T T1 T2 T3 L1 L2 L3 AC Input Ratings are Normal Duty DC Input Ratings are Normal Duty 5 240V 40Hp 480V 75 Hp 690V 45 90 kW 240V 40Hp 480V 75Hp 690V 45 90 kW 400V 55kW 600V 75 Hp 400V 55kW 600V 75 Hp BR1Y H D VIS BRI D 240 Ps BR2 DC DC UMI W PE PE NU am BRZ po DC DC um VS wm PE vac vac PE Ps ojojojojojojol o o o O OJOJOJOJOlOlO O ojojojo o o OJOJO O O O Q O JfoJolo o ojojoj o O O lojojo ojojoj o 120 PS O vac 240V 50 Hp 480V 100 Hp 240V 50 Hp 480V 100 Hp 400V 75kW 600V 100 Hp 400V 75kW 600V 100 Hp BR1 BRt o 240 BR2 DC Dc DC UMI VS WT3 pe pg BS MS BR2 DC DC DC un VS wm VAG wc
87. Speed Loop 447 Total Inertia 450 Dynamic Ramp Rates Accel Time 1 2 140 141 DecelTime1 2 142 143 SCurve 146 Control Load Limits Current Lmt Sel 147 Drive OL Mode 150 Regen Power Limit 153 ZS Current Lmt Val 148 PWM Frequency 151 Current Rate Limit 154 AN Al Current Lmt Gain 149 Droop RPM FLA 152 Stop Brake Stop Mode 155 156 Bus Reg Ki 160 Bus Reg Kd 165 Modes DC Brk Lvl Sel 157 Bus Reg Mode 161 162 Flux Braking 166 DC Brake Level 158 DB Resistor Type 163 DB While Stopped 145 DC Brake Time 159 Bus Reg Kp 164 Restart Modes Start At PowerUp 168 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 Wake Time 181 Flying Start En 169 Sleep Wake Mode 178 Sleep Level 182 Flying StartGain 170 Sleep Wake Ref 179 Sleep Time 183 Auto Rstrt Tries 174 Wake Level 180 Powerup Delay 167 i Power Loss Power Loss Mode 184 Load Loss Level 187 Gnd Warn Level 177 Se S on Power Loss Time 185 Load Loss Time 188 meS Power Loss Level 186 Shear Pin Time 189 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters File Group Parameters Utility Direction Config Direction Mode 190 HIM Ref Config Save HIM Ref 192 Man Ref Preload 193 MOP Config Save MOP Ref 194 MOP Rate 195 Drive Memory Param Access Lvl 196 Reset Meters 200 Dyn UserSet Cnfg 204 Reset To Defalts 197 Language 201 Dyn UserSet Gel 205 Bins Load Frm Usr Set 198 Voltage Class 202 Dyn UserSet Ach 206 Save To User Gei 199 Drive Checksum 203 D
88. Step 11 Velocity 831 Step 12 Velocity 841 Step 13 Velocity 851 Step 14 Velocity 861 Step 15 Velocity 871 Step 16 Velocity Step Speed Sign of this value is used to determine direction for Time Time Blended Digital Input amp Parameter Level step types The value is an absolute number for all encoder step types 722 Step 1 AccelTime Default 10 0 Secs 732 Step 2 AccelTime 742 Step 3 AccelTime NAS S ig oe 752 Step 4 AccelTime 762 Step 5 AccelTime 772 Step 6 AccelTime 782 Step 7 AccelTime 792 Step 8 AccelTime 802 Step 9 AccelTime 812 Step 10 AccelTime 822 Step 11 AccelTime 832 Step 12 AccelTime 842 Step 13 AccelTime 852 Step 14 AccelTime 862 Step 15 AccelTime 872 Step 16 AccelTime This is the acceleration rate for the step Sets the time to ramp from zero to Maximum Speed File Group Related Min Max Maximum Speed Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM N POS SPD PROFILE Profile Step 1 16 Publication 20B UM002D EN P File POS SPD PROFILE Profile Step 1 16 873 724 734 744 754 764 774 784 794 804 814 824 834 844 854 864 874 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Step 1 DecelTime Step 2 DecelTime Step 3 DecelTime Step 4 DecelTime Step 5 DecelTime Step 6 DecelTime Step 7 DecelTime Step 8 DecelTime Step 9 DecelTime Step 10 D
89. TB Faults TB HIM or TB Y Stop Stop Closed Stop Closed Stop Closed Stop Closed CG Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Direct Mode New Start or Run Cmd 4 Analog Sig gt Sleep Level 6 Invert Mode Analog Sig lt Sleep Level 6 New Start or Run Cmd 4 Enable Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable Closed Wake Signal 4 Wake Signal Wake Signal Direct Mode New Start or Run Cmd 4 Analog Sig gt Sleep Level 6 Invert Mode Analog Sig lt Sleep Level 6 New Start or Run Cmd 4 Run Run Closed New Run Cmd Pl Run Closed New Run Cmd 6 Run For Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Run Rev 1 When power is cycled if all of the above conditions are present after power is restored restart will occur 2 If all of the above conditions are present when Sleep Wake Mode is enabled the drive will start 3 The active speed reference is determined as explained in Reference Control on page 1 46 The Sleep Wake function and the speed reference may be assigned to the same input 4 Command must be issued from HIM TB or network 5 Run Command must be cycled 6 Signal does not need to be greater than wake level 7 For Invert function refer to Analog In x Loss Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 34 Programming and Parameters Kal o F Parameter Name amp Description 3 O 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions
90. Temp Diagnostics 3 42 298 DPI Ref Select Comm Control 3 50 219 Drive OL Count Diagnostics 3 42 299 DPI Fdbk Select Comm Control 3 50 220 Motor OL Count Diagnostics 3 42 300 307 Data In XX Datalinks 3 52 221 Mtr OL Trip Time Diagnostics 3 42 308 HighRes Ref Datalinks 3 53 222 Drive Status 3 Diagnostics 3 43 310 317 Data Out XX Datalinks 3 53 223 Status 3 Fault Diagnostics 3 43 320 Anlg In Config Analog Inputs 3 54 224 Fault Speed Diagnostics 3 43 321 Anlg In Sqr Root Analog Inputs 3 54 225 Fault Amps Diagnostics 3 43 322 325 Analog In X Hi Analog Inputs 3 55 226 Fault Bus Volts Diagnostics 3 43 323 326 Analog In X Lo Analog Inputs 3 55 227 228 Status X Fault Diagnostics 3 43 324 327 Analog In X Loss Analog Inputs 3 55 229 230 Alarm X Fault Diagnostics 3 44 340 Anlg Out Config Analog Outputs 3 55 234 236 Testpoint X Sel Diagnostics 3 45 341 Anlg Out Absolut Analog Outputs 3 55 235 237 Testpoint X Data Diagnostics 3 45 342 345 Analog OutX Sel Analog Outputs 3 56 238 Fault Config 1 Faults 3 45 343 346 Analog OutX Hi Analog Outputs 3 56 240 Fault Clear Faults 3 45 344 347 Analog OutX Lo Analog Outputs 3 56 241 Fault Clear Mode Faults 3 45 354 355 Anlg OutX Scale Analog Outputs 3 56 242 Power Up Marker Faults 3 45 361 366 Digital InX Sel Digital Inputs 3 58 243 Fault 1 Code Faults 3 46 377 378 Anlg OutX Geint Analog Outputs 3 57 244 Fault 1 Time Faults 3 46 379 Dig Out Setpt Digital
91. Torque Limit 675 Adj Volt AccTime 131 Pl Lower Limit 437 Neg Torque Limit 676 Adj Volt DecTime 132 PI Upper Limit 438 Torque Setpoint2 677 Adj Volt S Curve 133 PI Preload 445 Ki Speed Loop 702 Home Position 139 PI BW Filter 446 Kp Speed Loop 707 Encoder Pos Tol 140 142 Accel Time X 447 Kf Speed Loop 711 Vel Override 141 143 Accel Time X 448 Spd Err Filt BW 713 Find Home Speed 146 S Curve 449 Speed Desired BW 714 Find Home Ramp 148 Current Lmt Val 450 Total Inertia 718 Pos Reg Filter 149 Current Lmt Gain 459 PI Deriv Time 719 Pos Reg Gain 151 PWM Frequency 460 PI Reference Hi 721 871 Step X Velocity 152 Droop RPM FLA 461 PI Reference Lo 722 872 Step X AccelTime 153 Regen Power Lim 462 PI Feedback Hi 723 873 Step X DecelTime 154 Current Rate Lim 463 PI Feedback Lo 724 874 Step X Value 158 DC Brake Level 464 PI Output Gain 725 875 Step X Dwell 159 DC Brake Time 494 ScaleX In Value 726 876 Step X Batch 160 Bus Reg Ki 495 ScaleX In Hi 727 877 Step X Next 164 Bus Reg Kp 496 ScaleX In Lo 165 Bus Reg Kd 497 ScaleX Out Hi 167 Powerup Delay 498 ScaleX Out Lo 170 Flying StartGain 602 Spd Dev Band 175 Auto Rstrt Delay 603 SpdBand Integrat 177 Gnd Warn Level 604 Brk Release Time 180 Wake Level 605 ZeroSpdFloatTime 181 Wake Time 606 Float Tolerance 182 Sleep Level 607 Brk Set Time Publication 20B UM002D EN P Appendix C Application Notes For information on
92. Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Read Only 0 0 Based on Drive Rating 0 1 VDC Read Only 0 0 429496729 5 kWh 0 1 kWh Read Only 0 000 20 000 mA 10 000V 0 001 mA 0 001 Volt Read Only 5 00 Volts 0 01 Volts Read Only 400 0 Hz 24000 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Read Only 400 0 Hz 24000 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Read Only 400 0 Hz 24000 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Read Only 800 0 0 1 Read Only 400 0 Hz 24000 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Read Only 0 00 3000 00 kw 0 01 kW Read Only 0 0 65535 0 VAC 0 1 VAC Related Eat Kal Z IO Io SA Ca Programming and Parameters 3 9 neo o S Parameter Name amp Description 3 o 2 se page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 028 Rated Amps Default Read Only s The drive rated output current Min Max 0 0 65535 0 Amps a Units 0 1 Amps 2 029 Control SW Ver Default Read Only 196 S Main Control Board software version Min Max 0 000 65535 000 Units 0 001 Motor Control File S Parameter Name amp Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions File Group Related Value
93. Value 3 48 Scaled Blocks Group 3 48 See Manual Fault 4 9 Setting Preferences B 6 Shear Pin Fault 4 9 Shear Pin Time 3 35 Shielded Cables Power 1 6 SHLD Terminal 1 5 Short Circuit Protection 1 6 Signal Wire 1 38 Single Phase Input Power 1 9 Skip Freq Band 3 18 Skip Frequency C 33 Skip Frequency x 3 18 Sleep Config Alarm 4 13 Sleep Level 3 34 Sleep Time 3 34 Sleep Wake Mode C 35 Sleep Wake Mode 3 33 Sleep Wake Ref 3 34 Slip Comp Gain 3 23 Slip Comp Group 3 23 Slip RPM FLA 3 23 Slip RPM Meter 3 23 Software Fault 4 9 Spd Err Filt BW 3 27 Spd Fdbk No Filt 3 8 Spd Mode amp Limits Group 3 17 SpdBand Integrat 3 64 Specifications Agency Certification A 1 Control A 3 A 4 Drive Ratings A 9 Electrical A 3 Encoder A 4 Environment A 2 A 3 Protection A 2 Speed Command File 3 17 Speed Command Sources 1 46 Speed Desired BW 3 27 Speed Dev Band 3 63 Speed Feedback 3 8 Speed Feedback Group 3 15 Speed Loop Meter 3 27 Speed Pot 1 44 Speed Ref A Hi 3 20 Speed Ref A Lo 3 20 Speed Ref A Sel 3 20 Speed Ref B Hi 3 20 Speed Ref B Lo 3 20 Speed Ref B Sel 3 20 Speed Ref Cfict Alarm 4 13 Speed Ref Source 3 41 Speed Reference 3 8 Speed Reference Control 1 46 Speed Reference Selection 1 46 Speed References Group 3 20 Speed Regulator Group 3 26 Speed Trim Group 3 22 Speed Units 3 17 Speed Torque Mod 3 19 Standard Control Option 3 3 Start At PowerUp 3 32 C 37 Start At
94. Values E 179 Sleep Wake Ref Default 2 Analog In 2 O Selects the source of the input controlling Options 1 Analog In 1 the Sleep Wake function 2 Analog In 2 180 Wake Level Default 6 000 mA 6 000 Volts 181 Defines the analog input level that will Min Max Sleep Level 20 000 mA start the drive 10 000 Volts Units 0 001 mA 2 0 001 Volts 3 181 Wake Time Default 0 0 Secs 180 E Defines the amount of time at or above Min Max 0 0 1000 0 Secs Wake Level before a Start is issued Units 0 1 Secs P 182 Sleep Level Default 5 000 mA 5 000 Volts 183 Defines the analog input level that will Min Max 4 000 mA Wake Level stop the drive 0 000 Volts Wake Level Units 0 001 mA 0 001 Volts 183 Sleep Time Default 0 0 Secs 182 Defines the amount of time at or below Min Max 0 0 1000 0 Secs Sleep Level before a Stop is issued Units 0 1 Secs 177 Gnd Warn Level Default 3 0 Amps 259 O Sets the level at which a ground warning Min Max 1 0 5 0 Amps fault will occur Configure with Alarm Units 0 1 Amps Config 1 184 Power Loss Mode Default 0 Coast 013 S Sets the reaction to a loss of input power Options 0 Coast 155 S Power loss is recognized when 1 Decel e DC bus voltage is lt 73 of DC Bus 2 Continue 2 Memory and Power Loss Mode is 3 Coast Input set to Coast 4 Decel Input e DC bus voltage is lt 82 of DC Bus B Decel 2 Stop MT
95. a top label 2 3 the back plate Publication 20B UM002D EN P Refer to pages A 12 through A 24 for exceptions To remove vent plate see page A 30 for location lift top edge of plate from the chassis Rotate the plate out from Removing the adhesive top label from the drive changes the NEMA UL enclosure rating from Type 1 to Open Installation Wiring 1 3 Minimum Mounting Clearances Frames 0 6 Lod ST y y ES Ta 101 6 mm 101 6 mm 101 6 mm 101 6 mm 4 0 in 4 0 in 4 0in 4 0 in y v No Adhesive Label see table above 50 8 mm ta With Adhesive Label 7 nl see table above Ss p E EN ES y 101 6 mm 101 6 mm 101 6 mm 101 6 mm GC TE 4 0in 4 0 in a v v Specified vertical clearance requirements are intended to be from drive to drive Other objects can occupy this space however reduced airflow may cause protection circuits to fault the drive In addition inlet air temperature must not exceed the product specification Frames 7 10 The drive must be mounted with sufficient space at the top sides and front of the cabinet to allow for proper heat dissipation Frame Recommendations 7 Allow a minimum of 152 mm 6 0 in at the top and bottom of the enclosure and 102 mm 4 0 in on the sides Flange Mount Allow a minimum of 152 mm 6 0 in at the back of the enclosure from flange mount surface to wall 8 10 Allow a minimum o
96. and cause a drive fault Refer to page C 16 221 Mtr OL Trip Time Default Read Only Amount of time before a Drive Overload Min Max 0 99999 fault F64 occurs if the load condition Units 1 remains constant A value of 99999 means that the drive is operating under the overload level Publication 20B UM002D EN P S Related gt a lac bak lO 047 048 gt INO e File UTILITY Diagnostics 222 223 22 US 22 al 22 D 22 Y Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Ea Drive Status 3 Read Only Indicates if a device has manual control of the speed reference or if a Fast Brake is in progress Q SS V S E CAS 1 Condition True x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 de 0 Condition False ps 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Bit Option Descriptions Manual Mode Refer to Manual Speed Sources in Chapter 1 of the User Manual Fast Braking Fast braking active see Stop Brk Mode A aa Status 3 Fault Read Only Captures and displays Drive Status 3 bit pattern at the time of the last fault SS o s OL E x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 Le plena pls 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 AIS 2 1 0 Reseved Bit Fault Speed Default Read Only Captures and dis
97. boards d Non Solid Ground e The green yellow MOV jumper wire should be insulated from ground If necessary remove the wire from the PE bus bar and insulate secure it to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components PE Bus Bar A A 10 All Al A green yellow wire connected to Solid Ground chassis e The green yellow MOV jumper wire should be connected to the chassis Non Solid Ground s The green yellow MOV jumper wire should be insulated from ground If eg necessary remove the wire and insulate secure both ends to guard MOV against unintentional contact with Jumper Wire chassis or components Converter Section 1 AC input drives only MOV s do not exist on DC input drives 2 Frame 7 10 drives do not have common mode capacitors Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 38 Installation Wiring UO Wiring Important points to remember about I O wiring Use Copper wire only Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75 degrees C Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire e Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended e Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 0 3 meters 1 foot Important I O terminals labeled or Common are not referenced to earth ground and are designed to greatly reduce common mode interference Grounding these term
98. drive is manufactured under the guidelines of the ATEX directive 94 9 EC These Drives are in Group II Category 2 GD Applications with ATEX Approved Motors Certification of the drive for the ATEX group and category on its nameplate requires installation operation and maintenance according to this document and to the requirements found in the User Manual and appropriate Motor Instruction Manual s ATTENTION Operation of this ATEX certified drive with an ATEX certified motor that is located in a hazardous environment requires additional installation operation and maintenance procedures beyond those stated in the standard user manual Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if all additional instructions in this document are not observed Publication 20B UM002D EN P D 2 Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors Motor Requirements e The motor must be manufactured under the guidelines of the ATEX directive 94 9 EC It must be installed operated and maintained per the motor manufacturer supplied instructions e Only motors with nameplates marked for use on an inverter power source and labeled for specific hazardous areas may be used in hazardous areas on inverter variable frequency power e When the motor is indicated for ATEX Group II Category 2 for use in gas environments Category 2G the motor must be of flameproof construction EEx d according to EN50018 or Ex d according to EN60079 1 or
99. ig Out Invert 3 61 ig Out Mask 3 62 ig Out Param 3 62 ig Out Setpt 3 60 Dig Out Status 3 42 ig Outx Level 3 61 Dig Outx OffTime 3 61 Dig Outx OnTime 3 61 Digln DataLogic 3 59 Digital Inx Sel 3 58 Digital Outx Sel 3 60 Direction Mask 3 51 UUUUU Direction Mode 3 35 Direction Owner 3 52 DPI Baud Rate 3 49 DPI Fdbk Select 3 50 DPI Port Sel 3 50 DPI Port Value 3 50 DPI Ref Select 3 50 Drive Alarm 1 3 40 Drive Alarm 2 3 40 Drive Checksum 3 38 Drive Logic Rslt 3 49 Drive OL Count 3 42 Drive OL Mode 3 28 Drive Ramp Rslt 3 49 Drive Ref Det 3 49 Drive Status 1 3 39 Drive Status 2 3 39 Drive Status 3 3 43 Drive Temp 3 42 Droop RPM FLA 3 29 Dyn UserSet Actv 3 39 Dyn UsrSet Cnfg 3 38 Dyn UsrSet Sel 3 38 Elapsed kWh 3 8 Elapsed MWh 3 7 Elapsed Run Time 3 7 Enc Position Fdbk 3 15 Encoder Pos Tol 3 70 Encoder PPR 3 15 Encoder Speed 3 15 Encoder Z Chan 3 16 Fault 1 Time 3 46 Fault Amps 3 43 Fault Bus Volts 3 43 Fault Clear 3 45 Fault Clear Mode 3 45 Fault Clr Mask 3 51 Fault Clr Owner 3 52 Fault Config x 3 45 Fault Speed 3 43 Fault x Code 3 46 Fdbk Filter Sel 3 16 Feedback Select 3 17 Find Home Ramp 3 70 Find Home Speed 3 70 Float Tolerance 3 64 Flux Braking 3 32 Flux Current 3 7 Flux Current Ref 3 12 Flux Up Mode 3 11 Flux Up Time 3 11 Flying Start En 3 32 Flying StartGain 3 32 Gearbox Limit 3 66 Index 9 Gearbox Rating 3 66 Gearb
100. inputs can be set for current or voltage with Anlg In Config param 320 e Setting Speed Units parameter 79 selects Hz or RPM Important When sending values through DPI ports simply remove the decimal point to arrive at the correct value i e to send 5 00 Hz use 500 GO Related Lists parameters if any that interact with the selected parameter The symbol O indicates that additional parameter information is available in Appendix C Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters 3 3 How Parameters are Organized The LCD HIM displays parameters in a File Group Parameter or Numbered List view order To switch display mode access the Main Menu press ALT then Sel while cursor is on the parameter selection In addition using Param Access Lvl the user has the option to display the full parameter set Advanced commonly used parameters Basic or diagnostic advanced tuning parameters Reserved To simplify programming the displayed parameters will change according to the selection made with Motor Cntl Sel For example if FVC Vector is selected the parameters associated solely with other operations such as Volts per Hertz or Sensorless Vector will be hidden Refer to pages 3 4 and 3 5 File Group Parameter Order This simplifies programming by grouping parameters that are used for similar functions The parameters are organized into files Each file is divided into groups and each
101. keys Release to Auto Control Press ALT then Auto Man on the HIM again When the HIM releases manual control the drive speed command returns to the PLC 1 To access Preset Speed 1 set parameter 090 or 093 to Preset Speed 1 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 48 Installation Wiring PLC Auto Terminal Block Manual A process is run by a PLC when in Auto mode and requires manual control from an analog potentiometer wired to the drive terminal block The auto speed reference is issued by the PLC through a communications module installed in the drive Since the internal communications is designated as Port 5 Speed Ref A Sel is set to DPI Port 5 with the drive running from the Auto source Since the Manual speed reference is issued by an analog input Analog In 1 or 2 TB Man Ref Sel is set to the same input To switch between Auto and Manual Digital In4 Sel is set to Auto Manual Attain Manual Control e Close the digital input With the input closed the speed command comes from the pot Release to Auto Control e Open the digital input With the input open the speed command returns to the PLC PLC Auto Terminal Block Manual with speed reference from the HIM Important Requires drive firmware v7 001 or greater and a Series B HIM with firmware v5 004 or greater A process is run by a PLC when in Auto mode and requires manual control from the terminal block with the speed reference
102. mA 0 000 Volts 347 Analog Out2 Lo Min Max 0 000 20 000mA Sets the analog output value when the 10 000V source value is at minimum Units 0 001 mA 0 001 Volt 354 Anlg Out Scale Default 0 0 355 Anlg Out2 Scale Min Max Analog Outt Sel Sets the high value for the range of Units 0 1 S Related O M io iO 95 io io Om io iS lt io O I gt KC pr IK CA On LA ICO IO gt ee lt kak 00 Co D ba CH IK kek IO KA CH NI Ka Y Co KG LE e Ka ES InN Ka LE e Ka E IK Programming and Parameters 3 57 no Qa a ols S Parameter Name amp Description amp ic G Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 2 377 Anlgi Out Setpt Default 20 000 mA 10 000 Volts gt E S 378 Anlg2 Out Setpt Min Max 0 000 20 000mA 3 a Controls the analog output value from a 10 000V e gt communication device Example Set Units 0 001 mA 2 2 Data In Ax to 377 value from 0 001 Volt mal Z communication device Then set Analog zZ Outx Sel to Param Cn Selected Option Definitions Analog Outx Sel Digital Inx Sel Digital Outx Sel Option Description Related At Speed Relay changes state when drive has reached commanded speed 380 Fast Stop When open the drive will stop with a 0 1 second decel time If T
103. minutes can cause uncommanded positive speed changes However an OverSpeed Limit fault F25 will occur if the speed reaches Maximum Speed Overspeed Limit parameters 82 and 83 If this condition is unacceptable action should be taken to 1 limit supply voltages within the specification of the drive and 2 limit fast positive input voltage changes to less than 10 Without taking such actions if this operation is unacceptable the adjust freq portion of the bus regulator function must be disabled see parameters 161 and 162 2 Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded deceleration times However a Decel Inhibit fault F24 is generated if the drive stops decelerating altogether If this condition is unacceptable the adjust freq portion of the bus regulator must be disabled see parameters 161 and 162 In addition installing a properly sized dynamic brake resistor will provide equal or better performance in most cases Important These faults are not instantaneous Test results have shown that they can take between 2 12 seconds to occur cause personal injury and or equipment damage Loads must always be controlled by the drive or a mechanical brake Parameters 600 611 are designed for lifting torque proving applications It is the responsibility of the engineer and or end user to configure drive parameters test any lifting functionality and meet safety requirements in accordance with all
104. now the speed reference source The terminal block has exclusive control based on Save HIM Ref bit 1 Manual Mode Important the HIM does not enter Manual mode it is only the reference source for the terminal block When Auto mode is requested through the terminal block the drive changes to Auto mode and returns control and reference to the previous state before Manual mode was requested 097 TB Man Ref Hi Default Maximum Speed 079 Scales the upper value of the TB Man Min Max Maximum Speed 096 Ref Sel selection when the source is an Units 0 1 Hz analog input 0 01 RPM 098 TB Man Ref Lo Default 0 0 079 Scales the lower value of the TB Man Min Max Maximum Speed 096 Ref Sel selection when the source is an Units 0 1 Hz analog input 0 01 RPM 099 Pulse Input Ref Default Read Only Displays the pulse input value as seen at Min Max 420 0 Hz terminals 5 and 6 of the Encoder 25200 0 RPM Terminal Block if Encoder Z Chan Units 0 1 Hz parameter 423 is set to Pulse Input 0 1 RPM Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 22 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 116 SPEED COMMAND 117 118 Speed Trim 119 120 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Jog Speed 1 Sets the output frequency when Jog Speed 1 is selected Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 4
105. or components Important Do Not Remove Disconnect the larger green yellow wire 2 The Input Filter Cap jumper wire top right should be insulated from ground with a nylon screw spacer Verify If necessary remove the metal screw and insert a M5 x 15 nylon screw spacer DO NOT REMOVE 1 AC input drives only MOV s and input filter caps do not exist on DC input drives EI When removing MOV s the input filter capacitor must also be removed Publication 20B UM002D EN P Factory Default Jumper Settings 1 36 Installation Wiring oa o 3 S MOV InputFilter 28 SE Caps o DC Bus Common Mode Caps D All Two green Green yellow wire to E yellow wires CM Cap Board is R connected to disconnected T Power Terminal Block PE C All Two green Green yellow wire to F yellow wires CM Cap Board is P connected to connected to Power W Power Terminal Terminal Block PE Block PE o o o po o jj o o Input Filter Cap CM Cap MOV S 1 2 Factory Default Jumper Settings Power Source Type NEMA UL Type 12 Drives Solid Ground 1 The green yellow CM Cap jumper wire should be connected to PE 2 The MOV Input Filter Cap jumper wires should be connected to PE Non Solid Ground 1 The green yellow CM Cap jumper wire should be insulated from ground If necessary remove the jumper w
106. or ground bus bar connected directly to building steel should be used All circuits including the AC input ground conductor should be grounded independently and directly to this point bar Typical Grounding fot Drive Bees eo Se a Safety Ground PE This is the safety ground for the drive that is required by code This point must be connected to adjacent building steel girder joist a floor ground rod or bus bar see above Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes Shield Termination Shield termination at SHLD Frames 0 6 or PE Frames 7 10 provides a grounding point for the motor cable shield The motor cable shield should be connected to this terminal on the drive drive end and the motor frame motor end A shield terminating cable gland may also be used When shielded cable is used for control and signal wiring the shield should be grounded at the source end only not at the drive end RFI Filter Grounding Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents Therefore the filter must only be used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly grounded bonded to the building power distribution ground Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected bonded to the same building power distributio
107. pg Ok or zi 00t 0 002 0091 0091 002 003 002 08 689 SES Zev PLS yor A URP 8 sesagoz ka 009 0021 003 Ses 006 Ges 0 8 ez9 Sly lee 66 por Zi OSE w 002 00pL 00pL 009 0001 009 col DEG 18y pg 39 100p C 00p 8 90902 009 0001 0001 Sly 008 Sp DEI 89 S9 162 LSE por Z 00 w 009 003 003 Ses 006 Ses EH Lov Slp iee 668 por H ose 8 Siragoz 8 m 009 056 056 BCP 002 Sey 059 887 SGK 092 ELE por z 083 w 009 0001 0001 Sly 008 Sly 8vs Zb S9E 262 HSE por H 00 8 S9CO090Z 009 056 056 Ser 002 Ser 099 887 SGK 092 ELE 0r y 053 0 z 009 096 096 Sev 002 Sev 88p BEE Sze 0921 ELE por T oszi Z seeagoe E 00p UR oss ose oss ose 975 D I 93 olz S3 por t 003 w S 00t 098 058 BIC 059 BIC BCP eee GBC eez 182 por T 0s3 Z 2620803 ul IV HOA 08p IO SloquinN BOJEJeO QENE T SRN T YU XEN y XEN ui 1 XEN UN 985 E T UL 1400 WAY sdwy 244 OH ON Y Sam 11 abuey D 0 asni Aejaq asny ejeg sdwy nding sfuneg duet bau Guney 3 Bojejeg yuading aiqeysnipy UA 101991014 JOJOJN DEL 101991019 sayealg AUIIJ UON au aa mdu WMd du ama Wa Wou eng 1030 sajoN 104 Z Y aed aag panuyuo saojaaq UONIAOAd Indu Dy HOA t d V QLL Publication 20B UM002D EN P E E Ss osz
108. provided by the HIM The auto speed reference is produced by the PLC and transmitted to the drive through a communications module installed in the drive Since the internal communications is designated as Port 5 Speed Ref A Sel is set to DPI Port 5 with the drive running from the Auto source When Manual mode is requested through the terminal block digital input the drive evaluates if Manual mode can be granted If TB Man Ref Sel parameter 96 is set to a DPI Port and Man Ref Preload parameter 193 is enabled the drive transfers the last value of the automatic speed reference to the HIM The HIM is now the speed reference source The terminal block has exclusive control based on Save HIM Ref parameter 192 bit 1 Manual Mode If TB Man Ref Sel is set to a DPI Port and Man Ref Preload is disabled the HIM is now the speed reference source The terminal block has exclusive control based on Save HIM Ref bit 1 Manual Mode Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 49 If TB Man Ref Sel is set to one of the DPI Ports a HIM must be connected on the DPI Port selected Important The HIM does not enter Manual mode it is only the reference source for the terminal block Attain Manual Control e Close the digital input With the input closed the speed command comes from the HIM Release to Auto Control Open the digital input With the input open the speed command returns to the PLC Auto Manu
109. pue one somos ainbyuog saw dwey Is UONIANG uonoaiig Aug 898q 1890Y poyjey pue paedg pue apoy doe erea JouUOD 1040W wa 1063 L Bulnoig bet anbioypsedg XENI 18S anbio zwupdo dN 1010W ou sanbyuog Bunosg bio Sou dwey l syw paads 1 SIS LAO10W pue ejeg Joo JOJJUOJ 10JON xa Sdund Weu 110 Org pds so P 8u0g 1014 PAS SOG GU ie 2 awid b104 alyosd pds sog uonoa g 218 11819 Dud ue say ony se yons uoyeoddy 9419905 sindino Deng H 2 104 em iue on enbia on saoualyay Deele saul dwey R Tou Eau Z 10 ajeog pue Jouog LOIS Voie Aue 18980 1999 poyaw Doan oun anen sonog pue paedg pue apom dois op Gd 1010W uoneorddy Be uoneayddy ainbyuog ainbyuog XE UIN 18S anbio aziundo dN 1010W au sain6yuog Juoneouddy y pose 100002 Sou dwey jo9Jas 0 dos5A e1S anbioyypaads syw paads y SIS LA010W pue eyed oo 10u09 Joe tege oul 1310 PEIS anujuog dee wg au0g ES Publication 20B UM002D EN P 2 6 Start Up Running S M A R T Start During a Start Up the majority of applications require changes to only a few parameters The LCD HIM on a PowerFlex 700 drive offers S M A R T start which displays the most commonly changed parameters With these parameters you can set the following functions S Start Mode and Stop Mode M Minimum and Maximum Speed A Accel Time 1 and Decel Time 1 R Reference Source T Thermal Motor Overload To run a S M A R T start routine Step Keys Exa
110. separated from sensitive circuits As an approximate guide allow a spacing of 0 3 meters 1 foot for every 10 meters 32 8 feet of length In all cases long parallel runs must be avoided Do not use cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 15 mils 0 4mm 0 015 in Use Copper wire only Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75 C Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire Unshielded THHN THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry environments provided adequate free air space and or conduit fill rates limits are provided Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15 Mils and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity Shielded Armored Cable Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive Strong consideration for shielded cable should be given in installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales capacitive proximity switches and other Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 7 devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications networking are also good ca
111. sequence 8 Fault 366 9 Mot Enabled 1 Options not listed are reserved for 10 Sleep future use 11 Jog 12 Autotune 13 Precharge Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 42 Programming and Parameters D Parameter Name amp Description ic See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 216 Dig In Status Read Only Status of the digital inputs n S xIx 1 Input Present 0 Input Not Present p 11514 x Reserved Bit 1 Firmware 6 002 and later 217 Dig Out Status Read Only Status of the digital outputs V V Y T ASS IS VVS 1 Output Energized xi x xix xix xix x xix x x o 0 0 vi S E pits 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 0 ro pla Bit E S 218 Drive Temp Default Read Only 2 Present operating temperature of the Min Max 0 0 100 0 gt 2 drive power section Units 0 1 219 Drive OL Count Default Read Only Accumulated percentage of drive Min Max 0 0 100 0 overload Continuously operating the Units 0 1 drive over 100 of its rating will increase this value to 100 and cause a drive fault or foldback depending on the setting of Drive OL Mode 220 Motor OL Count Default Read Only Accumulated percentage of motor Min Max 0 0 100 0 overload Continuously operating the Units 0 1 motor over 100 of the motor overload setting will increase this value to 100
112. source of the Pl feedback 1 Adjustable Voltage Mode PI Integral Time Time required for the integral component to reach 100 of PI Error Meter Not functional when the PI Hold bit of PI Control 1 enabled PI Prop Gain Sets the value for the PI proportional component PI Error x PI Prop Gain PI Output Publication 20B UM002D EN P Values Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units PI Setpoint 0 0 PI Setpoint 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 6 Reserved 7 Pulse In 8 Encoder 9 MOP Level 10 Master Ref 11 17 Preset Spd1 7 1822 DPI Port 1 5 2324 Reserved 2528 Scale Block 1 4 29 Presett 7 Volt 36 Voltage Cmd 50 00 100 00 of Maximum Process Value 0 01 0 PI Setpoint 0 PI Setpoint 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 6 Reserved 7 Pulse In 8 Encoder 9 MOP Level 10 Master Ref 11 17 Preset Spd1 7 1822 DPI Port 1 5 2324 Reserved 2528 Scale Block 1 4 29 Preset1 7 Voip 36 Voltage Cmd 37 Output Power 38 Output Cur 2 00 Secs 0 00 100 00 Secs 0 01 Secs 1 0 0 00 100 00 0 01 Related io De ESS a z a Q oO a HI wi a N 132 133 134 135 136 137 138
113. the drive will ramp to the desired velocity hold the speed and then ramp to zero in the programmed time for the given step Dwell time and batch affect when the next step is executed Time Blend When started the drive will ramp to the desired velocity and hold speed for the programmed time At this point it will transition to the next step and ramp to the programmed velocity without going to zero speed Digital Input When started the drive will ramp to the desired velocity and hold speed until the digital input programmed in the value transitions in the direction defined When this occurs the profile will transition to the next step after dwell and batch settings are satisfied It will then ramp to the programmed velocity without going to zero speed Encoder Incremental Blend EncincrBlend When started the drive will ramp to the desired velocity and hold speed until the units of travel programmed is reached within tolerance window The profile will then transition to the next step and the drive will ramp to the speed of the new step without first going to zero speed Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 21 Encoder Incremental Blend with Hold This profile is the same as the previous but contains the Hold function While Hold is applied the step transition is inhibited When released the step can then transition if the conditions to transition are satisfied Parameter Level Param Level
114. this publication before installing the drive 3 Grounding as described in this publication Frame 7 10 400 480V AC drives are certified for AC center grounded neutral power supply systems only 4 Output power control I O and signal wiring must be braided shielded cable with a coverage of 75 or better metal conduit or equivalent attenuation 5 All shielded cables should terminate with the proper shielded connector 6 The following conditions First Environment Restricted Distribution For any drive and option a filter may be required for motor cable lengths greater than 150 m 492 ft Second Environment Industrial Motor cable is limited to 30 m 98 ft for installations without additional external line filters Refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INO01 for additional information External filters for First Environment installations and increasing motor cable lengths in Second Environment installations are available Roxburgh models KMFA RF3 for UL installations and MIF or Schaffner FN3258 and FN258 models are recommended Refer to Table 1 K and http www deltron emcon com and http www mtecorp com USA or http www schaffner com respectively Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 54 Installation Wiring Table 1 K PowerFlex 700 Recommended Filters Manufacturer Deltron Schaffner Manufacturer Class M
115. this parameter is needed only if system inertia cannot be determined through an autotune Speed Desired BW is set to 0 when a manual adjustment is made to this parameter An internal Error Filter BW is active when Kp or Speed Desired BW is changed It is set to Kp times Total Inertia with a minimum of 25 radians Publication 20B UM002D EN P Values Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Defau Min Max Units It ax t t ax It ax ax 0 00 Secs 0 00 100 00 Secs 0 01 Secs 100 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 1 000 8 000 0 001 7 0 0 0 4000 0 0 1 6 3 0 0 200 0 0 1 Related Io SA Ca Io WSA CO a ES lt a e o a H DI a YN Group No o 2 ES 3 En E o e E E D N 447 448 449 450 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Kf Speed Loop Controls the feed forward gain of the speed regulator Setting the Kf gain greater than zero reduces speed feedback overshoot in response to a step change in speed reference ETE Spd Err Filt BW Sets the bandwidth of a speed error filter used in FVC Vector mode A setting of 0 0 disables the filter Speed Desire
116. to issue a Options 0 Disabled Start or Run command and automatically 1 Enabled O resume running at commanded speed after drive input power is restored Requires a digital input configured for Run or Start and a valid start contact ATTENTION Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines 169 Flying Start En Default 0 Disabled 170 a Enables disables the function which Options 0 Disabled 3 reconnects to a spinning motor at actual 1 Enabled RPM when a start command is issued E Not required in FVC Vector mode when EI using an encoder 170 Flying StartGain Default 4000 169 Sets the response of the flying start Min Max 20 32767 function Units 1 Important Lower gain may be required for permanent magnet motors 174 Auto Rstrt Tries Default 0 175 Sets the maximum number of times the Min Max 0 9 drive attempts to reset a fault and restart Units 1 ATTENTION Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do Not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines 175 Auto Rstrt Delay Default 1 0 Secs 174 Sets the time b
117. to use when Brake Test Min Max 0 0 150 0 is enabled in TorqProv Cnfg Units 0 1 631 Rod Load Torque Default Read Only Displays the load side torque Alarm Min Max 0 00 32000 00 FtLb Config 1 parameter 259 bit 19 must be Units 0 01 FtLb enabled to activate this display 632 TorqAlarm Level Default 0 00 FtLb Sets the level at which the Torque Alarm Min Max 0 00 5000 00 FtLb becomes active Note only active with Units 0 01 FtLb PC pump applications see param 641 633 TorqAlarm Action Default 0 No Action Sets the drive action when the Torque Options 0 No Action Alarm is exceeded Note only active with 1 Goto Preset1 PC pump applications see param 641 634 TorqAlarm Dwell Default 0 0 Secs Sets the time that the torque must Min Max 0 0 60 0 Secs 2 exceed TorqAlarm Level before Units 0 1 Secs 2 TorqAlarm Action takes place Note only active with PC pump applications see param 641 3 635 TorqAlrm Timeout Default 0 0 Secs Sets the amount of time a Torque Alarm Min Max 0 0 600 0 Secs can be active until timeout action begins Units 0 1 Secs Note only active with PC pump applications see param 641 636 TorqAlrm TO Act Default 0 Resume O Sets the drive action when TorqAlrm Options 0 Resume Timeout is exceeded Note only active 1 Fault Drive with PC pump applications see p 641 637 PCP Pump Sheave Default 20 00 Inch O Sp
118. will cause a type 2 alarm See Table 4 C for conflicts Configures the input to command a transition between the Manual Auto or Auto Manual speed references Refer to pages 1 46 1 49 for details Manual Auto 68 is similar to Auto Manual 18 except that the polarity is opposite Input Auto Manual Manual Auto State 18 68 Lo Auto Manual Hi Manual Auto continued Publication 20B UM002D EN P Values Default Default Default Default Default Default Options OONDORWNM O i a mi ami k EG M A E 1517 ooo CO oO Co Mm mn DN GQ IN RA M bM bM hM b COOC JO E CLA 31 33 Ca w w Ca w Gi OONOAH D 4142 a Qn G E EEE E N 000 Y O 014 OG Stop CF Start Auto Manual Speed Sel 1 Speed Sel 2 Speed Sel 3 Not Used Enable 7 9 Clear Faults CF Aux Fault Stop CF Start 4 8 Fwd Reverse 4 Run 6 9 Run Forward Run Reverse Jog Jog Forward Jog Reverse Stop Mode B Bus Reg Md B Speed Sel 1 3 1 Auto Manual 6 Local Acc2 amp Dec2 Accel 2 Decel 2 MOP Inc 12 MOP Dec 12 Excl Link 12 PI Enable PI Hold Pl Reset Pwr Loss Lvl Precharge En 12 Spd Trq Sel1 3 2 Jog 2 Pl
119. x3 Frames 0 1 8 0 7 0 0 28 x3 Frames 2 3 0 31 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches S Weight 2 kg be S Drive amp fA B C D E Drive Packaging 0 110 0 4 33 336 0 13 23 200 0 7 87 80 0 3 15 320 0 12 60 15 22 11 5 8 16 18 1 135 0 5 31 1336 0 13 23 200 0 7 87 105 0 4 13 320 0 12 60 7 03 15 5 9 98 22 2 222 0 8 74 342 5 13 48 200 0 7 87 192 0 7 56 320 0 12 60 12 52 27 6 15 20 33 5 3 222 0 8 74 517 5 20 37 200 0 7 87 192 0 7 56 500 0 19 69 18 55 40 9 22 68 50 1 Refer to Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings for frame information 2 Weights include HIM and Standard 1 0 Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 26 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A A PowerFlex 700 Frame 4 15 0 0 59 gt 7 0 0 28 dia K B E y Y A 8 0 031 Lifting Holes 4 Places Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight 2 kg Ibs Drive amp Packaging 29 03 64 0 4 220 0 8 66 758 8 29 87 201 7 7 94 192 0 7 56 738 2 29 06 24 49 54 0 1 Refer to Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings for frame information 2 Weights include HIM and Standard 1 0 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 5 PowerFlex 700 Frame 5
120. 0 A 57 9 gt 468 2 2 30 18 40 gt Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight 1 kg lbs Description Drive Packaging 6 Flange Mount 199 79 220 0 119 75 264 0 1 Weights include HIM and Standard I O Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 38 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 13 Frame 6 Flange Mount Cutout 4 00 0 157 Dia Holes 44 Places in Minimum 14 GA 1 9 Steel on 532 0 Mounting Surface Deburr Pilot Holes wu 50 pe 20 90 gt and Drive Cutout 1078 0 42 40 A 1043 0 41 10 971 0 38 20 899 0 35 40 827 0 32 60 ES Cutout i 755 0 29 70 ia 683 0 26 90 A 611 0 24 10 I 539 0 21 20 467 0 18 40 395 0 15 60 328 0 12 70 251 0 9 90 A 0 4 20 A Y VYYYYYYYYY U E Y l 35 0 12 0 44 0 1 70 1 40 0 50 122 0 4 80 200 0 7 90 278 0 10 90 356 0 14 00 gt 434 0 17 10 gt 512 0 20 20 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Publication 20B UM002D EN P Figure A 14 1P20 NEMA UL Type 1 Frame 7 Supplemental Drive Information lt 514 4 20 25 gt IS 477 3 18 79 ge Lae 440 2 17 33 gt 406 9 f in 16 02 352 8 261 6 A 13 89 DI Ae 10 30 210 8 Pr 12 30 8 30 y y 41 2 1 62 gt 90 4 3 56
121. 0 250 Digital Input 4 5s 350 Note Step 5 is a Parameter Level Step pajaneas spun days yuauing Encoder Speed 415 Profile Status 700 Units Traveled 701 Current Step Dig In Status 216 Step x Step x Step x Step x Step x Stepx Step x Step x Step Type Velocity AccelTime DecelTime Value Dwell Batch Next 1 Digital Input 300 0 5 0 5 3 00 0 00 1 2 2 Digital Input 50 0 5 0 5 400 5 00 1 3 3 Digital Input 300 0 5 0 5 5 00 0 00 1 4 4 Digital Input 100 0 5 0 5 6 00 0 00 1 5 5 Param Level 50 0 5 0 5 701 0 00 11 6 6 End N A N A 0 5 N A 0 00 N A N A Example 3 Five Step Positioner with Incremental Encoder The first three steps of this indexer are Encoder Incr steps followed by an Encoder Abs step to zero and then an End Hold Position step For each Encoder Incr step the drive ramps at Step x AccelTime to Step x Velocity in the direction of the sign of Step x Value It then decelerates at the rate of Step x DecelTime to the position programmed in Step x Value which sets the desired units of travel for the step When the value programmed in Step x Value is reached within the tolerance window programmed in Encoder Pos Tol the At Position bit is set in Profile Status In this example a dwell value held each of the first three steps At Position
122. 0 0 0s UC BC Ble C CR E 0s T S GZ L czoga0s e 029 383 029 380 020 320 W 0 OL UL D Se oz 9 EBL SLET 2S ZSI 09 T S Li Stoggog 2 919 384 919 380 919 320 SL 0y Ov CL 02 CL JL ras HL ve BD 09 T H 9d6gg0z a 010 3831 010 380 010 320 SL 0 0 DL EI DL BCL vol 8l F 89 0s vy Gh Z 8d9g80z 3 99 380 98 4290 W H SL GLb 9 DL 9 H 96 ev EL Le 09 EIN L 0 ddbggt 2 928 380 928 320 SL Ol E 9 ge 8z R CU 61 0S y 80 S0 0 zdzgg0z 5 1 OV HOA 802 Q ui OI Slequiny De SR SIS 1 XEN XEN p XEN UN XEN 4 YN 988 E UN ei vA Soy Do 2991 GH ONT Jequinn D 1 Buey D Di asny Lean asny ejeg sduwy inding sfuney q berg buneg Z Bop yuan aiqeysnipy YUM 101991014 1010 NOEL 101991014 Jee lg w j uoy eu Wee mdu dugl wad dy ama Pn PNM leng i JOJO sajoN 104 02 y 968d aag sao1mag uo199J01d Indu JY HOA 807 vg 9 0eL Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 13 Supplemental Drive Information osz 009 009 Gee UGP Gee Oly SOE S02 FOZ 691 09 c GL W 00 092 URL 00 GHS 00 06 9872 093 296 EEZ Sp C 001 9 0929902 SS URZ URT 009 002 00 003 80 LEG Sl 109 GPL os v 09 z W Ka 7 URZ GLS 009 Gee 00r Gee 88 be gelle ti 084 09 T GZ 9 lt 6Legos S ose GLE 00S
123. 0 71 25 Publication 20B UM002D EN P S 00p 009 009 See DGT See DLP S0 SUZ 1 L LL 661 0s GI GL 1 ka 00y 092 D I 00 HS 00 06 982 092 616 BBC Sy H OOF 9 0929907 5 osz 00s 00s See ose Gee 80 992 L F09 Z9b 0s El 09 W iS E gt S 007 009 009 00 ost 00 80 EZ kee GZ 802 0s T GL 9 c6Lagos E osz DGT 00s 00 00 003 00 Gee OS 608 ll 0s Pl 09 W S 053 00S 00S Gee Ose Gee 992 G6L AL F09 294 06 T 09 9 psiggos A zi OSI 00 00p Sel Gee Sel GLI 9SL vol ESE ELL 0s y Ov W URZ SIE 00S SLL HS BILL BILL EPL OEL rp 545 0s T 09191 OgLggos 0006 NWO Ost 00 ose Sel DUC Sel SLL SCT c6 S08 2v8 0s bi 0 W ka DCL ose Sly Os osz URL SLL cel Oct 2 0r ELL 09 T 0y S volados 0006 NINO DCL ose ose ULL 002 DLL DCL ZEE Z6 FOE Z8 0s t G i 08 y 0808803 0006 NWO ES 00 00 00 06 SLL 06 vel 6 282 6S el 0s bi D i Sc bI 04098803 c 00 9 NNO E 001 003 003 08 Sel 08 98 v9 9G FZL SIS 0s Pl Sk 03 2809902 ZS 00 9 NWO GRO E 0l EI SLL 09 DUL 09 Gel Ves 8v 9L Stt 0s t Ob LEI lt rogaos E DO0OENW 2 0 384 W gt 0s Sel Sel Ov 0Z Ov ER DEI cee LOL 962 D Pl SZ 0 zi 8z0gg0z S 00S2 NIND 520 383 979 380 N 20 329 W UC 00 0
124. 0 Dia 4 Places See Note A Lifting Holes 450 7 17 75 Max Note A 425 5 Mount with 0 50 Inch UNC Grade 5 or Higher Screws 16 75 or 287 0 M12 Material Class 5 6 or Higher Screws 11 30 Use Flat Washer with each Fastener ss SS Y E E Air Inlet Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight 1 kg lbs Description Drive amp Packaging Standalone 102 51 226 0 154 68 341 0 1 Weights include HIM and Standard 1 0 Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 34 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 9 Frame 5 NEMA UL Type 12 Flange Mount 400 690V drives only 500 0 19 69 gt 11 0 12 7 0 50 Dia Lifting Holes 4 Ples 0 43 A k G o e o ZS ae o Air Outlet A S a G G D K 4061 0 e 127 6 K 41 77 5 02 o 1039 0 lr 40 91 K e 449 6 17 74 ol o Y o A 53 2 2 09 jr 194 0 760 Y JN y Y_ H Y z as 11 0 A L Ground A E M5 PEM Nut 0 43 5 5 0 22 Dia Holes for Supplied Mounting Hardware T 40 Plcs 303 6 11 95 2 3 0 09 Compressed Jg 185 0 Gasket 7 ee 7 30 en A 3 82 Lon gt 384 0 1 65 15 12 S Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight kg Ibs Description Drive amp Packagin
125. 0 3 0 34 45 60 l6 JKS 6 20BD5P0 0 3 l2 4 50 45 50 55 75 J10 JKS 10 20BD8Po 0 2 K 50 8 1 80 88 12 15 HSJ15 20BD011 0 175 5 4 50 11 1 11 121 116 5 20 HSJ20 20BD014 1 10 ke 4 50 14 7 14 165 22 30 HSJ30 20BD022 1115 fio 14 50 23 3 22 242 33 40 HSJ40 20BD027 2 20 115 4 50 28 9 27 le E o HSJ50 20BD034 2 25 20 l4 50 36 4 34 Ans 54 60 HSJ60 20BD040 3190 25 l4 50 42 9 40 51 68 80 HSJ80 20BD052 3 140 30 l4 50 55 7 52 60 Ion 90 HSJ90 20BD065 3 50 ka 4 50 69 7 65 78 104 Im HSJ100 20BD0778 4 160 l4 50 84 5 77 85 116 150 HSJ150 50 l4 50 69 7 65 98 130 150 HSJt50 20BR096 9 5 75 4 504 105 3 96 106 144 175 HSJ175 60 4 504 184 5 77 116 154 175 HSJ175 20BR125 06 5 100 4 504 137 1 125 138 163 200 HSJ200 75 4 504 105 3 96 144 168 200 HSJ200 20BR1560N6 6 125 4 504 171 2 156 172 234 300 HSJ300 100 4 504 137 1 125 188 250 300 HSJ300 20BR180 6 6 150 4 504 204 180 198 270 400 HSJ400 125 14 504 171 2 156 234 312 400 HSJ400 20BR248 16 e 200 2 454 272 248 273 372 400 HSJ400 150 2 50 4 204 180 270 360 400 HSJ400 20BR292 7 250 4 40 328 212 292 322 438 Lean 170M66080 200 4 40 296 191 263 395 526 630 170M6608 10 20BR325 7 250 4 40 365 236 325 358 488 800 170M6612 250 4 40 365 236 325 488 650 laoo 170M6612 10 20BR365 8 300 2 40 410 265 365 402 548 laoo 170M6612 10 250 2 40 365 236 325 48
126. 0 7 365 365 300 8 208 240V 60 Hz Input 365 365 200 8 415 415 350 8 Code ee Geen Hp Frame 415 415 240 8 481 481 400 8 2s SS Sp 5 481 481 280 8 535 535 450 8 e ac Lo S 535 535 300 8 600 600 500 8 SC Sa Ss 20 i 600 600 350 8 730 730 600 9 Se i SS 30 i 730 730 400 9 875 875 700 10 ms 175 153 50 1 Bra ers 500 a 022 253 22 75 1 028 322 28 10 2 042 483 42 15 3 052 56 52 20 3 ozo 782 70 25 4 080 92 80 30 4 104 120 104 40 5 130 130 130 50 5 154 177 154 60 6 192 221 192 75 6 260 260 260 100 6 Publication 20B UM002D EN P P 6 Overview Position 1 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 a b CG d e f g h i j k I m n c4 e j ND Rating HIM Comm Slot 600V 60 Hz Input Code Operator Interface Code Network Type Code Amps Hp Frame 0 Blank Cover B BACnet MS TP 1P7 17 1 0 0 3 Full Numeric LCD ControiNet Coax 2P7 27 2 0 0 5 Prog Only LCD D DeviceNet 3P9 3 9 3 0 0 J gt Remote Panel Mount IP66 NEMA UL E EtherNet IP spy 61 50 0 Type 12 Full Numeric LCD HIM R Remote VO OPO 20 76 a K gt Remote Panel Mount IP66 NEMA UL 5 R5485 DFT Type 12 Prog Only LCD HIM 011 1 10 1 N None Available with Frames 5 6 Stand Alone IP54 017 17 15 1 drives Enclosure Code G 022 22 20 2 027 27 2
127. 002D EN P C 40 Application Notes Mode Description DC Brake to Stop Bus Voltage Output Voltage Output Current Motor Speed DC Brake Level Time sip B C A Command DC Brake Time This method uses DC injection of the motor to Stop and or hold the load DC Brake is selected by setting Stop Mode A B to a value of 3 The amount of time that braking will be applied is programmed in DC Brake Time and the magnitude of the current used for braking is programmed in and DC Brake Level This mode of braking will generate up to 40 of rated motor torque for braking and is typically used for low inertia loads with infrequent Stop cycles 1 2 On Stop three phase drive output goes to zero off Drive outputs DC voltage on the last used phase at the level programmed in DC Brake Level parameter 158 This voltage causes a stopping brake torque If the voltage is applied for a time that is longer than the actual possible stopping time the remaining time will be used to attempt to hold the motor at zero speed decel profile B on the diagram above DC voltage to the motor continues for the amount of time programmed in DC Brake Time parameter 159 Braking ceases after this time expires After the DC Braking ceases no further power is supplied to the motor The motor load may or may not be stopped The drive has released control of the motor load decel profil
128. 0B UM002D EN P Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Chapter 4 provides information to guide you in troubleshooting the PowerFlex 700 Included is a listing and description of drive faults with possible solutions when applicable and alarms For information on See page Faults and Alarms 4 1 Drive Status 4 2 Manually Clearing Faults 4 4 Fault Descriptions 4 5 Clearing Alarms 4 11 Alarm Descriptions 4 11 Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions 4 15 Testpoint Codes and Functions 4 18 Faults and Alarms A fault is a condition that stops the drive There are three fault types Type Fault Description CU Auto Reset Run When this type of fault occurs and Auto Rstrt Tries see page 3 32 is set to a value greater than 0 a user configurable timer Auto Rstrt Delay see page 3 32 begins When the timer reaches zero the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault If the condition that caused the fault is no longer present the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted Non Resettable This type of fault normally requires drive or motor repair The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared The fault will be reset on power up after repair User Configurable These faults can be enabled disabled to annunciate or ignore a fault condition An alarm is a condition that if left untreated may stop the drive There are two alarm types Type
129. 10 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description Related Group o E ic 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 047 Motor OL Hertz Default Motor NP Hz 3 042 O Selects the output frequency below Min Max 0 0 Motor NP Hz 220 which the motor operating current is Units 0 1 Hz derated The motor thermal overload will generate a fault at lower levels of current 048 Motor OL Factor Default 1 00 042 O Sets the operating level for the motor Min Max 0202 00 220 overload Units 0 01 Motor OL _ Operating FLA Factor Level 049 Motor Poles Default 4 O Defines the number of poles in the motor Min Max 2 40 z Units 1 Pole Q 050 sra Motor OL Mode o 2 Provides the ability to preserve the Motor OL Count value through a power cycle or drive reset Z o N Le ado y reen 109 817 6 5 443 21 0 x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Option Descriptions Pwr Cyc Ret If bit 0 is set to 0 Disabled the value of Motor OL Count parameter 220 is reset to zero by a drive reset or power cycle A 1 Enabled will maintain the value A transition from 1 to 0 resets Motor OL Count to zero MOTOR CONTROL 053 Motor Cntl Sel Default Sensrls Vect O Sets the method of motor control used in Options Sensris Vect the drive SV Economize O When Adj Voltage
130. 14 16 shown in powered state with drive faulted See pages 1 40 and 1 41 E Fault NOT Fault 4 NOT Run gt Run Select Source to Activate Parameters 380 384 Enable Input 1 Important Programming i 192 Save HIM Ref bit 1 Configure with parameter 366 For dedicated hardware Enable Remove Jumper J10 see 1 43 inputs for 2 wire control deactivates all HIM Start buttons unless parameter Manual Mode 1 This will allow HIM to control Start and Jog Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 46 Installation Wiring Reference Control Auto Speed Sources The drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different sources The source is determined by drive programming and the condition of the Speed Select digital inputs Auto Manual digital inputs or reference select bits of a command word The default source for a command reference all speed select inputs open or not programmed is the selection programmed in Speed Ref A Sel If any of the speed select inputs are closed the drive will use other parameters as the speed command source Manual Speed Sources The manual source for speed command to the drive can be selected several ways The HIM can provide the manual source when manual control is requested from the HIM see ALT Functions on page B 3 or the T O terminal blo
131. 14 Shear Pin Time 189 Power Loss 3 35 Torque Setpoint2 438 Torg Attributes 3 14 Skip Freq Band 87 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 18 Total Gear Ratio 646 Oil Well Pump 3 66 Skip Frequency 1 3 84 86 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 18 Total Inertia 450 Speed Regulator 3 27 Sleep Level 182 Restart Modes 3 34 Trim Setpoint 116 Speed Trim 3 22 Sleep Time 183 Restart Modes 3 34 Trim Hi 119 Speed Trim 3 22 Sleep Wake Mode 178 Restart Modes 3 33 Trim In Select 117 Speed Trim 3 22 Sleep Wake Ref 179 Restart Modes _ 3 34 Trim Lo 120 Speed Trim 3 22 Slip Comp Gain 122 Slip Comp 3 23 Trim Out Select 118 Speed Trim 3 22 Slip RPM FLA 121 Slip Comp 3 23 Units Traveled 701 ProfSetup Status 3 69 Slip RPM Meter 123 Slip Comp 3 23 Vel Override 711 ProfSetup Status 3 70 Spd Dev Band 602 Torg Proving 3 63 Voltage Class 202 Drive Memory 3 38 Spd Err Filt BW 448 Speed Regulator 3 27 Wake Level 180 Restart Modes 3 34 Spd Fdbk No Filt 21 Metering 3 8 Wake Time 181 Restart Modes 3 34 SpdBand Integrat 603 Torg Proving 3 63 Write Mask Act 597 Security 3 53 Speed Desired BW 449 Speed Regulator 3 27 Write Mask Cfg 596 Security 3 53 Speed Feedback 25 Metering 3 8 ZeroSpdFloatTime 605 Torq Proving 3 64 Speed Loop Meter 451 Speed Regulator 3 27 Speed Ref Source 213 Diagnostics 3 41 Speed Ref X Hi 91 94 Speed Reference 3 20 Speed Ref X Lo 92 95 Speed Reference 3 20 Speed Ref X Sel 90 93 Speed Reference 3 20 Publication 20B UM00
132. 143 500 450 5278 2010 7288 4506 1969 6475 9 600 500 8740 2270 11010 7752 2218 9970 10 700 600 8595 2339 10934 7470 2280 9750 1 Worst case condition including Vector Control board HIM and Communication Module Communication Configurations Typical Programmable Controller Configurations Important If block transfers are programmed to continuously write information to the drive care must be taken to properly format the block transfer If attribute 10 is selected for the block transfer values will be written only to RAM and will not be saved by the drive This is the preferred attribute for continuous transfers If attribute 9 is selected each program scan will complete a write to the drives non volatile memory EEprom Since the EEprom has a fixed number of allowed writes continuous block transfers will quickly damage the EEprom Do Not assign attribute 9 to continuous block transfers Refer to the individual communications adapter User Manual for additional details Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 7 Logic Command Status Words Figure A 1 Logic Command Word Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 Command Description x Stop 1 0 Not Stop 1 Stop x Sant l 0 Not Start 1 Start X Jog 0 Not Jog 1 Jog X Clear 0 Not Clear Faults Faults Clear Faults X X Direction
133. 2 Drive Frame Sizes P 3 General Precautions P 3 Catalog Number Explanation P 5 Who Should Use this Manual This manual is intended for qualified personnel You must be able to program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices In addition you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions What Is Not in this Manual The PowerFlex 700 Series B User Manual is designed to provide only basic start up information for the Vector Control drive Frames 0 10 For detailed drive information refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM004 Refer to the PowerFlex 700 Series A User Manual publication 20B UM001 for Standard Control information Literature is available online at http www rockwellautomation com literature Refer to Reference Materials on the next page ATEX Approved Drives amp Motors For detailed information on using ATEX approved drives and motors refer to Appendix D Publication 20B UM002D EN P P 2 Overview Reference Materials For additional drive information refer to the following publications online at www rockwellautomation com literature Title Publication PowerFlex 700 Standard Control User Manual 20B UM001 PowerFlex 70 and PowerFlex 700 Reference Manual PFLEX RM001 PowerFlex 70 Enhanced and PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Reference PFLEX RMO004 Manual PowerFlex Comm Adapter Manuals 20COMM UM Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse W
134. 205 6 55 171 9 0 400 102 5 25 20BD248 6 100 201 6 0 460 124 20BC260 6 66 220 6 0 400 130 25 20BD292 7 125 237 4 0 460 146 20BC292 7 80 247 7 0 400 146 25 20BD325 7 125 264 3 0 460 162 5 20BC325 7 90 275 7 0 400 162 5 25 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 11 600 690 Volt Single Phase AC Input Rating 600V Single Phase AC Input 690V Single Phase AC Input Drive Three Phase Drive ae Three Phase Catalog E Hp Input Output Catalog E kW Input Output Temp Number Rating Amps VAC Amps Number Rating Amps VAC Amps C 20BE1P7 0 0 5 1 1 0 575 0 9 25 20BE2P7 0 1 1 8 0 575 1 4 25 20BE3P9 0 1 5 2 6 0 575 2 25 20BE6P1 0 25 46 0 575 3 1 25 20BE9P0 0 3 75 6 7 0 575 4 5 25 20BE011 1 5 8 5 hae 1 55 25 20BE017 1 7 5 13 3 0 575 8 5 25 20BE022 2 10 17 5 0 575 Ich 25 20BE027 2 12 5 21 4 0 575 13 5 25 20BE032 3 15 25 4 0 575 16 25 20BE041 3 20 32 6 0 575 20 5 25 20BE052 3 25 41 3 0 575 26 20BF052 5 22 5 43 1 0 690 26 25 20BE062 4 30 50 4 0 575 31 20BF060 5 27 5 49 9 0 690 30 25 20BE077 5 37 5 62 6 0 575 38 5 20BF082 5 37 5 68 4 0 690 41 25 20BE099 5 50 80 5 0 575 49 5 20BF098 5 45 82 0 690 49 25 20BE125 6 62 5 101 6 0 575 62 5 20BF119 6 55 100 0 690 59 5 25 20BE144 6 75 117 1 0 575 72 20BF142 6 66 120 2 0 69
135. 23 Spd Err Filt BW 3 27 Spd Fdbk No Filt 3 8 SpdBand Integrat 3 64 Speed Desired BW 3 27 Speed Dev Band 3 63 Speed Feedback 3 8 Speed Loop Meter 3 27 Speed Ref A Hi 3 20 Speed Ref A Lo 3 20 Speed Ref A Sel 3 20 Speed Ref B Hi 3 20 Speed Ref B Lo 3 20 Speed Ref B Sel 3 20 Speed Ref Source 3 41 Speed Reference 3 8 Speed Units 3 17 Speed Torque Mod 3 19 Start At PowerUp 3 32 Start Inhibits 3 41 Start Mask 3 50 Start Owner 3 51 Start Acc Boost 3 15 Status 1 O Fault 3 43 Status 2 Fault 3 44 Status 3 Fault 3 43 Step x AccelTime 3 72 Step x Batch 3 74 Step x DecelTime 3 73 Step x Dwell 3 74 Step x Next 3 75 Step x Type 3 71 Step x Value 3 73 Step x Velocity 3 72 Stop Mode x 3 29 Stop Owner 3 51 SV Boost Filter 3 12 TB Man Ref Hi 3 21 TB Man Ref Lo 3 21 TB Man Ref Sel 3 21 Testpoint x Data 3 45 Testpoint x Sel 3 45 Torq Prove Sts 3 65 Torq Ref A Div 3 14 TorqAlarm Action 3 65 TorqAlarm Dwell 3 65 TorqAlarm Level 3 65 TorqAlrm Timeout 3 65 TorqAlrm TO Act 3 65 TorqLim SlewRate 3 64 TorqProve Cnfg 3 63 TorqProve Setup 3 63 Torque Current 3 7 Torque Ref B Mult 3 14 Torque Ref x Hi 3 13 Torque Ref x Lo 3 13 Torque Ref x Sel 3 13 Torque Setpoint1 3 14 Torque Setpoint2 3 14 Total Gear Ratio 3 66 Total Inertia 3 27 Trim Setpoint 3 22 Trim Hi 3 22 Trim In Select 3 22 Trim Lo 3 22 Trim Out Select 3 22 Units Traveled 3 69 Vel Override 3 70 Voltage Cla
136. 25 5 34 40 HSJ40 20BE027 2 25 20 4 50 29 27 33 44 50 HSJ50 20BE032 3 30 25 4 50 34 3 32 40 5 54 60 HSJ60 20BE041 3 40 30 4 50 43 9 41 48 64 70 HSJ70 20BE052 3 50 40 4 50 55 7 52 61 5 82 90 HSJ90 20BE062 4 60 50 2 50 68 62 78 104 125 HSJ125 20BT099 8 5 100 2 40 108 6 99 109 126 150 HSJ150 75 2 40 84 5 77 116 138 150 HSJ150 20BT144 8 6 150 2 50 158 144 158 216 250 HSJ250 125 2 50 137 1 125 188 250 1 250 HSJ250 Table A M 932 Volt DC Input Protection Devices PWM Temp DC Input kW Rating Freq 1 Ratings Output Amps Drive Catalog Non Time Number ND HD kHz C Amps Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Fuse Delay Fuse 2 20BW052 68 5 145 l 2 50 58 2 52 57 78 100 170M3691 37 5 2 504 46 9 46 69 92 100 170M3691 20BW098 68 5 190 l 2 50 4 110 7 98 108 127 160 170M3693 75 2 50 4 92 3 82 123 140 160 170M3693 20BW142 8 6 132 2 50M 162 2 142 156 213 250 170M3695 110 2 404 134 9 119 179 238 315 170M3696 Notes UI Drive frames 0 4 temperature rating is for NEMA UL Type Open The adhesive top label must be removed to operate drive at this temperature Frames 5 amp 6 do not have a top label 2 The power source to common bus inverters must be derived from AC voltages 600V or less as defined in NFPA70 Art 430 18 NEC Battery supplies or MG sets are not included The following devices w
137. 285 Local Mask 602 Spd Dev Band 298 DPI Ref Select 603 SpdBand Integrat 299 DPI Fdbk Select 604 Brk Release Time 300 307 Data In XX 605 ZeroSpdFloatTime 308 HighRes Ref 606 Float Tolerance 310 317 Data Out XX 607 Brk Set Time 320 Anlg In Config 608 TorqLim SlewRate 321 Anlg In Sqr Root 609 BrkSlip Count 322 325 Analog In X Hi 610 Brk Alarm Travel 323 326 Analog In X Lo 611 MicroPos Scale 324 327 Analog In X Loss 613 Brake Test Torq 340 Anlg Out Config 632 TorgAlarm Level 341 Anlg Out Absolut 633 TorgAlarm Action 342 345 Analog OutX Sel 634 TorgAlarm Dwell 343 346 Analog OutX Hi 635 TorgAlrm Timeout 344 347 Analog OutX Lo 636 TorgAlrm TO Act 354 355 Anlg OutX Scale 637 PCP Pump Sheave 361 366 Digital InX Sel 638 Max Rod Torque 377 378 Anlg OutX Setpt 639 Min Rod Speed 379 Dig Out Setpt 640 Max Rod Speed 380 384 388 Digital OutX Sel 641 OilWell Pump Sel 381 385 389 Dig OutX Level 642 Gearbox Rating 382 386 390 Dig OutX OnTime 643 Gearbox Sheave 383 387 391 Dig OutX OffTime 644 Gearbox Ratio 392 Dig Out Invert 645 Motor Sheave 393 Dig Out Param 647 DB Resistor 394 Dig Out Mask 648 Gearbox Limit 411 Digln DataLogic 650 Adj Volt Phase 412 Motor Fdbk Type 651 Adj Volt Select 413 Encoder PPR 652 Adj Volt Ref Hi 416 Fdbk Filter Sel 653 Adj Volt Ref Lo 419 Notch Filter Freq 654 660 Adj Volt Preset1 7 420 Notch Filter K 661 Min Adj Voltage 422 Pulse In Scale 663 MOP Adj VoltRate 423 Encoder Z Chan 669 Adj Volt TrimSel 427 4
138. 2D EN P Programming and Parameters 3 79 Parameter Cross Reference by Number Number Parameter Name Group Page Number Parameter Name Group Page 1 Output Freq Metering 3 7 84 86 Skip Frequency 1 3 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 18 2 Commanded Freq Metering 3 7 87 Skip Freq Band Spd Mode amp Limits 3 18 3 Output Current Metering 3 7 88 Speed Torque Mod Spd Mode 8 Limits 3 19 4 Torque Current Metering 3 7 90 93 Speed Ref X Sel Speed Reference 3 20 5 Flux Current Metering 3 7 91 94 Speed Ref X Hi Speed Reference 3 20 6 Output Voltage Metering 3 7 92 95 Speed Ref X Lo Speed Reference 3 20 7 Output Power Metering 3 7 96 TB Man Ref Sel Speed Reference 3 21 8 Output Powr Fctr Metering 3 7 97 TB Man Ref Hi Speed Reference 3 21 9 Elapsed MWh Metering 37 98 TB Man Ref Lo Speed Reference 3 21 10 Elapsed Run Time Metering 37 99 Pulse Input Ref Speed Reference 3 21 11 MOP R
139. 3 Regen Power Limit Default is 50 and will likely require a greater negative value A brake or other means of dissipating regenerative energy is recommended 147 Current Lmt Sel By default these parameters are set to provide 150 of 148 Current Lmt Val drive rating If lowered the performance may be degraded 161 Bus Reg Mode A The default setting will adjust frequency to regulate the 162 Bus Reg Mode B DC Bus voltage under regenerative conditions This will most likely cause a position overshoot To resolve this select Dynamic Brak and size the load resistor for the application Speed Regulator The bandwidth of the speed regulator will affect the performance If the connected inertia is relatively high the bandwidth will be low and therefore a bit sluggish When programming the acceleration and deceleration rates for each step do not make them too aggressive or the regulator will be limited and therefore overshoot the desired position Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 19 Position Loop Tuning Two parameters are available for tuning the position loop e Pos Reg Filter parameter 718 is a low pass filter at the input of the position regulator e Pos Reg Gain parameter 719 is a single adjustment for increasing or decreasing the responsiveness of the regulator By default these parameters are set at approximately a 6 1 ratio filter 25 gain 4 It is recomm
140. 3 Overspeed Limit 072 Break Frequency Default Motor NP Hz x 0 25 053 Sets the frequency the drive will output at Min Max 0 0 Maximum Freq 071 Break Voltage Refer to parameter 083 Units 0 1 Hz 412 Motor Fdbk Type Default 0 Quadrature E Selects the encoder type single channel Options 0 Quadrature Q or quadrature Options 1 amp 3 detect a 1 Quad Check loss of encoder signal when using 2 Single Chan 3 differential inputs regardless of the 3 Single Check Feedback Select param 080 setting 2 For FVC Vector mode use a quadrature encoder only option 0 1 If a single channel encoder is used option 2 3 in sensorless vector or V Hz mode select Reverse Dis option 2 in param 190 1413 Encoder PPR Default 1024 PPR o Contains the encoder pulses per Min Max 2 20000 PPR 2 revolution For improved operation in Units 1 PPR FVC Vector mode PPR should be gt 64 E X motor poles D 414 Enc Position Fdbk Default Read Only Displays raw encoder pulse count For Min Max 2147483647 single channel encoders this count will Units 1 increase per rev by the amount in Encoder PPR For quadrature encoders this count will increase by 4 times the amount defined in Encoder PPR 415 Encoder Speed Default Read Only 079 Provides a monitoring point that reflects Min Max 420 0 Hz speed as seen from the feedback device 25200 0 RPM Units 0
141. 31 Torque Ref X Sel 670 Adj Volt Trim Hi 428 432 Torque Ref X Hi 671 Adj Volt Trim Lo 429 433 Torque Ref X Lo 672 Adj Volt Trim 430 Torq Ref A Div 675 Adj Volt AccTime 434 Torque Ref B Mult 676 Adj Volt DecTime 435 Torque Setpoint 677 Adj Volt S Curve 436 Pos Torque Limit 702 Home Position 437 Neg Torque Limit 705 Pos Spd Prof Cmd 438 Torque Setpoint2 707 Encoder Pos Tol 440 Control Status 708 Counts Per Unit 445 Ki Speed Loop 711 Vel Override 446 Kp Speed Loop 713 Find Home Speed 447 Kf Speed Loop 714 Find Home Ramp 448 Spd Err Filt BW 718 Pos Reg Filter 449 Speed Desired BW 719 Pos Reg Gain 450 Total Inertia 720 Step x Type 454 Rev Speed Limit 721 Step x Velocity 459 PI Deriv Time 722 Step x AccelTime 460 PI Reference Hi 723 Step x DecelTime 461 PI Reference Lo 724 Step x Value 462 PI Feedback Hi 725 Step x Dwell 463 PI Feedback Lo 726 Step x Batch 464 PI Output Gain 727 Step x Next Publication 20B UM002D EN P w i U S Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Tel 1 262 512 8176 Fax 1 262 512 2222 Email support drives ra rockwell com Online www ab com support abdrives www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium
142. 4 11 00 ran a 279 4 11 00 1471 9 57 95 1493 5 58 80 279 4 11 00 603 0 23 74 This cutout is only needed if recessing the choke 468 9 18 46 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 22 9 0 90 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 27 Frame 10 Flange Mount Cutout lt 508 0 20 00 gt gt 355 6 14 00 gt 152 4 6 00 22 9 lt 0 90 Y 52 1 2 05 279 4 11 00 hole spacing 5 places both sides L 66 5 2 62 L lt 553 5 21 79 378 381 We 1 50 gt Inverter 22 9 0 90 12 5 0 50 tj y a 2 b S SES A See Detail Dimensions are in Millimeters and Inches Holes are for M6 self tapping screws 152 4 11524 K is A 51 32 3 1 27 39 9 1 57 Le 381 0 a 1588 5 62 Converter Jr 7 6 0 30 A 254 0 10 00 hole spacing 5 places both sides EE a Important Backplate and extension are a single piece Drive chassis can be removed from backplate to mount in user supplied IP54 NEMA UL Type 12 enclosure Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 52 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 28 Frame 10 Flange Mount Cutout Detail 558 3 21 98 543 3 21 39 127 7 5 03 Ref 0 00 L 15 7 0 62 pO Z 8 824 GZ U ge s8 81 8 827 530 9 20 90 4 496 4 19 15 425 5 16 75
143. 4 Drive Ref Del 1272 CommControl__ 3 49 Brk Set Time BUT Torq Proving 3 64 Drive Status 1 2 209 210 Diagnostics 3 39 BrkSlip Count 609 Torq Proving 3 64 Drive Status 3 222 Diagnostics 3 43 Bus Reg Kd 165 Stop Brake Modes 3 31 Drive Temp 218 Diagnostics 3 42 Bus Reg Ki 160 Stop Brake Modes 3 30 Droop RPM FLA 152 Load Limits 3 29 Bus Reg Kp 164 Stop Brake Modes 3 31 Dyn UserSet Ach 206 Drive Memory 3 39 Bus Reg Mode X 161 162 Stop Brake Modes 3 31 Dyn UserSet Cnfg 204 Drive Memory 3 38 Commanded Freq 17 Metering 37 Dyn UserSetSel 205 Drive Memory 3 38 Commanded Torque 24 Metering 3 8 Elapsed kWh 14 Metering 38 Compensation 56 Torq Attributes 3 11 Elapsed MWh 9 Metering 37 Control Status 440 Torg Attributes 3 14 Elapsed Run Time 10 Metering 37 Control SW Ver 29 Drive Data 3 9 Enc Position Fdbk 414 Speed Feedback 3 15 Counts Per Unit 708 ProfSetup Status 3 70 Encoder Pos Tol 707 ProfSetup Status 3 70 Current Lmt Gain 149 Load Limits 3 28 Encoder PPR 413 Speed Feedback 3 15 Current Lmt Sel__ 147 Load Limits 3 28 Encoder Speed 415 Speed Feedback 3 15 Current Lmt Val 148 Load Limits 3 28 Encoder Z Chan 423 Speed Feedback 3 16 Current Rate Limit 154 Load Limits 3 29 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters 3 77
144. 400 ohms 9 Analog Out 2 10 HWPTC Input 1 a 1 8k ohm PTC Internal 3 32k ohm pull up resistor 238 259 11 Digital Out 1 N C Fault Max Resistive Load 380 12 Digital Out 1 Common 240V AC 30V DC 1200VA 150W 391 13 Digital Out 1 N O NOT Fault Max Current 5A Min Load 10mA E Out 2 e Nomen ea ie iN 105W 5 Da ou ze sii GE Max Current 3 5A Min Load 10mA 17 Current In Jumper Placing a jumper across terminals 17 amp 18 or 19 18 Analog In 1 amp 20 will configure that analog input for current 19 Current In Jumper 20 Analog In 2 21 10V Pot Reference 2k ohm minimum load 22 10V Pot Reference 23 HW PTC Input 2 See above 24 OAV DCH Drive supplied logic input power 25 Digital ln Common 26 24V Common Common for internal power supply 27 Digital In 1 Stop CF 115V AC 50 60 Hz Opto isolated 361 28 Digital In 2 Start Low State less than 30V AC 366 29 Digital In 3 Auto Man High State greater than 100V AC 30 Digital In 4 Speed Sel 1 o m al Digital HS Speed Sel 2 High State greater than 20V DC 32 Digital In 6 Hardware Speed Sel 3 4 4 5 mA DC Enable see pg 1 43 33 Digital Out 4 N C Fault Dedicated fault output Not user configurable 34 Digital Out 4 Common Relay will energize pick up when power is 35 Digital Out4 N O NOT Fault applied to drive and deenergize drop out when a fault exists See Terminals 11 16 for specs PS Au
145. 5 PI Configuration 3 23 PI Control 3 23 PI Deriv Time 3 26 PI Error Meter 3 25 PI Fdback Meter 3 25 PI Feedback Hi 3 26 PI Feedback Lo 3 26 PI Feedback Sel 3 24 PI Integral Time 3 24 PI Lower Limit 3 25 PI Output Gain 3 26 PI Output Meter 3 25 PI Preload 3 25 PI Prop Gain 3 24 PI Ref Meter 3 25 PI Reference Hi 3 26 Pl Reference Lo 3 26 PI Reference Sel 3 24 PI Setpoint 3 24 PI Status 3 25 PI Upper Limit 3 25 Pos Reg Filter 3 70 Pos Reg Gain 3 70 Pos Torque Limit 3 14 Pos Spd Prof Cmd 3 69 Pos Spd Prof Sts 3 69 Power Loss Level 3 35 Power Loss Mode 3 34 Power Loss Time 3 34 Powerup Delay 3 32 PowerUp Marker 3 45 Preset Speed x 3 22 PTC HW Value 3 8 Pulse In Scale 3 16 Pulse Input Ref 3 21 PWM Frequency 3 29 Ramped Speed 3 8 Rated Amps 3 9 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Rated kW 3 8 Rated Volts 3 8 Reference Mask 3 51 Reference Owner 3 52 Regen Power Limit 3 29 Reset Meters 3 37 Reset To Defalts 3 37 Rev Speed Limit 3 19 Rod Load Torque 3 65 Run Boost 3 15 S Curve 3 28 Save HIM Ref 3 36 Save MOP Ref 3 36 Save To User Set 3 37 Scale In Hi 3 48 Scale In Lo 3 48 Scale In Value 3 48 Scale Out Hi 3 48 Scale Out Lo 3 48 Scale Out Value 3 48 Shear Pin Time 3 35 Skip Freq Band 3 18 Skip Frequency x 3 18 Sleep Level 3 34 Sleep Time 3 34 Sleep Wake Mode 3 33 Sleep Wake Ref 3 34 Slip Comp Gain 3 23 Slip RPM FLA 3 23 Slip RPM Meter 3
146. 5 488 650 800 170M6612 10 20BP365 8 200 2 40 428 231 365 402 548 630 170M6610 10 180 2 40 381 206 325 488 650 800 170M6612 10 20BP415 8 240 2 40 487 262 415 457 623 800 170M6612 10 200 2 40 428 231 365 548 730 900 170M6613 10 20BP481 8 280 2 40 564 304 481 530 722 900 170M6613 10 240 2 40 487 262 415 623 830 1000 170M6614 10 20BP535 8 300 2 40 627 338 535 589 803 1000 170M6614 10 280 2 40 564 304 481 722 962 1100 170M6615 10 20BP600 8 350 2 40 703 379 600 660 900 1100 8 170M6615 10 300 2 40 627 338 535 803 1070 1200 8 170M6616 10 20BP730 9 400 2 40 855 461 730 on 1095 12009 170M6616 10 350 2 40 703 379 600 900 1200 1400 170M6617 10 20BH875 10 500 2 40 1025 553 875 963 1313 2x800 170M6612 10 No Precharge 400 2 40 820 443 700 1050 1400 2x800 170M6612 10 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 23 Table A K 650 Volt DC Input Protection Devices See page A 24 for Notes Drive BS PWM Temp Non Time Catalog S Hp Rating Freq 1 DC Input Ratings Output Amps Delay Number CND HD kHz C Amps kW Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Fuse Fuse 2 20BD1P1 0 10 5 0 33 14 50 1 0 i Ja jis E JKS 3 20BD2P1 o li 0 75 4 50 1 9 21 24 32 f6 JKS 6 20BD3P4 lo 2 15 14 5
147. 5 2 032 32 30 3 k 041 41 40 3 f 052 L L 3 Documentation a Code Control 1 0 Volts 062 62 60 4 Gade Type A Standard 24V DC AC 077 77 75 5 A Manuel B Standard 115V AC 099 99 100 5 N No Manual E Vector 24V DC 125 125 125 6 o No Shipping Package D Weck Sean 144 144 150 6 Internal Use Only ecto d N Standard None Vector Control Option utilizes DPI Only Frame 7 10 drives only accept Vector Control c5 g ND Rating Brake 690V 50 Hz Input Ge ee been ode P Code Amps kW Frame L I 052 52 45 5 es eedbacl 060 60 55 5 N l No a S a Brake IGBT is standard on Frames 0 3 Code Type optional on Frames 4 6 and not available on o None 098 98 90 6 Fr 7 10 rames 1 Encoder 12V 5V 119 119 110 6 142 142 132 6 h d Internal Braking Resistor m Code w Resistor Future Use Enclosure y S Code Enclosure N No A 1P20 NEMA UL Type 1 Not available for Frame 3 drives or larger Open Flange Mount Fo Front IP00 NEMA UL Type Open Back Heatsink IP54 NEMA Type 12 Open Flange Mount Special Firmware Frames 0 6 Only NS Front IP00 NEMA UL Type Open i Code Type Back Heatsink IP54 NEMA 12 GE DE CTE Stand Alone Wall Mount i Gs Goda CE Filter OM Choke AE Cascading Fan Pump Control IP54 NEMA UL Type 12 z 7 Ye Yor AX 82 Hz Maximum J IPOO NEMA UL Type Open with EN Sumo OFF A Conformal Coat Ba Yes No ump Off for pump jack gt gt Must be used with Vector Control option C or N N N Kn ran NEMA UL E with Co
148. 5 4 3 2 1 0 x Reserved Bit 1 Firmware 6 002 and later Factory Default Bit Values Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 54 Programming and Parameters Group No 27 D 59 CO COMMUNICATIONS Security Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Logic Mask Determines which ports can control the drive If the bit for a port is set to 0 the port will have no control functions except for stop x x x x x xix x 11111 pls 1413 12 11 10 9 817 6 5 4 3 2 SH ege Bit 1 Firmware 6 002 and later Factory Default Bit Values Logic Mask Act Read Only Indicates status of the logic mask for DPI ports When bit 15 is set network security is controlling the logic mask instead of Logic Mask 8 114 1 Control Permitted 1 x 1 Control Permitted 1 0 Control Masked O x x x x x x 1 1 1 pii 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x Reserved Bit 1 Firmware 6 002 and later Factory Default Bit Values Inputs amp Outputs File T File 32 o wn 5 a E 5 E EN c S o ee 2 321 5 E E lt Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Anlg In Config Selects the mode for the an
149. 633 TorgAlarm Action Oil Well Pump 77 412 MotorFdbk Type Speed Feedback 3 15 634 TorgAlarm Dwell Oil Well Pump 3 65 413 Encoder PPR Speed Feedback 3 15 635 TorgAlrm Timeout Oil Well Pump 3 65 414 Enc Position Fdbk Speed Feedback 3 15 636 TorqAlrmTO Act Oil Well Pump 3 65 415 EncoderSpeed Speed Feedback 3 15 637 PCP Pump Sheave Oil Well Pump 3 65 416 Fdbk Filter Sel Speed Feedback 3 16 638 Max Rod Torque Oil Well Pump 3 65 419 Notch Filter Freq Speed Feedback 3 16 639 mn Rod Speed Oil Well Pump 3 66 420 Notch Filter K Speed Feedback 3 16 640 Max Rod Speed Oil Well Pump 3 66 421 Marker Pulse Speed Feedback 3 16 641 OilWell Pump Gel Oil Well Pump 3 66 422 Pulse In Scale Speed Feedback 3 16 642 Gearbox Rating Oil Well Pump 3 66 423 EncoderZChan Speed Feedback 3 16 643 Gearbox Sheave Oil Well Pump 3 66 427 431 Torque Ref X Sel Torq Attributes 13 13 644 Gearbox Ratio Oil Well Pump 3 66 428 432 Torque Ref XHi Torq Attributes 3 13 645 Woor Sheave Oil Well Pump 3 66 429 433 Torque Ref X Lo Torq Attributes 13 13 646 Total Gear Ratio Oil Well Pump 3 66 430 og Ref A Div Torq Attributes 3 14 647 DBResistor Oil Well Pump 3 66 434 Torque Ref B Mult Torq Attributes 3 14 648 Gearbox Limit Oil Well Pump 3 66 435 Torque Setpoint Torq Attributes 3 14 650 Ad Volt Phase Adjust Voltage 1277 436 Pos Torque Limit Torq Attributes 3 14 651 Ad Volt Sel
150. 7 Motor Type 3 9 Motor Type Cflct Alarm 4 12 Mounting Clearances 1 2 Orientation 1 2 Mounting Dimensions A 25 MOVs 1 24 Mtr OL Trip Time 3 42 Mtr Tor Cur Ref 3 14 N Neg Torque Limit 3 14 NET LED 4 2 Non Resettable 4 1 Notch Filter K 3 16 Notch FilterFreq 3 16 NP Hz Conflict Alarm 4 13 NVS I O Checksum Fault 4 7 NVS I O Failure Fault 4 7 O OilWell Pump Sel 3 66 Opening the Cover 1 1 Operating Modes 1 46 Operating Temperature 1 2 Operator Interface B 6 Output Contactor Start Stop 1 23 Output Current 3 7 Output Devices Cable Terminators A 9 Common Mode Cores A 9 Contactors 1 23 A 9 Output Freq 3 7 Output PhaseLoss Fault 4 7 Output Power 3 7 Output Powr Fctr 3 7 Output Voltage 3 7 Overspeed C 16 Overspeed Limit 3 18 OverSpeed Limit Fault 4 7 OverVoltage Fault 4 8 p Param Access Lvl 3 37 Parameter Publication 20B UM002D EN P Index 8 Changing Editing B 6 Descriptions 3 1 File Group Parameter Organization 3 3 Linear List 3 3 Viewing B 6 Parameter Chksum Fault 4 8 Parameter Cross Reference by Name 3 76 by Number 3 79 Parameter Linking B 7 Parameter View Advanced Vector Control 3 5 Basic Vector Control 3 4 Parameters 32 Bit 3 2 Accel Mask 3 51 Accel Owner 3 52 Accel Time x 3 28 Adj Volt AccTime 3 68 Adj Volt Command 3 67 Adj Volt DecTime 3 68 Adj Volt Phase 3 67 Adj Volt Preset 3 67 Adj Volt Ref Hi 3 67 Adj Volt Ref Lo 3 67 Adj V
151. 7 Data Out A1 D2 310 317 HighRes Ref x 308 Security Port Mask Act 595 Write Mask Act 597 Logic Mask Act 598 Write Mask Cfg 596 Logic Mask 276 Inputs amp Analog Inputs Anlg In Config 320 Analog Int 2Hi 322 325 Analog In1 2 Loss 324 327 Outputs Anlg In Sqr Root 321 Analog Int 2Lo 323 326 SES Analog Outputs Ang Out Config 340 Analog Outt 2 H 343 346 Ang Out1 2 Scale 354 355 A Anlg Out Absolut 341 Analog Out 2Lo 344 347 Anlgi Out Setpt 377 378 Analog Out 2 Sel 342 345 Digital Inputs Digital In1 6 Sel 361 366 Don DataLogic 411 fg Digital Outputs Digital Out Sel 380 384 388 Dig Out OffTime383 387 391 Dig Out Param 393 Dig Out Level 381 385 389 Dig Out Setpt 379 Dig Out Mask 394 Dig Out OnTime382 386 390 Dig Out Invert 392 Torq Proving TorqProve Cnig 600 ZeroSpdFloatTime 605 Brk Alarm Travel 610 TorqProve Setup 601 Float Tolerance 606 MicroPos Scale 611 Spd Dev Band 602 Brk Set Time 607 Torq Prove Sts 612 SpdBand Integrat 603 TorqLim SlewRate 608 Brake Test Torq 613 Brk Release Time 604 BrkSlip Count 609 Adjust Voltage Adj Volt Phase 650 Min Adj Voltage 661 Adj Volt TrimLo 671 Adj Volt Select 651 Adj Volt Command 662 Adj Volt Trim 672 Adj Volt Ref Hi 652 MOP Ad VoltRate 663 Adj Volt AccTime 675 Adj Volt Ref Lo 653 Adj Volt TrimSel 669 Adj Volt DecTime 676 Adj Volt Preset1 7 654 660 Adj Volt Trim Hi 670 Adj Volt S Curve 677 Oil Well Pump Max Rod Torque 631 PCP Pump Sheave 637 Gearbox Sheave 643 TorgAlarm Level 632 PCP Rod Torque 638 Gearb
152. 72 Supplemental Drive Information A 47 Figure A 23 IP00 NEMA UL Type Open Frame 8 amp 9 Roll In lt 648 2 25 52 gt lt 719 8 28 34 gt Drive A 208x365 415 481 574 8 22 68 20Bx535 600 574 8 22 63 20Bx730 630 2 24 81 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight kg Ibs Frame Drive Drive amp Packaging 8 250 552 297 655 9 267 589 314 692 Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 48 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 24 Frame 8 amp 9 Roll In Mounting Considerations Typical Bracket May require additional anchoring for shipping Suggested Anchoring Point M10 Hardware Required Typical Fan Location 2 Places 1 Each Door Typical Rail Detail Cable Access Plate 2 Places 108 0 x 158 8 4 25 x 6 25 eH Typical Air Inlet E 2 Places 1 Each Door 203 2 355 6 mm 8 00 14 00 in Typical Suggested Anti Roll Anchoring Point DC Link Choke Mounted Separately Typical Placement Shown Important This information illustrates how an open roll in style drive could be mounted in a user supplied enclosure Illustrations ar
153. 8 650 Lon 170M6612 10 20BR415 8 350 2 40 466 302 415 457 623 800 170M6612 19 300 2 40 410 265 365 548 730 laoo 170M6612 10 20BR481 8 400 2 40 540 350 481 530 722 900 170M6613 10 350 2 40 466 302 415 623 830 900 170M6613 10 20BR535 8 450 2 40 601 389 535 589 803 1000 170M6614 10 400 2 40 540 350 481 722 962 1000 170M6614 10 20BR600 8 500 2 40 674 436 600 660 900 12008 170me6616 19 450 2 40 601 389 535 803 1070 1200 8 170M6616 10 20BR730 9 600 2 40 820 533 730 803 1095 1400 170M6617 10 500 2 40 674 436 600 900 1200 1400 170M6617 10 20BJ875 10 700 2 40 983 636 875 963 1313 2x800 170M6612 10 No Precharge 600 2 40 1786 509 700 1050 1400 2x800 170M6612 10 Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 24 Supplemental Drive Information Table A L 810 Volt DC Input Protection Devices a l PWM Temp DC Input Drive Catalog E Hp Rating Freq Ratings Output Amps Non Time Number CND HD kHz C Amps Cont 1Min 3 Sec Fuse Delay Fuse 2 20BE1P7 oi 0 75 4 50 1 5 157 2 2 6 3 JKS 3 20BE2P7 0 2 15 4 50 2 4 27 3 6 4 8 6 JKS 6 20BE3P9 0 3 2 4 50 3 5 3 9 4 3 5 9 6 JKS 6 20BE6P1 0 5 3 4 50 6 2 6 1 6 7 9 2 10 JKS 10 20BE9P0 O rs L 4 50 9 1 9 9 9 13 5 LO HSJ15 20BE011 0 10 75 14 50 115 11 135 18 20 HSJ20 20BE017 1 15 10 4 50 18 17 187 252509 90 HSJ30 20BE022 2 20 15 4 50 23 6 22
154. 8 Float Tolerance 3 64 Fit QueueCleared Fault 4 6 Flux Braking 3 32 Flux Current 3 7 Flux Current Ref 3 12 Flux Up Mode 3 11 Flux Up Time 3 11 Flux Vector Control Option 3 3 FluxAmpsRef Rang Alarm 4 12 FluxAmpsRef Rang Fault 4 6 Flying Start En 3 32 Flying StartGain 3 32 Frame Designations A 9 Frame Size Drive P 3 Functions ALT Key B 3 Index 5 Fuses Input 1 6 Ratings A 9 G Gearbox Limit 3 66 Gearbox Rating 3 66 Gearbox Ratio 3 66 Gearbox Sheave 3 66 General Precautions P 3 Gnd Warn Level 3 34 Ground Fault 4 6 Ground Warn Alarm 4 12 Grounding Bus 1 5 Conductor 1 5 Filter 1 5 General 1 5 Impedance 1 5 Safety PE 1 5 Shields 1 5 Group Adjust Voltage 3 67 Alarms 3 47 Analog Inputs 3 54 Analog Outputs 3 55 Comm Control 3 49 Datalinks 3 52 Diagnostics 3 39 Digital Inputs 3 58 Digital Outputs 3 58 Direction Config 3 35 Discrete Speeds 3 22 Drive Data 3 8 Drive Memory 3 37 Faults 3 45 HIM Ref Config 3 36 Load Limits 3 28 Masks 8 Owners 3 50 Metering 3 7 MOP Config 3 36 Motor Data 3 9 Power Loss 3 34 Process PI 3 23 Profile Step 3 71 ProfSetup Status 3 69 Ramp Rates 3 28 Restart Modes 3 32 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Slip Comp 3 23 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 Speed Feedback 3 15 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Index 6 Speed References 3 20 Speed Regulator 3 26 Speed Trim 3 22 Stop Brake Modes 3 29 Torq Attributes 3 10 Torque Proving 3 63 Vol
155. 81 254 0 10 00 345 4 13 60 599 4 23 60 been 20Bx535 600 381 0 15 00 345 4 13 60 726 4 28 60 20Bx730 381 0 15 00 400 8 15 78 781 8 30 78 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight kg lbs Frame Drive Drive amp Packaging 8 384 847 431 950 9 401 884 448 987 Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 44 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 19 Converting an IP00 Drive for Flange Mounting Frames 8 amp 9 2 Component Remove these IP00 enclosure components Drive assembly to be flange mounted 0003 DC link choke mounts separately in enclosure see page A 45 for dimensions and is wired directly to drive Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 20 DC Link Choke Frame 8 A 45 19 1 0 75 16 0 x 9 7 0 63 x 0 38 Y 4 Places A A o 7 o 217 9 8 58 228 6 179 8 9 00 Max 7 08 5 Y J La 370 8 14 60 gt 396 2 15 60 gt E 279 4 11 00 _ gt Elle 4 7 0 19 203 2 8 00 gt Weg A 54 1 215 9 8 50 Max 48 0 19 la Y Figure A 21 DC Link Choke Frame 9 Y A 14 2 0 56 342 9 2 13 162 1 6 38
156. 98 TB Man Ref Lo 192 Save HIM Ref 100 Jog Speed 1 193 Man Ref Preload 101 107 Preset Speed X 194 Save MOP Ref 108 Jog Speed 2 195 MOP Rate 116 Trim Setpoint 196 Param Access Lvl 117 Trim In Select 197 Reset To Defalts 118 Trim Out Select 198 Load Frm Usr Set 119 Trim Hi 199 Save To User Set 120 Trim Lo 200 Reset Meters 121 Slip RPM FLA 201 Language 122 Slip Comp Gain 202 Voltage Class 124 PI Configuration 204 Dyn UsrSet Cnfg 125 PI Control 205 Dyn UsrSet Sel 126 PI Reference Sel 234 236 Testpoint X Sel 127 PI Setpoint 238 Fault Config 1 128 PI Feedback Sel 240 Fault Clear 129 PI Integral Time 241 Fault Clear Mode 130 PI Prop Gain 259 Alarm Config 1 131 PI Lower Limit 261 Alarm Clear 132 PI Upper Limit 270 DPI Baud Rate 133 PI Preload 274 DPI Port Sel 139 PI BW Filter 276 Logic Mask 140 141 Accel Time X Publication 20B UM002D EN P Parameter Record Number Parameter Name Setting Number Parameter Name Setting 277 Start Mask 476 494 ScaleX In Value 278 Jog Mask 477 495 ScaleX In Hi 279 Direction Mask 478 496 ScaleX In Lo 280 Reference Mask 479 497 ScaleX Out Hi 281 Accel Mask 480 498 ScaleX Out Lo 282 Decel Mask 596 Write Mask Cfg 283 Fault Clr Mask 600 TorgProve Cnfg 284 MOP Mask 601 TorqProve Setup
157. A in Figure C 16 If the commanded frequency is less than the skip center frequency and greater than or equal to the low value of the band skip minus 1 2 band the drive will set the output frequency to the low value of the band See B in Figure C 16 Acceleration and deceleration are not affected by the skip frequencies Normal accel decel will proceed through the band once the commanded frequency is greater than the skip frequency See A amp B in Figure C 16 This function affects only continuous operation within the band Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 34 Application Notes Skip Frequency Examples The skip frequency will have hysteresis so the output does not toggle between high and low values Three distinct bands can be programmed If none of the skip bands touch or overlap each band has its own high low limit Max Frequency Skip Frequency 1 Skip Band 1 m oo Skip Frequency 2 Skip Band 2 0 Hz If skip bands overlap or touch the center frequency is recalculated based on the highest and lowest band values 400 Hz mmm e e e pm pm mm Adjusted Skip Frequency 1 Skip Band Skip Frequency 2 w Recalculated E EC eg Skip Frequency DH If a skip band s extend beyond the max frequency limits the highest band value will be clamped at the max frequency limit The center frequency is recalculated based on the highest and lowest band values 400 Hz Max Frequency
158. Alarm Config 1 bit 17 Prof SetHome to 0 This will disable the alarm from being set when Pos Spd Profile mode is configured in Speed Torque Mod and will set the present position as Home Once Homing is complete the Find Home command must be removed to allow the profile to be run If the Find Home command is not removed when the drive is started the routine will see that it is At Home and the drive will stop Example 1 Five Step Velocity Profile Time Based and Encoder Based The first three steps are Time steps followed by an Encoder Abs step to zero and then an End step For each Time step the drive ramps at Step x AccelTime to Step x Velocity in the direction of the sign of Step x Velocity The drive then decelerates at Step X DecelTime to zero The Step X Value is programmed to the desired time for the total time of the accel run and decel of the step Each step has a 1 second time programmed in Step X Dwell which is applied to the end of each step After the dwell time expires the profile transitions to the next step The absolute step is used to send the profile back to the home position This is done by programming Step 4 Value to zero Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 25 Figure C 8 Time Example 350 50 S 250 lt D 45 8 Ee 40 2 150 EE z ZS 35 y e 5s 5 Z gt 30 8
159. Analog Input No Is Analog Signal Less Is Analog Signal Greater No Increase Analog Input Signal and wait for a time than or equal to Wake Level than or equal to Wake Level Signal and wait for a time period greater than or and for time period greater than and for time period greater than period greater than or equal to Wake Time or equal to Wake Time or equal to Wake Time equal to Wake Time Yes Yes Y Yes Did a Drive Was a Stop Issued No H E Fault Occur yl or Power Cycled al Consult Factory No Yes Run Run Forward Stop or Enable or Run Reverse was Chosen Y Y Issue a Start Command Open amp Close Input HIM Network or TB 1 Drive Running No Consult Factory Application Notes C 37 Start At PowerUp A powerup delay time of up to 30 seconds can be programmed through Powerup Delay parameter 167 After the time expires the drive will start if all of the start permissive conditions are met Before that time restart is not possible Start At PowerUp Powerup Delay No Time Expired Yes All Start Permissives Met 1 No fault conditions present 2 No Type 2 alarm conditions present No 3 The terminal block programmed enable input is closed 4 The Stop input from all sources is received Y Yes Is the terminal block Run No Run Forward or Run Reverse Input Closed Yes Y Powerup Start Powerup Terminated Normal Mode Stop Mode The PowerFlex 700 offer
160. D on page C 29 342 Pos Redefine Redefines the home position for the drive by latching encoder position Pos Sel 1 5 Binary value of these inputs is used to select the starting step number for the profile Precharge En Forces drive into precharge state Typically controlled by auxiliary contact on the 361 disconnect at the DC input to the drive Profile Input Must be chosen if Step X Type is set to Dig Input and the digital input value that is entered in Step X Value is the value of this digital input selector Pulse In Ref Reference of the pulse input Z channel of encoder can be used while A amp B 342 channels are encoder inputs RunFwd Level Provides a run level input They do not require a transition for enable or fault but a RunRev Level transition is still required for a stop Run Level Run wComm Allows the comms start bit to operate like a run with the run input on the terminal block Ownership rules apply Scale Block 1 4 Output of scale blocks parameters 354 355 342 SpdFb NoFilt Provides an unfiltered value to an analog output The filtered version Speed Fdbk includes a 125 ms filter Torque Est Calculated percentage of rated motor torque 342 Torque Setpt 1 Selects Torque Stpt1 for Torque Ref A Sel when set otherwise uses value selected 361 in Torque Ref A Sel Vel Override When active multiplies value of Step X Velocity by value in Vel Override Publication 20B UM002D EN
161. DC 381VDC 437VDC Nominal Bus Voltage 281VDC 324VDC 540VDC 648VDC 810VDC 932VDC All Drives Heat Sink Thermistor Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Drive Overcurrent Trip 200 of rated current typical 220 300 of rated current dependent on drive rating Line transients up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62 41 1991 Control Logic Noise Immunity Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak Power Ride Thru 15 milliseconds at full load Logic Control Ride Thru 0 5 seconds minimum 2 seconds typical Ground Fault Trip Phase to ground on drive output Short Circuit Trip Phase to phase on drive output Altitude 1000 m 3300 ft max without derating Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature without Derating IP20 NEMA UL Type Open Frames 0 6 Frames 7 10 0 50 C 32 122 F typical See pages A 12 A 19 for exceptions 0 40 C 32 104 F for chassis heatsink 0 65 C 32 149 F for control front of backplane Storage Temperature all const 40 70 C 40 158 F Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Relative Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Shock 15G peak for 11ms duration 1 0 ms
162. Data 3 9 135 PI Ref Meter Process P 3 25 47 Motor OL Hertz Motor Data 3 10 136 PI Fdback Meter Process P 3 25 48 Motor OL Factor Motor Data 3 10 137 PI Error Meter Process P 3 25 49 Motor Poles Motor Data 3 10 138 PI Output Meter Process P 3 25 50 Motor OL Mode Motor Data 3 10 139 PI BW Filter Process H 3 25 53 Motor Cntl Sel Torq Attributes 3 10 140 141 Accel Time X Ramp Rates 3 28 54 Maximum Voltage Torq Attributes 3 11 142 143 Decel Time X Ramp Rates 3 28 55 Maximum Freq Torq Attributes 3 11 145 DB While Stopped Stop Brake Modes 3 29 56 Compensation Torq Attributes 3 11 146 S Curve Ramp Rates 3 28 57 Flux Up Mode Torq Attributes 3 11 147 Current Lmt Sel Load Limits 3 28 58 Flux Up Time Torq Attributes 3 11 148 Current Lmt Val Load Limits 3 28 59 SV Boost Filter Torq Attributes 3 12 149 Current Lmt Gain Load Limits 3 28 61 Autotune Torq Attributes 3 12 150 Drive OL Mode Load Limits 3 28 62 IR Voltage Drop Tord Attributes 3 12 151 PWM Frequency Load Limits 3 29 63 Flux Current Ref Torq Attributes 17277 152 Droop RPM FLA Load Limits 3 29 64 Ixo Voltage Drop Torq Attributes 17377 153 Regen Power Limit Load Limits 3 29 66 Autotune Torque Torq Attributes 3 13 154 Current Rate Limit Load Limits 3 29 67 Inertia Autotune Torq Attributes 3 13 155 156 Stop Mode X Stop Brake Modes 3 29 69 Start Acc Boost Volts per Hertz 3 15 157 DC Brk Lvl Sel Stop Brake Modes 3 30 70 Run Boost Volts per Hertz 3 15 158 DC Br
163. Disabled 301 Data In A2 Link A Word 2 Min Max 0 611 Gen Parameter number whose value will be Units 1 written from a communications device data table Value will not be updated until drive is stopped Refer to your communications option manual for datalink information 302 Data In B1 Link B Word 1 See Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Data 303 Data In B2 Link B Word 2 In A2 Link A Word 2 304 Data In C1 Link C Word 1 See Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Data 305 Data In C2 Link C Word 2 In A2 Link A Word 2 306 Data In D1 Link D Word 1 See Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Data 307 Data In D2 Link D Word 2 In A2 Link A Word 2 Not available with Liquid Cooled drives Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters 3 53 cs Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E ET HighRes Ref Default 0 090 Used as a high resolution 32 bit Min Max 2147418112 on reference with Datalinks Units 1 128 Maximum Freq or 213 Maximum Speed 32767 x 65536 208 310 Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 Default 0 0 Disabled 311 Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 Min Max 0 611 Parameter whose value will be written to Units 1 a communications device data table 312 Data Out B1 Link B Word 1 See Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 313 Data Out B2 Link B Word 2 Data Out A2 Li
164. Fault Amps 225 Diagnostics 3 43 Motor Cntl Sel 53 Torq Attributes 3 10 Fault Bus Volts 226 Diagnostics 3 43 Motor Fdbk Type 412 Speed Feedback 3 15 Fault Clear 240 Faults 3 45 Motor NP FLA 42 Motor Data 3 9 Fault Clear Mode 241 Faults 3 45 Motor NP Hertz 43 Motor Data 3 9 Fault Clr Mask 283 Masks 4 Owners 3 51 Motor NP Power 45 Motor Data 3 9 Fault Clr Owner 295 Masks amp Owners 3 52 Motor NP RPM 44 Motor Data 3 9 Fault Config 1 238 Faults 3 45 Motor NP Volts 41 Motor Data 3 9 Fault Speed 224 Diagnostics 3 43 Motor OL Count 220 Diagnostics 3 42 Fdbk Filter Sel 416 Speed Feedback 3 16 Motor OL Factor 48 Motor Data 3 10 Feedback Select 80 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 Motor OL Hertz 47 Motor Data 3 10 Find Home Ramp 714 ProfSetup Status 3 70 Motor OL Mode 50 Motor Data 3 10 Find Home Speed 713 ProfSetup Status 3 70 Motor Poles 49 Motor Data 3 10 Float Tolerance 606 Torq Proving 3 64 Motor Sheave 645 Oil Well Pump 3 66 Flux Braking 166 Stop Brake Modes 3 32 Motor Type 40 Motor Data 3 9 Flux Current 5 Metering 3 7 Mtr NP Pwr Units 46 Motor Data 3 9 Flux Current Ref 63 Tom Attributes 3 12 Mtr OL Trip Time 221 Diagnostics 3 42 Flux Up Mode 57 Torq Attributes 3 11 Mtr Tor Cur Ref 441 Torq Attributes 3 14 Flux Up Time 58 Torq Attributes 3 11 Neg Torque Limit 437 Torg Attributes 3 14 Flying Start En 169 Restart Modes _ 3 32 Notch Filter Freq 419 Speed Feedback 3 16 Flying StartGain 170 Restart Modes _ 3 32 Notch Filter K 420
165. Gell 604 LEL 009 t 00L E W DG Dt 009 002 ose 002 ved LLI 9SL ecb Zeb 009 T BGL 9 99LO09gU0Z E S Sel ose ose Sel 002 Sel 89 vr 9 62 106 pos y BL lt 1 ost GLE 00s Os ose DCL CO Bel Sek 926 Il 009 v 001 S setagoz 0006 NNO 004 00 00 00 ULL D0L ys OLE LL 109 22 pos t 09 1 gt Sel ose ose Sel 003 Sel vr 901 96 62 1 06 009 v SZ S 9600803 0006 NINO Ke 00 osz 053 08 Sel 08 DEL 86 G9 96y 96S pos TI 0S 1 0006 NWO 00L 00 00 001 DLL 00L OIL 98 ZZ 09 ZL 009 T 09 y 200803 0006 NNO SS S DUL 053 URZ 08 Sel 08 POL 82 G9 96y 965 pos y Ov 09 9900807 00 9 NINO N UL o0z o0z 09 DLL 09 08 09 29 26 L Y pos y DEI Ov zsoagoz 000 NINO S70 484 W 0s os os 0S 06 0s 89 L Oti SOE Z9E pos t BG D I 0voagoz 000t NWO St9 384 W 0s Sel Sel Ov 0Z Ov ys SUP PEI BRZ cle 009 Fi D I G z veogeo0s S DOEN Z 9 384 W D 00 00 se 09 se vv EE 42i 902 82 pos t Sk 03 z 00803 5 00S3 NINO 920 383 929 380 W 920 320 0 08 08 Sc 09 BC EI oe co 99k 66L pos y OL St L zzoagoz E 9 9 384 N 9L0 48C W 919 320 W oz 0s 0s GLb 0 sl cc S9 PLI VOL Geb 0S t GZ OL Li vloaaod 2 919 3831 9L0 38C W 910 320 W EI ov ov EI oz BL sol FZL II 62 S6 009 v S GZ 0 tOdgOe D 0L0 484 W OL9 380 N 010 320 W SL 0 0 DL SL DL CL 88 8 2S 69 pos T E S 0 Od8dgoe
166. IEC60079 1 Group II motors are marked with a temperature or a temperature code e When the motor is indicated for ATEX Group II Category 2 for use in dust environments Category 2D the motor must be protected by an enclosure according to EN50281 1 1 or according to 1EC61241 1 Ex tD Group II motors are marked with a temperature e The motor over temperature signal supplied to the drive must be a normally closed contact open during over temperature condition compatible with the drive s digital logic input circuitry If multiple sensors are required in the motor the connection at the drive must be the resultant of all required contacts wired in series Note that the drives are available with either 24V DC or 115V AC input circuitry Refer to the drive User Manual for details e Refer to all product markings for additional cautions that may apply e Typical motor markings are contained on a motor certification nameplate similar to Figure D 1 Figure D 1 Sample Motor Nameplate FLAMEPROOF Exd ENCLOSURE EExd IIB__Tamb___C to__C O Ex 112 G D CE omg O IM2 Sm ATEX MFG BY ROCKWELL AUTOMATION Publication 20B UM002D EN P Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors D 3 Drive Wiring Important ATEX certification of this drive requires that 2 separate digital logic inputs be configured to monitor a normally closed over temperature contact or multiple contacts wired in series presented to the
167. Invert Torque Setpt 1 12 Flt MicroPos 11 12 Fast Stop 12 Decel Limit End Limit UserSet Sel1 2 13 Run Level RunFwd Level RunRev Level 12 Run w Comm 12 Hold Step 12 Redefine Pos 12 Find Home 12 Home Limit 12 Vel Override 12 Pos Sel 1 5 12 Prof Input 12 Related Programming and Parameters 3 59 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 7 Opening an Enable input will cause 5859 Reserved the motor to coast to stop ignoring any 6062 AdjV Sel 1 3 14 15 programmed Stop modes 6365 AdjV Hz Sel1 3 14 16 8 Dig In ConflictB alarm will occur if a 66 Abort Step 1 Start input is prog without a Stop input 67 Abort Prof 14 9 Refer to the Sleep Wake Mode 68 Manual Auto S Attention statement on page 3 33 10 A dedicated hardware enable input is available via a jumper selection Refer to page 1 43 for further information 11 Only available when Torque Proving function is selected 12 Refer to Option Definitions on page 3 57 13 Refer to Dyn UsrSet Sel on page 3 38 for selection information 14 Firmware v6 002 and later 15 Adjust Voltage Select Inputs 3 J2 Ji Adv Sel 0 Ad Volt Sel 1 Adj Volt preset 0 Ad Volt Preset2 1 Adj Volt Preset3 D Adj Volt Preset4 1 0 1 Related
168. Level 381 Digital Outputs 3 61 Analog In2 Value 17 Metering 3 8 385 389 Analog DN Hi 343 346 Analog Outputs 3 56 PT L Outputs 268 Analog OutX Lo 344 347 Analog Outputs 3 56 z E t E Analog OutX Gel 342 345 Analog Outputs 3 56 EES Se 390 EN eee Anlg In Config 320 Analog Inputs 3 54 Direction Mask 279 Masks 8 Owners 3 51 Ang In Sqr Root 321 Analog Inputs 3 54 Direction Mode 190 Direction Config 3 35 Anlg Out Absolut 341 Analog Outputs 3 55 Direction Owner 291 Masks amp Owners 3 52 Anlg Out Config 340 Analog Outputs 1252 DPI Baud Rate 270 CommControl 3 49 Anlg OutX Scale__ 354 355 Analog Outputs 3 56 DPI Fdbk Select 299 Comm Control 3 50 Anlg OutX Geint 377 378 Analog Outputs 3 57 DPI Port Sel 274 Comm Control 13 50 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 Restart Modes 3 32 DPI Port Value 275 Comm Control 3 50 Auto Rstrt Tries 174 Restart Modes 3 32 DPI Ref Select 298 Comm Control 3 50 Autotune 61 Torq Attributes 3 12 Drive Alarm X 211 212 Diagnostics 3 40 Autotune Torque 66 Torg Attributes 3 13 Drive Checksum 203 Drive Memory 3 38 Brake Test Torq 618 Torg Proving 3 65 Drive Logic Rslt 271 Comm Control 3 49 Break Frequency 72 Vahe per Heriz 2 15 Drive OL Count 219 Diagnostics 3 42 Break Voltage 71 Volts perHertz 3 15 Drive OL Mode 150 Load Limits 3 28 Brk Alarm Travel 610 Tod Proving 3 64 Drive Ramp Belt 273 Comm Control 3 49 Brk Release Time 604 TorqProving 3 6
169. M Memory and Power Loss Mode is set to Decel 185 Power Loss Time Default 0 5 Secs 184 Sets the time that the drive will remain in Min Max 0 0 60 0 Secs power loss mode before a fault is issued Units 0 1 Secs Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters 3 35 S Parameter Name amp Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions 186 Power Loss Level Sets the level at which the Power Loss Mode selection will occur File Group Related Values Default Drive Rated Volts Min Max 0 0990 9 VDC Units 0 1 VDC O The drive can use the percentages referenced in Power Loss Mode or a trigger point can be set for line loss detection as follows Virigger DC Bus Memory Power Loss Level A digital input programmed to 29 Pwr Loss Lvl is used to toggle between fixed percentages and the detection level ATTENTION Drive damage can occur if proper input impedance is not provided as explained below If the value for Power Loss Level is greater than 18 of DC Bus Memory the user must provide a minimum line impedance to limit 2 inrush current when the power line recovers The input impedance should be equal to or greater than the equivalent of a 5 transformer with a VA rating 5 times the drives input VA rating o a 187 Load Loss Level Default 200 0 211 Sets the percentage of motor nameplate Min Max 0 0 800 0 torque ab
170. Masks amp Owners 3 50 196 Param Access Lvl Drive Memory 3 37 278 Jog Mask Masks amp Owners 3 51 197 Reset To Defalts Drive Memory 3 37 279 Direction Mask Masks 8 Owners 3 51 198 Load Frm Usr Set Drive Memory 3 37 280 Reference Mask Masks amp Owners 3 51 199 Save To User Set Drive Memory 3 37 281 Accel Mask Masks amp Owners 3 51 200 Reset Meters Drive Memory 3 37 282 Decel Mask Masks 8 Owners 3 51 201 Language Drive Memory 3 37 283 Fault Clr Mask Masks amp Owners 3 51 202 Voltage Class Drive Memory 3 38 284 MOP Mask Masks amp Owners 3 51 203 Drive Checksum Drive Memory 3 38 285 Local Mask Masks 8 Owners 3 51 204 Dyn UserSet Cnfg Drive Memory 3 38 288 Stop Owner Masks amp Owners 3 51 205 Dyn UserSet Gel Drive Memory 3 38 289 Start Owner Masks amp Owners 3 51 206 Dyn UserSet Ach Drive Memory 3 39 290 Jog Owner Masks amp Owners 3 51 209 210 Drive Status X Diagnostics 3 39 291 Direction Owner Masks amp Owners 3 52 211 212 Drive Alarm X Diagnostics 3 40 292 Reference Owner Masks amp Owners 3 52 213 Speed Ref Source Diagnostics 3 41 293 Accel Owner Masks 8 Owners 3 52 214 Start Inhibits Diagnostics 3 41 294 Decel Owner Masks amp Owners 3 52 215 Last Stop Source Diagnostics 3 41 295 Fault Clr Owner Masks amp Owners 3 52 216 Dig In Status Diagnostics 3 42 296 MOP Owner Masks 8 Owners 3 52 217 Dig Out Status Diagnostics 3 42 297 Local Owner Masks amp Owners 3 52 218 Drive
171. Motor OL Count parameter 220 is maintained through a power cycle or drive reset This is an enhanced version of the v4 002 Motor Overload Memory function The testpoint method will still work but the preferred method is to set Motor OL Mode parameter 50 Overspeed Overspeed Limit is a user programmable value that allows operation at maximum speed but also provides an overspeed band that will allow a speed regulator such as encoder feedback or slip compensation to increase the output frequency above maximum speed in order to maintain maximum motor speed The figure below illustrates a typical Custom V Hz profile Minimum Speed is entered in Hertz and determines the lower speed reference limit during normal operation Maximum Speed is entered in Hertz and determines the upper speed reference limit The two Speed parameters only limit the speed reference and not the output frequency The actual output frequency at maximum speed reference is the sum of the speed reference plus speed adder components from functions such as slip compensation The Overspeed Limit is entered in Hertz and added to Maximum Speed and the sum of the two Speed Limit limit the output frequency This sum Speed Limit must is compared to Maximum Frequency and an alarm is initiated which prevents operation if the Speed Limit exceeds Maximum Frequency Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 17 Allowable Output Frequency Range
172. No 20B D xxx x x xxxxxxx Des Series B ox kW Ohana C Standard xxx kW 400V 480V Normal Duty Power Heavy Duty P Input 3 Pha AC Voltage Ra Amps Output 3 Phase AC Voltage Range Base Hz default 432 528 XXX Frame 3 Serial Piumber xxxxxxx Frame ek Jumper Settings and Locations Installation Wiring 1 27 2 Eo Factory Default Jumper Settings 8 MOV Input DC Bus Common 28 SE Filter Caps Mode Caps Power Source Type B All PE_B PE_A Solid Ground D Installed Not installed e Remove the I O Cassette refer to the E User Manual for details Insert jumper C All PER PE_A at the PE_A location on the Power Installed Installed Board Verify that PE_B is installed Non Solid Ground e Remove the I O Cassette refer to the User Manual for details Remove jumper at the PE_B location on the Power Board Verify that PE_A is also removed IIT U so d S nn 2 B All PE_MOV PE_CAP Solid Ground D Installed Not Installed e Insert jumper at the PE_CAP location E Verify that the HE MOV jumper is C All PE_MOV PE_CAP installed Installed Installed Non Solid Ground e Remove jumper at the PE_MOV location Verify that the PE_CAP jumper is also rem
173. OV Input Filter Cap 1 2 AC input drives only MOV s and input filter caps do not exist on DC input drives When removing MOV s the input filter capacitor must also be removed Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 34 Installation Wiring o 2 E Factory Default Jumper Settings E S SE MOV Input Filter DC Bus Common CZ GE Caps 2 Mode Caps 6 B All Two green Green yellow wire to D yellow wires CM Cap Board is J connected to disconnected N Power Terminal R Block PE C All Two green Green yellow wire to H yellow wires CM Cap Board is P connected to connected to Power Power Terminal Terminal Block PE Block PE a o Q D o DO NOT REMOVE MOV Publication 20B UM002D EN P Power Source Type Solid Ground The green yellow CM Cap jumper wire should be connected to PE 2 The MOV Input Filter Cap jumper wires should be connected to PE Non Solid Ground 1 The green yellow CM Cap jumper wire should be insulated from ground If necessary remove the jumper wire from PE and insulate secure it to guard against unintentional con
174. OverSpeed Limit No Typelt 106 121 122 ER 109 110 Description Drive rating information stored on the power board is incompatible with the main control board 1 0 Board lost communications with the Main Control Board UO was detected but failed the powerup sequence The DC bus ripple has exceeded a preset level Calculate is the autotune default and the value determined by the autotune procedure for IR Drop Volts is not in the range of acceptable values Voltage calculated for motor inductive impedance exceeds 25 of Motor NP Volts Drive output torque current is below Load Loss Level for a time period greater than Load Loss time Internal electronic overload trip Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 on page 3 45 Thermistor output is out of range EEprom checksum error EEprom UO error Current in one or more phases has been lost or remains below a preset level Functions such as Slip Compensation or Bus Regulation have attempted to add an output frequency adjustment greater than that programmed in Overspeed Limit Troubleshooting 4 7 Action 1 Load compatible version files into drive 2 Frame 7 10 drives must have firmware version 4 009 or greater Check connector Check for induced noise Replace I O board or Main Control Board Replace Main Control Board Check incoming power for a missing phase blown fuse Re enter motor namepla
175. P C140 connected to the Torque to 3 2 Nem 28 Ibein Power Terminal e Series A amp B Drives Remove Block rail the I O Cassette see User Manual for details The green ellow CM Cap jumper wire is CM Cap Series C located on the back of chassis and should be connected to CM Cap ground with a metal screw If Series A 8 B necessary remove the insulation o from the wire terminal and connect to chassis with a metal o M5 x 12 screw Torque screw to 3 2 Nem 28 bein emeng Il 2 MOV Input Filter Cap jumper wires E E should be connected to ground with Se a metal screw Verify If necessary uy 2 remove the nylon screw spacer and L lt insert a metal M5 x 12 screw Non Solid Ground 1 CM Cap jumper wire should be insulated from ground Verify SGD e Series C Drives If necessary remove the metal screw and insert a M5 x 15 nylon screw spacer e Series A amp B Drives Remove the I O Cassette see User Manual for details If necessary MOV Input Filter Cap insulate secure jumper wire to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components 2 MOV Input Filter Cap jumper wires should be insulated from ground with a nylon screw spacer Verify If necessary remove the metal screw and insert a M5 x 20 nylon screw spacer i SIE an SBE
176. Pease e Motor Speed Feedback L e Commanded Frequency S es DC Brake Current Near Zero Speed at Motor Current Cha 200mv Implementation Block Diagram for Fast Braking Current Regulator lgCmd y i 9 ge gt m Va T 8 gt Vb Brake IdCmd vd amd gt gt Vo Level O ES l L IgFdbk IdFdbk De 1 s A 4 fe Bus Voltage Reference d Gain gt PI K Frequency Bus Voltage Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 45 Voltage Tolerance Nominal Line Nominal Motor Drive Full Power Drive Operating Drive Rating Voltage Voltage Range Range 200 240 200 200 200 264 180 264 208 208 208 264 240 230 230 264 380 480 380 380 380 528 342 528 400 400 400 528 480 460 460 528 500 600 600 575 575 660 432 660 Frames 0 4 Only 500 690 600 575 575 660 475 759 Frames 5 6 Only 690 690 690 759 475 759 Drive Full Power Range Nominal Motor Voltage to Drive Rated Voltage 10 Rated power is available across the entire Drive Full Power Range Drive Operating Range Lowest Nominal Motor Voltage 10 to Drive Rated Voltage 10 Drive Output is linearly derated when Actual Line Voltage is less than the Nominal Motor Voltage lt gt Derated Power Range lt Full Power Range gt e Drive Operating Range
177. Power Loss lauto i Direction Drive Status Alarm Auto Man Information Hz Commanded or Output Frequency Main Menu Diagnostics Parameter Device Select Programming Monitoring Troubleshooting The top line of the HIM display can be configured with DPI Fdbk Select parameter 299 Publication 20B UM002D EN P HIM Overview B 3 ALT Functions To use an ALT function start at the Main Menu and press the ALT key release it then press the programming key associated with one of the following functions Table B A ALT Key Functions ALT Key and then Performs this function S M A R T Displays the S M A R T screen View Allows the selection of how parameters will be viewed or detailed information about a parameter or component Lang Displays the language selection screen Auto Man Switches between Auto and Manual Modes Remove 1 Allows HIM removal without causing a fault if the HIM is not the last controlling device and does not have Manual control of the drive Param Allows entry of a parameter number for viewing editing Removing Installing the HIM The HIM can be removed or installed while the drive is powered Important HIM removal is only permissible in Auto mode If the HIM is removed while in Manual mode or the HIM is the only remaining control device a fault will occur Step To remove the HIM 1 Press ALT and then Enter Remove The Re
178. Power Terminal Block Specifications Wire Size Range see Note 2 Torque No Name Frame Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended O Power 081 Input power and 4 0 mm 0 5mm2 1 7 Nem 10 8 Nem Terminal motor connections 12 AWG 22 AWG 15 bein 7 Dein Block 2 Input power and 10 0 mm2 0 8mm2 1 7Nem 1 4Nem motor connections 8 AWG 18 AWG 15 Ibein 12 bein 3 Input power and 25 0mm 25mm2 3 6 Nam 18 Nem motor connections 3 AWG 14 AWG 32 bein 16 bein BR1 2 terminals 10 0 mm 0 8mm 1 7 Nem 1 4Nem 8 AWG 18 AWG 15 lbein 02 Ibein 4 Input power and 35 0 mm 10 0 mm2 4 0 Nem 4 0 Nem motor connections 1 AWG 8 AWG DP Ibein 35 bein 5 Input power DC 50 0 mm 4 0 mm2 75Hp 480V DC BR1 2 PE 1 0 AWG 12 AWG 100Hp 600V motor connections 5 Input power DC 70 0 mm 10 0 mm2 See Note 4 100Hp DC and motor 2 0 AWG 8 AWG BRI 2 PE 50 0 mm2 4 0 mm terminals 1 0 AWG 12 AWG 6 Input power DC 150 0 mm2 2 5mm2 6 0 Nem 16 0 Nem DC BR1 2 PE 300 MCM 14 AWG 52 Ibsin 52 bein motor connections see Note 3 7 Input power DC 150 0 mm2 2 5mm2 2 7N m 2 7N m DC PE motor 300 MCM 14 AWG 24 lb in 24 Ib in connections see Note 9 8 10 Input power DC 300 0 mm 2 5 mm2 10 0Nem 10 0 Nem DC PE motor
179. PowerUp Alarm 4 13 Start Inhibits 3 41 Start Mask 3 50 Start Owner 3 51 Start Acc Boost 3 15 Start Stop Repeated 1 23 Start Up Assisted 2 4 Checklist 2 1 S M A R T 2 3 Static Discharge ESD P 3 Status 1 O Fault 3 43 Index 13 Status 2 Fault 3 44 Status 3 Fault 3 43 Status LEDs 4 2 Step x AccelTime 3 72 Step x Batch 3 74 Step x DecelTime 3 73 Step x Dwell 3 74 Step x Next 3 75 Step x Type 3 71 Step x Value 3 73 Step x Velocity 3 72 Stop Mode x 3 29 Stop Owner 3 51 Stop Brake Modes Group 3 29 STS LED 4 2 Supply Source 1 3 SV Boost Filter 3 12 SW OverCurrent Fault 4 9 System Grounding 1 5 T TB Man Ref Cfict Alarm 4 13 TB Man Ref Hi 3 21 TB Man Ref Lo 3 21 TB Man Ref Sel 3 21 Terminal Block Encoder 1 39 1 42 1 0 1 39 1 40 1 41 Power 1 16 Wire Size Encoder 1 39 1 0 1 39 Power 1 15 Testpoint Codes and Functions 4 18 Testpoint x Data 3 45 Testpoint x Sel 3 45 Torq Attributes Group 3 10 Torq Prove Cflct Alarm 4 13 Torq Prove Sts 3 65 Torq Ref A Div 3 14 TorgAlarm Action 3 65 TorqAlarm Dwell 3 65 TorgAlarm Level 3 65 TorqAlrm Timeout 3 65 TorqAlrm TO Act 3 65 TorqLim SlewRate 3 64 TorqProve Cnfg 3 63 TorqProve Setup 3 63 TorqPrv Spd Band Fault 4 9 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Index 14 Torque Current 3 7 Control 1 39 Torque Proving C 4 Signal 1 38 Torque Proving Group 3 63 Wiring 1 1 Torque Ref B Mult 3 14 Access Panel Re
180. Publication 20B UM002D EN P Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors D 7 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Remake continuity of the over temperature circuit connected to the drive s digital inputs The drive should remain stopped and in an Auxiliary Input fault condition Provide the command to restart the drive In the case of a maintained start remove and reapply the start command The drive should remain stopped and in an Auxiliary Input fault condition Provide a fault reset command to the drive The drive fault should clear but the drive should not restart Provide the command to restart the drive The drive should run normally Stop the drive and disconnect all power including external control power Remove the test mechanism reconnect original wires and verify all wiring Reconnect the motor to the load if it had been previously disconnected Check for proper operation Publication 20B UM002D EN P D 8 Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors Notes Publication 20B UM002D EN P A AC Input Circuit Breakers A 9 Ground 1 5 Line Fuses A 9 AC Supply Resistive Grounded 1 4 Source 1 3 Unbalanced 1 4 Ungrounded 1 4 Accel Mask 3 51 Accel Owner 3 52 Accel Time x 3 28 Access Panel Removal 1 8 Adj Volt AccTime 3 68 Adj Volt Command 3 67 Adj Volt DecTime 3 68 Adj Volt Phase 3 67 Adj Volt Preset 3 67 Ad Volt Ref Hi 3 67 Adj V
181. Reserved Group 1 Name gt FGP Parameter Group2 Name Parameter Name Group 3 Name Parameter Name Parameter Name gt Value Screen OD Device lt HIM Delete HIM Set Him CopyCat 3 Device User Sets Drive User Set Reset To Defaults Save To User Set Load Frm Usr Set Active Name Set 1 Input Voltage 2 Motr Data Ramp 3 Motor Tests 4 Speed Limits Esc gt Make a Selection 5 Speed Trq Cntl Abort 6 Strt Stop 1 O Backup 7 Done Exit Resume Start Up Menu More Info Torq Prove Done Exit must be Pos Speed Profile selected to save Oil Well Pumps any changes Press UY ED to move between menu items Press EB to select a menu item Publication 20B UM002D EN P Press to move 1 level back in the menu structure Press GB ES to select how to view parameters HIM Overview B 5 Diagnostics Menu When a fault trips the drive use this menu to access detailed data about the drive Option Description Alarms View alarm queue and clear alarms Faults View fault queue or fault information clear faults or reset drive Status Info View parameters that display status information about the drive Device Version View the firmware version and hardware series of components HIM Version View the firmware version and hardware series of the HIM Parameter Menu Refer to Viewing and Editing Parameters on page B 6 The drive is initially set to Basic Parameter View To view all parameters
182. Reverse v Forward Speed ya 1 Speed Minimum Maximum Speed 0 Speed 10V Figure C 15 Rev Speed Limit parameter 454 set to a non zero Value 10V Reverse Speed Limit Reverse Speed Forward Speed Maximum Speed 10V Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 33 Skip Frequency Figure C 16 Skip Frequency Command Frequenc e quency Frequency Drive Output Frequency Skip 1 2 Band K F 4 Ge e 95 Hz Skip Frequency gt mm _L_L___ ok a Ei Skip 1 2 Band K A Time Some machinery may have a resonant operating frequency that must be avoided to minimize the risk of equipment damage To assure that the motor cannot continuously operate at one or more of the points skip frequencies are used Parameters 084 086 Skip Frequency 1 3 are available to set the frequencies to be avoided The value programmed into the skip frequency parameters sets the center point for an entire skip band of frequencies The width of the band range of frequency around the center point is determined by parameter 87 Skip Freq Band The range is split half above and half below the skip frequency parameter If the commanded frequency of the drive is greater than or equal to the skip center frequency and less than or equal to the high value of the band skip plus 1 2 band the drive will set the output frequency to the high value of the band See
183. SS Z e x x x x x x x x x x x xlO0 x 0 1 pus 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 54 13 2 1 0f x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values At Powr Down 1 Save at Power Down 0 Do Not Save Manual Mode 1 HIM controls Reference Start Jog Direction amp Clear Faults Start amp Jog Disabled from all other Sources regardless of 2 Wire 3 Wire control selection Must select Manual Mode on the HIM prior to setting this bit 0 HIM controls only the Reference HIM Disable 1 Start 8 Jog on HIM Do Not Function in 3 Wire mode 0 Start amp Jog on HIM will Function in 3 Wire mode Man Ref Preload Default 0 Disabled Enables disables a feature to automati Options 0 Disabled cally load the present Auto frequency 1 Enabled reference value into the HIM when Man ual is selected Allows smooth speed transition from Auto to Manual Save MOP Ref Enables disables the feature that saves the present MOP frequency reference at power down or at stop Z 3 Z YO WY x xi xix xixix xix x x x x x 0 0 son E pls 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 anned Bit Factory Default Bit Values MOP Rate Default 1 0 Hz s 30 0 RPM s Sets rate of change of the MOP reference in response to a digital input Min Max 0 2 Maximum Freq 6 0 Maximum Freq Units 0 1 Hz s 0 1 RPM s Publication 20B UM002D EN P Related Programm
184. See page For information on See page Adjustable Voltage Operation C 1 Position Indexer Speed C 17 Profiler External Brake Resistor C 3 Power Loss Ride Through C 27 Lifting Torque Proving C 4 Process PID C 29 Limit Switches for Digital Inputs C 11 Reverse Speed Limit C 32 Minimum Speed C 12 Skip Frequency C 33 Motor Control Technology C 12 Sleep Wake Mode C 35 Motor Overload C 14 Start At PowerUp C 37 Motor Overload Memory C 16 Stop Mode C 37 Retention Per 2005 NEC Overspeed C 16 Voltage Tolerance C 45 Adjustable Voltage Operation In Adjustable Voltage control mode the output voltage is controlled independently from the output frequency The voltage and frequency components have independent references and acceleration deceleration rates Single phase and three phase output is possible with this feature The Adjustable Voltage mode is designed to operate on electro magnetic loads not typical AC motors Typical applications include e Linear Motors e Vibration Welding e Vibratory conveying e Electromagnetic Stirring e Induction Heating 400 Hz or lower e Resistive Loads dryers e Power Supplies Enabling Adjustable Voltage Adjustable Voltage is enabled in Motor Cntl Sel parameter 053 by selecting 5 Adj Voltage In this mode current limit will now reduce voltage instead of frequency when the threshold is reached Aggressive ramp rates on the voltage command should be avoided to minimize nuisance overcu
185. Speed Feedback 3 16 Gearbox Limit 648 Oil Well Pump 3 66 OilWell Pump Gel 641 Oil Well Pump 3 66 Gearbox Rating 642 Oil Well Pump 3 66 Output Current 3 Metering 3 7 Gearbox Sheave 643 Oil Well Pump 3 66 Output Freq 1 Metering 3 7 Gearbox Ratio 644 Oil Well Pump 3 66 Output Power 7 Metering 3 7 Gnd Warn Level 177 Power Loss 3 34 Output Powr Fetr 8 Metering 3 7 HighRes Ref 308 Datalinks 3 53 Output Voltage 6 Metering 3 7 Home Position 702 ProfSetup Status 3 69 Overspeed Limit 83 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 18 Inertia Autotune 67 Torq Attributes 3 13 Param Access Lvl 196 Drive Memory 3 37 IR Voltage Drop 62 Torq Attributes 3 12 PCP Pump Sheave 637 Oil Well Pump 3 65 Ixo Voltage Drop 64 Torq Attributes 3 13 PI BW Filter 139 Process P 3 25 Jog Mask 278 Masks amp Owners 3 51 PI Configuration 124 Process P 3 23 Jog Owner 290 Masks amp Owners 3 51 PI Control 125 Process P 3 23 Jog Speed 1 100 Discrete Speeds 3 22 PI Deriv Time 459 Process P 3 26 Jog Speed 2 108 Discrete Speeds 3 22 PI Error Meter 137 Process P 3 25 Kf Speed Loop 447 Speed Regulator 3 27 Pl Fdback Meter 136 Process P 3 25 Ki Speed Loop 445 Speed Regulator 3 26 PI Feedback Hi 462 Process P 3 26 Kp Speed Loop 446 Speed Regulator 3 26 PI Feedback Lo 463 Process P 3 26 Language 201 Drive Memory 3 37 PI Feedback Sel 128 Process P 3 24 Last Stop Source 215 Diagnostics 3 41 PI Integral Time 129 Process P 3 24 Load Frm Uer Gei 198 Drive Memory 3 37 PI Lower Limit 131 Proces
186. Start Up 2 1 Status Indicators eee EE ess 2 2 Start Up Routines 2 3 Running S M A R T Start 2 6 Running an Assisted Start Up 2 6 About Parameters 3 1 How Parameters are Organized 3 3 Monito circ errr 3 7 Motor ControlEL ae eee 3 9 Speed Command File 3 17 Dynamic Control File 3 28 Uli E 3 35 Communication File 3 49 Inputs amp Outputs File 3 54 Applications El 3 63 Pos Spd Profile File 3 69 Parameter Cross Reference by Name 3 76 Parameter Cross Reference by Number 3 79 SEU MERTES 4 1 EE 4 2 Manually Clearing Faults 4 4 Rault Descriptions e terriers rere 4 5 Clearing Alarms e rere 4 11 Alarm Descriptions 4 11 Common Symptoms Corrective Actions 4 15 Testpoint Codes and Functions 4 18 Publication 20B UM002D EN P ii Table of Contents Appendix A Supplemental Drive Information Appendix B HIM Overview Appendix C Application Notes Appendix D ATEX Approved Drives Index Publication 20B UM002D EN P Specifications e e e ooo A 1 Communication Configurations A 6 Output Devices A 9 Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings A 9 Dimensions A 25 External amp Internal Connections B 1 LCD Display Elements B 2 ALT Functions erscicccsconsitssasss B 3 Removing
187. Stopped 42 Motor NP FLA 146 S Curve 43 Motor NP Hertz 147 Current Lmt Sel 44 Motor NP RPM 148 Current Lmt Val 45 Motor NP Power 149 Current Lmt Gain 46 Mtr NP Pwr Units 150 Drive OL Mode 47 Motor OL Hertz 151 PWM Frequency 48 Motor OL Factor 152 Droop RPM FLA 49 Motor Poles 153 Regen Power Limit 50 Motor OL Mode 154 Current Rate Limit 53 Motor Cntl Se 155 156 Stop Mode X 54 Maximum Voltage 157 DC Brk Lvl Sel 55 Maximum Freq 158 DC Brake Level 56 Compensation 159 DC Brake Time 57 Flux Up Mode 160 Bus Reg Ki 58 Flux Up Time 161 162 Bus Reg Mode X 59 SV Boost Filter 163 DB Resistor Type 61 Autotune 164 Bus Reg Kp 62 IR Voltage Drop 165 Bus Reg Kd 63 Flux Current Ref 166 Flux Braking 64 Ixo Voltage Drop 167 Powerup Delay 66 Autotune Torque 168 Start At PowerUp 67 Inertia Autotune 169 Flying Start En 69 Start Acc Boost 170 Flying StartGain 70 Run Boost 174 Auto Rstrt Tries 71 Break Voltage 175 Auto Rstrt Delay 72 Break Frequency 177 Gnd Warn Level 79 Speed Units 178 Sleep Wake Mode 80 Feedback Select 179 Sleep Wake Ref 81 Minimum Speed 180 Wake Level 82 Maximum Speed 181 Wake Time 83 Overspeed Limit 182 Sleep Leve 84 86 Skip Frequency X 183 Sleep Time 87 Skip Freq Band 184 Power Loss Mode 88 Speed Torque Mod 185 Power Loss Time 90 93 Speed Ref X Sel 186 Power Loss Level 91 94 Speed Ref X Hi 187 Load Loss Level 92 95 Speed Ref X Lo 188 Load Loss Time 96 TB Man Ref Sel 189 Shear Pin Time 97 TB Man Ref Hi 190 Direction Mode
188. Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core E Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 20B UM002D EN P August 2010 Supersedes 20B UM002C EN P January 2008 Copyright 2010 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
189. User Manual Allen Bradley PowerFlex 700 AC Drives Vector Control Firmware 4 001 amp Up Frames 0 10 Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software des
190. a JUaIGWE au Do SG S elnsoj9ue apIsul UOIJOd SAP payoajosdun jo yuaiquie D Op S Hues ainyesodui9 juequue us yeay JuNow aue GG JUL ed L IN UONe e SU yoes JO uasoyo aq snw 9219 DEZ QIN sn Aq Bug jqemojje WNwixey d N3 91009S MNOy Uolealqnd ess Aven Aew 10 98 014 1010 WOY UNEIING au Jo SBulye 21 UL swayshs 2490 2490 A009 10 AO8p UO SN JO Deel IN JON ZYE A009 10 247 408 EHEC 10 OAM Ove 9160 10 ou 803 40 P S TIN AOUN 1070 4 UOWEUIqUIOD q ad pejoej01d 19S enue diy JOU Wu 97490 ay yey ULI Vun au o yes d y jueJuno y eney Pinoys aBue juesino ajgejsn pe UM Wop ugang unuuIxeu a umoys SHUEY y JOJOW Jo GZ SI azis WNWIUIW DIN SN 104 196910 9419 du SNOSUEJUE SU 101091014 INI JOJOJN unuuxeu ase umoys SHUEY WI 100W Jo 9 GZ SI azis WNWIUIW ON SN 104 aye21q aw asianul JayBaug PND unuuxeu a umoys SHUEY VH JOJOW JO GZI S 8zIS WNWIUIW OFAN SN 104 uooaod aap saljddns yey 2943p payed je ay S 9215 aonap UOOa OJd WNWIXEN Duddu eduesinu noyym uo Oa O1d wnwxewu seljddns yey 3919p paje 1samo au SI ZIS 971490 UOHOa ONd WNUN LL L LL L LL LL SOJON Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 21 Table A 325 Volt DC Input Protection Devices See page A 24 for Notes Drive x PWM Temp DC Input Catalog E Hp Rating Freq 1 Ratings Output Amps Non Time Number CND HD
191. abled for 2 wire control unless param 192 bit 1 1 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 4 16 Troubleshooting Drive does not respond to changes in speed command Cause s Indication Corrective Action No value is coming from the source LCD HIM Status 1 If the source is an analog input check of the command Line indicates wiring and use a meter to check for At Speed and presence of signal output is 0 Hz 2 Check Commanded Speed for correct source See page 3 7 Incorrect reference source has None 3 Check Speed Ref Source for the source of been programmed the speed reference See page 3 41 4 Reprogram Speed Ref A Sel for correct source See page 3 20 Incorrect Reference source is None 5 Check Drive Status 1 page 3 39 bits 12 being selected via remote device or and 13 for unexpected source selections digital inputs 6 Check Dig In Status page 3 42 to see if inputs are selecting an alternate source 7 Reprogram digital inputs to correct Speed Sel x option See page 3 58 Motor and or drive will not accelerate to commanded speed Cause s Indication Corrective Action Acceleration time is excessive None Reprogram Accel Time x See page 3 28 Excess load or short acceleration None Check Drive Status 2 bit 10 to see if the drive times force the drive into current is in Current Limit See page 3 39 limit slowing or stopping Remove excess load
192. aiqerery wi n yy XENI G XEN yy YN T XEN yy WI un LT woo KAT sduy Do ZHY 3 Jon WM 3uey D 0 asny ejeg asny ejeg sdwy nding sbuney q berg Buneg 3 Dote JUSJIN O aig gisnipg YUM 10J99 04d OO NOY 101991014 1916919 AUI UON ou 109uuai2 mduj dugl wad dy ama nand nad eng 10301 sajoN 40 DCH abed eas seo1nsg uo99 01d Indu Dy HOA ObZ 9 Y 9 0eL Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information 5 00y 009 009 USC URT URZ OLy 80 S02 SEL 661 108 Z OLL s S 00y URL URL ose oss ose 06 982 093 LLL RRC st C G amp L 9 09279807 osz 00s 009 osz GLE URZ ele GSc 0ZL 92 val 1 0b Pl 06 S z e Ge 007 009 009 osz UST USC 683 022 S03 8pL 661 1 0y T OLL 9 020903 osz Dk 096 003 00 003 083 Ole Ort EOL OCL 108 vy GL 2 UGC 00S 009 UBC SZE 053 RRC ZBL OLE 93L vol 1 05 T 06 9 0410903 F Os 00 00 URL See os 061 St SOL 9 69 LOL 1 0b Pl 99 T osz 007 007 003 00 003 D I P ll Ovl 66 DEL 1 0y T SZ S 0vkOg0e DCL GIE GLE Sel 003 Sel 894 vr 96 269 616 108 t Sy Ge x UGC BIC 00S DCL BLC DCL e9L BC L SZL BEB LLL 0S T GS S 086LO90C e Os 00 00 OLL SLL OLL ULL EA 98 79S PLS 108 Pl
193. ake Level Stop Brake Modes 3 30 71 Break Voltage Volts per Hertz 3 15 159 DC Brake Time Stop Brake Modes 3 30 72 Break Frequency Volts per Hertz 3 15 160 Bus Reg Ki Stop Brake Modes 3 30 79 Speed Units Spd Mode 8 Limits 3 17 161 162 Bus Reg Mode X Stop Brake Modes 3 31 80 Feedback Select Spd Mode A Limits 3 17 163 DB Resistor Type Stop Brake Modes 3 31 81 Minimum Speed Spd Mode A Limits 3 17 164 Bus Reg Kp Stop Brake Modes 3 31 82 Maximum Speed Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 165 Bus Reg Kd Stop Brake Modes 3 31 83 Overspeed Limit Spd Mode amp Limits 3 18 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 80 Programming and Parameters Number Parameter Name Group Page Number Parameter Name Group Page 166 Flux Braking Stop Brake Modes 3 32 246 Fault 2 Time Faults 3 46 167 Powerup Delay Restart Modes _ 3 32 247 Fault 3 Code Faults 3 46 168 Start At PowerUp Restart Modes 3 32 248 Fault 3 Time Faults 3 46 169 Flying Start En Restart Modes _
194. al Block Input UL Type Open Requires user supplied 120V AC See page IP20 NEMA 250 VA 1 1 22 for location UL Type 1 AC IPOO NEMA 250VA 1 N A Connected internally Input UL Type Open IP20 NEMA 250VA_ 1 UL Type 1 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 11 Fan Blower Terminal Blocks Frames 8 10 TB9 TB10 Blower TB TB12 Line kal R S T Line Ola 120V 1 120V AC Input OO Lu E el AC Input GN Neutral S n C To Fan s Neutral S n C To Fan s SMS la pid UU H On EE Dl re G K dy RK EE Ole G OfO d it LE OJO ne Jo o Beal eta we Jo o Frames 8 10 Frame 9 Only Frame 10 AC Input IP20 Only Fan Transformer Specifications Fusing Recommended Fuses Frame Rating Primary Quantity 2 Secondary Quantity 1 8 amp 9 500VA_ 2 8A 600V AC KLDR ATQR Type 6 25A 250V AC Time Delay 10 1000 VA 6A 600V AC KLDR ATQR Type 9A 250V AC Time Delay Three Phase Blower Fusing Frame Recommended Fuses Quantity 3 9 5A 600V AC Time Delay Frame 8 Fan Connections Drive Rating No of Type Enclosure 120VAC Fans Connect at DC IPOO NEMA 500 VA 1 TB9 Inp
195. al Notes 1 Manual control is exclusive If a HIM or terminal block takes manual control no other device can take manual control until the controlling device releases manual control 2 If a HIM has manual control and power is removed from the drive the drive will return to Auto mode when power is reapplied 3 Save HIM Ref parameter 192 can enable Manual mode to allow starts and jogs from the HIM in 2 wire mode Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 50 Installation Wiring Lifting Torque Proving For Lifting Torque Proving details refer to page C 4 Using PowerFlex Drives with Regenerative Units If a Regenerative unit i e 1336 REGEN is used as a bus supply or brake the common mode capacitors should be disconnected as described on page 1 24 Connections to the 1336 REGEN Regen Brake Mode Terminals Frame s 1336 REGEN __ PowerFlex 700 0 4 DC BR1 DC DC 5 6 DC DC DC DC Regenerative Bus Supply Mode Terminals Frame s 1336 REGEN _ PowerFlex 700 0 4 DC DC DC DC 5 6 DC DC of Common Bus Drives DC DC of Common Bus Drives Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 51 DC Input Common Bus and Precharge Notes The following notes must be read and understood Important Application Notes 1 If drives without internal precharge are used Frames 5 6 and 10 only then a precharge capability must be provided in the system to guard against possible damag
196. al screw and insert a M5 x 20 nylon screw spacer Installation Wiring 1 33 o 2 S Factory Default Jumper Settings S MOV InputFilter DC Bus Common CSG Ge Caps 2 Mode Caps Power Source Type 5 NEMA UL Type 12 Drives E All Two green Green yellow wire to Solid Ground T yellow wires CMCap Boardis CM Cap jumper wire should be connected to _ insulated from connected to ground with a metal chassis ground ground screw Verify If necessary remove F All Two green Green yellow wire to the nylon screw spacer and insert a W yellow wires CM Cap Board is metal M5 x 12 screw Torque to 3 2 connected to connected to ground Nem 28 Ibein chassis ground 2 MOV Input Filter Cap jumper wires d E CS g should be connected to ground with aE a metal screw Verify If necessary r remove the nylon screw spacer and insert a metal M5 x 12 screw R Non Solid Ground A 1 CM Cap jumper wire should be H insulated from ground with a nylon screw spacer Verify If necessary O remove the metal screw and insert a M5 x 20 nylon screw spacer 2 MOV Input Filter Cap jumper wires d should be insulated from ground CM Cap Ee MOV with a nylon screw spacer Verify If D I 2 necessary remove the metal screw Sus N and insert a A S M5 x 20 nylon screw spacer le as e M
197. alog inputs yy SS Y Y SCH VS Ws x x x x x x x x x x x x x xjo 0 ee IR 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 0 Een Bit Factory Default Bit Values Anlg In Sqr Root Enables disables the square root function for each input Key 97 9 YSL Ws x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 Ua pis 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Publication 20B UM002D EN P nN Y e ES Related MN Ka IND Ion Ka IND joo Ka IND et Programming and Parameters 3 55 o a S Parameter Name amp Description S O 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 322 Analog In 1 Hi Default 10 000 Volt 091 325 Analog In 2 Hi 10 000 Volt 092 Sets the highest input value to the analog Min Max 0 000 20 000mA input x scaling block 10 000V Anlg In Config parameter 320 defines if Units CH Vo this input will be 10V or 0 20 mA 0 001 Volt 323 Analog In 1 Lo Default 0 000 Volt 091 326 Analog In 2 Lo 0 000 Volt 092 Ss Sets the lowest input value to the analog Min Max 0 000 20 000mA E input x scaling block 10 000V tasa 0 000 10 000V Anlg In Config parameter 320 defines if Units 0 001 mA 2 this input will be 10V or 0 20 mA E 0 001 Volt lt If set below 4 mA Analog In x Loss should be Disabled 324 Analog In 1 Loss
198. ameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Accel Time 1 Accel Time 2 Sets the rate of accel for all speed increases Max Speed Accel Time Decel Time 1 Decel Time 2 Sets the rate of decel for all speed decreases Accel Rate Max Speed Decel Time S Curve Sets the percentage of accel or decel time that is applied to the ramp as S Curve Time is added 1 2 at the Decel Rate beginning and 1 2 at the end of the ramp Current Lmt Sel Selects the source for the adjustment of current limit i e parameter analog input etc Current Lmt Val Defines the current limit value when Current Lmt Sel Cur Lim Val When in Adj Voltage mode the output voltage will not be allowed to exceed this value Current Lmt Gain Sets the responsiveness of the current limit Drive OL Mode Selects the drives response to increasing drive temperature and may reduce the current limit value as well as the PWM frequency If the drive is being used with a sine wave filter the filter is likely tuned to a specific carrier frequency To ensure stable operation it is recommended to set this parameter to Reduce CLim Publication 20B UM002D EN P Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Units Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Mi
199. an also move to or from any step in the array Accel Decel Next Step Step Type Value Velocity Time Time Condition Next This feature also includes homing capability to a limit switch or a marker pulse using an automatic homing procedure Important The PowerFlex 700 uses an incremental encoder only Since absolute encoders are not used your process must be able to accommodate this homing procedure after a power down or power loss Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 18 Application Notes Common Guidelines for all Step Types Enabling Position Indexer Speed Profiler This feature is enabled by selecting 7 Pos Spd Prof in Speed Torque Mod parameter 088 Parameters 700 877 set up the indexer profiler Motor Control Modes For Position Indexing with an encoder only FVC Vector Control should be used for optimum performance For Velocity Profiling any motor control mode can be used However Sensorless Vector or FVC Vector Control modes will offer the best performance Direction Control The drive must be configured to allow the profile to control the direction This is accomplished by setting Direction Mode parameter 190 to Bipolar default is Unipolar Limits Many threshold values can affect the performance of the profile indexer To help minimize the possibility of overshooting a position ensure that the following parameters are set for the best performance No Parameter Description 15
200. and A command generated by pressing the Start button on the HIM closing a digital input programmed for Start Run Run Forward or Run Reverse Refer to Figure C 17 1 Invert mode is only available with Vector firmware 3 xxx and later Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 36 Application Notes Figure C 17 Sleep Wake Mode Is Sleep Wake Working Have these conditions been met 1 Sleep Wake Ref must be set to the analog input that will control Start Stop functions Sleep Wake Mode must 1 Direct Enable or 2 Invert Enable Sleep Level must be less than Wake Level in Direct mode or greater than Wake Level in Invert mode Speed Ref x Sel must be set to a speed reference source that will control the drive If Sleep Wake Ref Speed Ref x Sel the same analog signal will control start stop and speed reference At least one of the following must be programmed for Digital Inx Sel Not Stop Enable Start Run Run Forward Run Reverse No Yes lt Meet all Conditions L Publication 20B UM002D EN P Is Required Input Closed No Stop Enable Run Close Input Yes AL Invert Which Mode is Selected Direct Invert or Direct gt e Y Decrease
201. anufacturer Class Part A B Part A B Frame Number Meters Meters Number Meters Meters 0 KMF318A 100 MIF316 150 1 KMF325A 150 a 2 KMF350A 200 150 Sa 2 w o DC CM KMF350A 176 150 z Capacitor 3 KMF370A 150 100 3 w o DC CM KMF370A 150 100 Capacitor 0 FN3258 16 45 150 1 FN3258 30 47 150 E 2 FN3258 42 47 50 50 2 w o DC CM FN3258 42 47 150 150 Capacitor 3 FN3258 75 52 100 100 3 w o DC CM FN3258 75 52 150 150 Capacitor 1 Use of these filters assumes that the drive is mounted in an EMC enclosure Publication 20B UM002D EN P Chapter 2 Start Up This chapter describes how you start up the PowerFlex 700 Drive Refer to Appendix B for a brief description of the LCD HIM Human Interface Module For information on See page Prepare For Drive Start Up 2 1 Status Indicators 2 2 Start Up Routines 2 3 Running S M A R T Start 2 6 Running an Assisted Start Up 2 6 following start up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages
202. applicable codes and standards ATTENTION Loss of control in suspended load applications can Publication 20B UM002D EN P Overview P 5 Catalog Number Explanation Position 1 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 20B D 2P1 A 3 A Y N A R C 0 NN AD a b CG d e T g h j k I m n a c2 c3 Drive HAND Rating OS ND Rating Code Type 400V 50 Hz Input 480V 60 Hz Input 208 PowerFlex 700 Code Amps kW Frame Code Amps Hp Frame 1P3 13 0 37 7 T 11 D o 2P1 24 0 75 0 2P1 24 1 0 0 b 3P5 35 15 0 3P4 34 2 0 0 Voltage Rating Spo 5 0 2 2 0 Spo 5 0 3 0 0 Code Voltage Ph Prechg Frames 8P7 8 7 4 0 0 8PO 8 0 5 0 0 ancl aN S N a On 115 55 0 om 1 75 0 EIERE 010 015 15 4 75 1 014 14 10 1 ovac a S OAT 022 22 11 1 022 22 15 1 E ann AG 3 Ce 030 30 15 2 027 27 20 2 El esovac 3 S 5 6 037 37 18 5 2 034 34 25 2 H Sav BG N 5 6 10 es a3 22 3 040 40 30 3 WW ep Rae T N 6 510 056 56 30 3 052 52 40 3 ETAR y Se 072 72 37 3 065 65 50 3 GR aG T y SC 085 85 45 4 077 77 60 4 ETA y Se 105 105 55 5 096 96 75 5 KR aper SS 125 125 55 5 125 125 100 5 WN asav bo y 5 6 140 140 75 5 156 156 125 6 170 170 90 6 180 180 150 6 205 205 110 6 248 248 200 6 1 260 260 132 6 292 292 250 7 S 292 292 160 7 325 325 250 7 ND ating 325 325 18
203. are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight kg bs Type Drive Drive amp Packaging DC Input 468 1032 515 1135 AC Input 867 1912 958 2112 Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 42 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 17 IP00 NEMA UL Type Open Frame 7 lt 514 4 20 25 lt 477 3 18 79 gt lt 440 2 17 33 gt A SUANGER 1 i a 1424 2 L 56 07 ERT 1447 8 57 00 1498 6 A S g 59 00 Cog g Y Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight kg Ibs Drive Drive amp Packaging 147 324 173 382 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Lifting Holes 4 Places Supplemental Drive Information A 43 Figure A 18 IP00 NEMA UL Type Open Frames 8 amp 9 lt 757 7 29 83 gt 145 3 5 72 EN d See j TET Table o o 247 1 9 73 L 614 4 24 19 e 199 4 7 85 Le 91 7 3 61 kK 549 7 21 64 1524 0 60 00 1463 0 57 60 2283 7 89 91 Drive A B C 20Bx365 415 4
204. ation N223 and the standards referenced below IEC 61800 3 Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 2 Supplemental Drive Information Frames Category 0 4 230 480 V 600V 5 7 10 Specification CMAA Specification 70 Crane Manufacturers of America Association Designed to Meet Applicable Requirements 1 Frames 7 10 provi NFPA 70 US National Electrical Code NEMA ICS 7 1 Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection Installation and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems S iss LLL HLL LLL IEC 61800 2 Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems Part 2 General Requirements Rating specifications for low voltage adjustable frequency AC power drive systems ded as IP00 or NEMA UL Open style must be installed in a supplementary enclosure which provides adequate attenuation of radiated emissions in order to be compliant with Environment Software Overcurrent Trip Hardware Overcurrent Trip EN 61800 3 Category Specification Protection Drive 600V 600 690V 200 208V 240V 380 400V 480V Frm 0 4 Frm 5 6 AC Input Overvoltage Trip 285VAC 285VAC 570VAC 570VAC 716VAC 818VAC AC Input Undervoltage Trip 120VAC 138VAC 233VAC 280VAC 345VAC 345VAC Bus Overvoltage Trip 405VDC 405VDC 810VDC 810VDC 1013VDC 1162VDC Bus Undervoltage Shutoff Fault 153VDC 153VDC 305VDC 305V
205. autions General P 3 Precharge 1 51 Precharge Active Alarm 4 13 Preferences Setting B 6 Preset Speed x 3 22 Process PI Group 3 23 Process PID C 29 Prof Step Cflct Alarm 4 13 Profile Step Group 3 71 ProfSetup Status Group 3 69 Programmable Controller Configurations A 6 Programming 3 1 PTC Conflict Alarm 4 13 PTC HW Value 3 8 Publications Reference P 2 Pulse In Loss Fault 4 9 Pulse In Scale 3 16 Pulse Input 1 42 Pulse Input Ref 3 21 PWM Frequency 3 29 Pwr Brd Chksum Fault 4 9 Pwr Brd Chksum2 4 9 PWR LED 4 2 R Ramp Rates Group 3 28 Ramped Speed 3 8 Rated Amps 3 9 Rated kW 3 8 Rated Volts 3 8 Ratings Drive A 9 Reference Control 1 46 Reference Manual P 1 Reference Mask 3 51 Reference Material P 2 Reference Owner 3 52 Regen Power Limit 3 29 Regenerative Units 1 50 Removing Cover 1 1 Repeated Start Stop 1 23 Replaced MCB PB Fault 4 9 Reset Meters 3 37 Reset to Defaults 3 37 B 5 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Resistive Grounded Distribution Systems 1 24 Resistive Grounded Supply 1 4 Restart Modes Group 3 32 Rev Speed Limit 3 19 Reverse Speed Limit C 32 Rod Load Torque 3 65 Run Boost 3 15 S S Curve 3 28 S M A R T Start Up 2 3 Safety Ground 1 5 Save HIM Ref 3 36 Save MOP Ref 3 36 Save To User Set 3 37 Saving Data B 5 Scale In Hi 3 48 Scale In Lo 3 48 Scale In Value 3 48 Scale Out Hi 3 48 Scale Out Lo 3 48 Scale Out
206. celerating near the end of travel and then stopping at the end position The end limit switch can also be used for end limit stops as many hoists require These inputs can be used with or without TorqProve enabled Decel Limit for Digital Inputs Decel Limit is enabled by selecting Decel Limit as one of the digital inputs in Digital In1 6 Select parameters 361 366 When this input is low opposite logic the speed reference command will change from the selected reference to the value in Preset Speed 1 parameter 101 The deceleration rate will be based on the active deceleration time This limit will be enforced only in the direction the drive was running when the switch was activated momentarily or continuously see B in Figure C 4 The opposite direction will still be allowed to run at the selected reference speed No speed limitation will occur between the limit switches A in Figure C 4 Two different switches can be connected in series to one digital input to provide a decel limit at both ends of the application i e lift conveyor etc With proper set up the drive will automatically apply the speed reduction based on the direction of the load even though only one digital input is being used See B in Figure C 4 End Travel Limit for Digital Inputs End Travel Limit is enabled by selecting End Limit as one of the digital inputs in Digital In1 6 Select A low at this input opposite
207. ck requests manual control through a digital input programmed for Auto Manual TB Man Ref Sel is then set to one of the DPI ports with a HIM connected to it e the I O terminal block analog input can provide the manual source when a digital input is programmed for Auto Manual TB Man Ref Sel is set to Analog Input Changing Speed Sources The selection of the active Speed Reference can be made through digital inputs DPI command jog button or Auto Manual HIM operation Torque Reference Source The torque reference is normally supplied by an analog input or network reference Switching between available sources while the drive is running is not available Digital inputs programmed as Speed Sel 1 2 3 and the HIM Auto Manual function see above do not affect the active torque reference when the drive is in Vector Control Mode 1 Requires drive firmware v7 001 or greater and a Series B HIM with firmware v5 004 or greater Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 47 Figure 1 10 Speed Reference Selection Chart 1 Default Digital Inx Select PI Exclusive Mode Trim Speed Sel 3 2 1 PI Configuration Divo Raf Ral Pure Reference Auto Speed Ref Options VEN SEO HEE to follower drive for Speed Ref A
208. cribed in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances A lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g A A drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures PowerFlex DriveExplorer DriveExecutive PLC Force Technology DPI and SCANport are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International Ltd DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to
209. d UO amp Auxiliary Control Voltage TB11 MOV Fan Terminal Block DC input only HIM Comm Module Optional Fan Transformer AC input only 0 0 0 0 eeeeeels Main Control Board Encoder Feedback Board Optional Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 1 8 Installation Wiring Figure 1 3 Component Locations Frame 8 el f Ne o D d Refer to page 1 15 for TB specifications Component Component Power Terminals Nameplate PE Ground and MOV wire DC Bus Brake Terminals UO amp Auxiliary Control Voltage TB11 MOV located under boards Fan Terminal Block TB9 DC Link Choke AC input only Fan Transformer AC input only HIM Comm Module Optional EMELIE Main Control Board Publication 20B UM002D EN P Ge ee ez Encoder Feedback Board Optional Figure 1 4 Component Locations Frame 9 B G e Go e Refer to page 1 15 for TB specifications Component Power Terminals Installa
210. d parameter 82 to a value less than 45 Hz i e 22 5 Hz 12 seconds at 30 Hz e The brake will be released without torque provided by the drive for 15 seconds To guard against personal injury and or equipment damage this test should not be performed if either of the above conditions are considered unacceptable by the user 7 Set the following parameters as shown No Name Value Notes 053 Motor Cntl Sel 4 FVC Vector 080 Feedback Select 3 Encoder 061 Autotune 2 Rotate Tune Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 7 8 Start the drive and run the motor in the desired direction Parameters 062 063 064 amp 121 will be updated Inertia AutoTune Test 9 Set Inertia Autotune parameter 067 to 1 Inertia Tune 10 Press Start and run the motor in the direction desired Parameters 445 446 and 450 will be updated 11 Set Speed Desired BW parameter 449 to desired setting 12 Set up is complete check for proper operation Drive Setup TorqProve with Encoder To Enable TorqProve with an encoder bit 0 of TorqProve Cnfg parameter 600 must be set to 1 Once this is set a Type 2 alarm will be active until the following settings are entered No Name Value Notes 053 Motor Cntl Sel 4 FVC Vector 080 Feedback Select 3 Encoder 412 Motor Fdbk Type 1 Quad Check Encoderless TorqProve To Enable Encoderless To
211. d greater than 25 of drive rating Hardware enable is disabled jumpered high but logic pin is still low Gate array load error Dual port failure Motor PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient Overtemp Annunciates a too low temperature case or an open NTC heatsink temperature sensing device circuit Heatsink temperature exceeds 100 of Drive Temp or is less than approximately 19 degrees The drive output current has exceeded the hardware current limit 1 Reprogram Motor NP FLA with the correct motor nameplate value 2 Repeat Autotune Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition 1 Check jumper 2 Replace Main Control Board Cycle power Replace Main Control Board Cycle power Replace Main Control Board M N 1 Verify ambient temperature In cold ambient temperatures add space heaters ba 1 Verify that maximum ambient temperature has not been exceeded 2 Check fan 3 Check for excess load 4 In cold ambient temperatures add space heaters Check programming Check for excess load improper DC boost setting DC brake volts set too high or other causes of excess current Publication 20B UM002D EN P Fault Incompat MCB PB 1 0 Comm Loss 1 0 Failure Input Phase Loss IR Volts Range IXo VoltageRange Load Loss Motor Overload Motor Thermistor NVS I O Checksum NVS 1 O Failure Output PhaseLoss
212. d verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC amp DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block refer to Chapter 1 for location The voltage must be zero ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists DPI or SCANport host products must not be directly connected together via 1202 cables Unpredictable behavior can result if two or more devices are connected in this manner ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed bypass system can result in component damage or reduction in product life The most common causes are e Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals e Improper bypass or output circuits not approved by Allen Bradley e Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor Contact Allen Bradley for assistance with application or wiring Publication 20B UM002D EN P P 4 Overview is extremely useful for preventing nuisance overvoltage faults resulting from aggressive decelerations overhauling loads and eccentric loads It forces the output frequency to be greater than commanded frequency while the drive s bus voltage is increasing towards levels that would otherwise cause a fault However it can also cause either of the following two conditions to occur ATTENTION The adjust freq portion of the bus regulator function 1 Fast positive changes in input voltage more than a 10 increase within 6
213. d BW Sets the speed loop bandwidth and determines the dynamic behavior of the speed loop As bandwidth increases the speed loop becomes more responsive and can track a faster changing speed reference Adjusting this parameter will cause the drive to calculate and change Ki Speed Loop and Kp Speed Loop gains Total Inertia Represents the time in seconds for a motor coupled to a load to accelerate from zero to base speed at rated motor torque The drive calculates Total Inertia during the autotune inertia procedure Adjusting this parameter will cause the drive to calculate and change Ki Speed Loop and Kp Speed Loop gains Speed Loop Meter Value of the speed regulator output 1 9 if Motor Cntl Sel FVC Vector Programming and Parameters Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 1 200 0 R s 0 0 2000 0 R s 0 1 R s 0 0 Radians Sec 0 0 250 0 Radians Sec 0 1 Radians Sec 0 10 Secs 0 01 600 00 0 01 Secs Read Only 14800 0 1 800 0 Hz 800 0 RPM 0 1 Hz RPM 3 27 Related IS GA GI O GA Gi O OI 95 IO 57 e Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 28 File Ramp Rates Load Limits Programming and Parameters Dynamic Control File 142 143 146 147 148 149 150 Par
214. d the Logic Mask bit for that adapter is set to 1 this fault will occur To disable this fault set the Logic Mask bit for the adapter to 0 1 Check DPI device event queue and corresponding fault information for the device Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption 1 Check for damaged output transistors 2 Replace drive Fault Pulse In Loss Pwr Brd Chksum1 Pwr Brd Chksum2 Replaced MCB PB See Manual Shear Pin Software Fault Software Fault SW OverCurrent TorqPrv Spd Band Trnsistr OvrTemp UnderVoltage UserSet1 Chksum UserSet2 Chksum UserSet3 Chksum No 92 104 105 107 63 co SS 101 102 103 Typel O Description Z Channel is selected as a pulse input and no signal is present The checksum read from the EEPROM does not match the checksum calculated from the EEPROM data The checksum read from the board does not match the checksum calculated Main Control Board was replaced and parameters were not programmed Encoderless TorqProve has been enabled but user has not read and understood application concerns of encoderless operation Programmed Current Lmt Val has been exceeded Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 on page 3 45 Microprocessor handshake error Microprocessor handshake error Drive output current has exceeded the 1ms current rati
215. drive from the motor The first input must be Digital Input6 Hardware Enable terminal 32 The second can be any other unused digital input between 1 and 5 Note that all inputs are typically supplied in a default configuration to a function such as Start and Stop This may influence the input selected by the user for this function The following examples will assume Digital Input 5 terminal 31 is being used as the additional required input The 2 input terminals must be wired in parallel jumper is acceptable so each is monitoring the over temperature contacts Digital signal inputs are wired with respect to the digital input common Refer to the drive User Manual regarding setup for either internal or external 24V DC or external 115V AC logic power depending on the type that is supplied in your drive Motor supplied contacts must have ratings compatible with the drive s input circuit ratings and applied voltage level Figure D 2 Wiring Example External Power Supply Internal 24V Power Supply Neutral 115V Common 24V 24 424V DC Digital In Common 25 Digital In Common 26 Motor Over Temperature 31 Sensor s Motor Over Temperature 31 Sensor s 32 32 Digital Input 6 O Digital Input 6 Voltage is Board Dependent Not available with 115V I O Drive Configuration Both of the digital inputs required to monitor for motor over
216. e 730 Step 2 Type File Group Related tions End 740 Step 3 Type Baig i SC 750 Step 4 Type 2 Time Blend 760 Step 5 Type 3 Dig Input 770 Step 6 Type 4 Encoder Incr 780 Step 7 Type 5 EncincrBlend 790 Step 8 Type 6 Encoder Abs 800 Step 9 Type 7 End Hold Pos 810 Step 10 Type 8 Param Level 820 Step 11 Type 830 Step 12 Type 840 Step 13 Type 850 Step 14 Type 860 Step 15 Type 870 Step 16 Type O Selects the type of move for a particular step The following step types use the velocity regulator only End 0 drive ramps to zero speed and stops the profile after the programmed dwell time Time 1 drive ramps to Step x Velocity holds speed and decels to zero in specified Step x Value time Time Blend 2 drive ramps to Step x Velocity and holds speed until Step x Value time completes then transitions to step defined in Step x Next Dig Input 3 drive ramps to Step x Velocity holds speed until input specified in Step x Value transitions in the direction defined by sign of Step x Value EncincrBlend 5 drive ramps to Step x Velocity holds speed when at encoder position defined by Step x Value within tolerance window transition to Step x Next Param Level 8 drive ramps to Step x Velocity holds speed and compares Step x Value to Step x Dwell The si
217. e A on the diagram above The motor if rotating will coast from its present speed for a time that is dependent on the remaining kinetic energy and the mechanics of the system inertia friction etc Excess motor current and or applied duration could cause motor damage The user is also cautioned that motor voltage can exist long after the Stop command is issued The right combination of Brake Level and Brake Time must be determined to provide the safest most efficient stop decel profile C on the diagram above Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 41 Mode Description Ramp Bus Voltage Output Voltage Output Current Motor Speed Command Speed Output Current Time Stop Zero Command 7 Lon Brake Time Command Speed This method uses drive output reduction to stop the load Ramp is selected by setting Stop Mode A B to a value of 1 The drive will ramp the frequency to zero based on the deceleration time programmed into Decel Time 1 2 The normal mode of machine operation can utilize Decel Time 1 If the machine stop requires a faster deceleration than desired for normal deceleration Decel Time 2 can be activated with a faster rate selected When in Ramp mode the drive acknowledges the stop command by decreasing or ramping the output voltage and frequency to zero in a programmed period Decel Time maintaining con
218. e and b disconnect switches Must Not be used between the input of the drive and a common DC bus without the use of an external precharge device 2 If drives with internal precharge Frames 0 6 are used with a disconnect switch to the common bus then a an auxiliary contact on the disconnect must be connected to a digital input of the drive The corresponding input parameter 361 366 must be set to 30 Precharge Enable This provides the proper precharge interlock guarding against possible damage to the drive when connected to a common DC bus b the drive must have firmware version 2 002 or above 3 If drives with internal precharge Frames 7 9 are used with a disconnect switch to the common bus then a an auxiliary contact on the disconnect must be connected to a digital input of the drive The corresponding input parameter 361 366 must be set to option 30 Precharge Enable This provides the proper precharge interlock guarding against possible damage to the drive when connected to a common DC bus and b an auxiliary contact on the disconnect must also be connected to TB1 on the Precharge Board Set JMP1 to the voltage being used and JMP2 to Interlock c Set jumpers on the Precharge Board as shown below Jumper Setting Description JMP1 1 2 24V DC input TB1 2 31 120V AC Input y JMP2 1 2 Interlock k Sa 2 3 1 Bypass O O l
219. e Group Parameters Monitor Metering Output Freq 001 Flux Current 005 DC BusMemory 013 Commanded Speed002 Output Voltage 006 Analog Int Value 016 Ramped Speed 022 Output Power 007 Analog In2 Value 017 Speed Reference 023 Output Powr Fctr 008 Elapsed kWh 014 Commanded Torque 024 Elapsed MWh 009 PTC HW Value 018 Speed Feedback 025 Elapsed Run Time 010 Spd Fdbk No Filt 021 Output Current 003 MOP Reference 011 Torque Current 004 DC Bus Voltage 012 Drive Data Rated kW 026 Rated Amps 028 Rated Volts 027 Control SW Ver 029 Motor Control Motor Data Motor Type 040 Motor NP RPM 044 Motor OL Factor 048 Motor NP Volts 041 Motor NP Power 045 Motor OL Mode 050 Motor NP FLA 042 Mtr NP Pwr Units 046 Motor Poles 049 Motor NP Hertz 043 Motor OL Hertz 047 Torq Attributes Motor Cntl Sel 053 Flux Current Ref 063 Torque Ref BHi 432 SS Maximum Voltage 054 Do Voltage Drop 064 Torque Ref B Lon 433 AY Maximum Freq 055 Autotune Torque 066 Torq Ref B Mut 434 Compensation 056 Inertia Autotune 067 Torque Setpoint 1 435 Flux Up Mode 057 Torque Ref A Sel 427 Torque Setpoint 2 438 Flux Up Time 058 Torque Ref A Hi 428 Pos Torque Limit 436 SV Boost Filter 059 Torque Ref A Lo 429 Neg Torque Limit 437 Autotune 061 Torq Ref A Div 430 Control Status 440 IR Voltage Drop 062 Torque Ref B Sel 431 Mtr Tor Cur Ref 441 Volts per Hertz Start Acc Boost 069 Break Voltage 071 Run Boost 070 Break Frequency 072 Speed Feedback
220. e include web handling demanding extruders and lifting applications such as hoists or material handling Vector Control can operate in one of two configurations Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 14 Application Notes 1 Encoderless Not to be confused with Sensorless Vector above Encoderless Vector based on Allen Bradley s patented Field Oriented Control technology means that a feedback device is not required Torque control can be achieved across a significant speed range without feedback 2 Closed Loop with Encoder force Vector Control with encoder feedback utilizes Allen Bradley s Force Technology This industry leading technology allows the drive to control torque over the entire speed range including zero speed For those applications that require smooth torque regulation at very low speeds or full torque at zero speed Closed Loop Vector Control is the answer Speed Regulators Any of the PowerFlex drives regardless of their motor control technology Volts Hz Sensorless Vector or Vector can be set up to regulate speed Speed regulation and torque regulation must be separated to understand drive operation The PowerFlex 700 can offer improved speed regulation by adding speed feedback Using a speed feedback device encoder tightens speed regulation to 0 001 of base speed and extends the speed range to zero speed Motor Overload For single motor applications the drive can be programmed to protect the mo
221. e only intended to identify structural mounting points and hardware shapes You must design and fabricate steel components based on the actual mounting configuration calculated loads and enclosure specifications Minimum thickness of all parts 4 6 mm 0 18 in Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 49 Figure A 25 Frame 7 Flange Mount Cutout e 508 0 e ES 20 00 489 0 Se 5 8 lie 19 25 y 127 0 el 541 0 23 laai 213 PS L Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure 1422 4 56 00 1095 8 43 AS 26 Required 4 3 0 171 Dia for 10 32 x 9 7 0 38 Self Tap 4 0 0 159 for 10 32 x 9 7 0 38 Threaded Minimum dimension allowed More space will improve fan effectiveness and heat dissipation KE 1 Back of Enclosure E i 132 3 5 21 Important Use gasket kit catalog number SK G1 GASKET1 F7 with user supplied IP54 NEMA UL Type 12 enclosure Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 50 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 26 Frame 8 amp 9 Flange Mount Cutout 5 6 0 22 20 Places a Important Use gasket kit catalog number SK G1 GASKET1 F89 with user supplied IP54 NEMA UL Type 12 enclosure 583 7 22 98 lt 553 5 21 79 152 4 gt 203 2 152 4 6 00 8 00 S 15 0 0 59 Le 22 6 0 89 il y Dimensions are in Millimeters and Inches 152 1 2 05 A SS e 279
222. e or a mechanical brake Parameters 600 612 are designed for lifting torque proving applications It is the responsibility of the engineer and or end user to configure drive parameters test any lifting functionality and meet safety requirements in accordance with all applicable codes and standards ATTENTION Loss of control in suspended load applications can Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 5 ATTENTION User must read the following prior to the use of TorqProve with no encoder Encoderless TorqProve must be limited to lifting applications where personal safety is not a concern Encoders offer additional protection and must be used where personal safety is a concern Encoderless TorqProve cannot hold a load at zero speed without a mechanical brake and does not offer additional protection if the brake slips fails Loss of control in suspended load applications can cause personal injury and or equipment damage It is the responsibility of the engineer and or user to configure drive parameters test any lifting functionality and meet safety requirements in accordance with all applicable codes and standards If encoderless TorqProve is desired the user must certify the safety of the application To acknowledge that the end user has read this Attention and properly certified their encoderless application bit 8 TPEncdless of Compensation parameter 56 must be changed to a 1 This will disable Fault 28
223. e rating based on 4 kHz see pages A 12 through A 24 for exceptions Output Voltage Range 0 to rated motor voltage Output Frequency Range Standard Control 0 to 400 Hz Vector Control 0 to 420 Hz Frequency Accuracy Digital Input Within 0 01 of set output frequency Analog Input Within 0 4 of maximum output frequency Frequency Control Speed Regulation w Slip Compensation Volts per Hertz Mode 0 5 of base speed across 40 1 speed range 40 1 operating range 10 rad sec bandwidth Speed Regulation w Slip Compensation Sensorless Vector Mode 0 5 of base speed across 80 1 speed range 80 1 operating range 20 rad sec bandwidth Speed Regulation w Feedback Sensorless Vector Mode 0 1 of base speed across 80 1 speed range 80 1 operating range 20 rad sec bandwidth Speed Control Speed Regulation w o Feedback Vector Control Mode 0 1 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 120 1 operating range 50 rad sec bandwidth Speed Regulation w Feedback Vector Control Mode 0 001 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 1000 1 operating range 250 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation Torque Regulation w o Feedback 5 600 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation w Feedback 2 2500 rad sec bandwidth Selectable Motor Control Sensorless Vector with full tuning Standard V Hz with full custom capability PF700 adds Vector Control Stop Modes Multiple progra
224. e resistor is connected to the drive Bus Reg Mode A amp B must be set to either option 2 3 or 4 ATTENTION Equipment damage may result if a drive mounted internal resistor is installed and this parameter is set to External Res or None Thermal protection for the internal resistor will be disabled resulting in possible device damage Also see ATTENTION above 164 Bus Reg Kp Default 1500 Proportional gain for the bus regulator Min Max 0 10000 Used to adjust regulator response Units 1 165 Bus Reg Kd Default 1000 Derivative gain for the bus regulator Min Max 0 10000 Used to control regulator overshoot Units 1 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 32 Programming and Parameters S Parameter Name 8 Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 166 Flux Braking Default 0 Disabled Set to use an increase in the motor flux Options 0 Disabled current to increase the motor losses and 1 Enabled O allow a faster deceleration time when a chopper brake or regenerative capability is not available Can be used as a stopping or fast deceleration method Related Stop Brake Modes Group 167 Powerup Delay Default 0 0 Secs Defines the programmed delay time in Min Max 0 0 10800 0 Secs seconds before a start command is Units 0 1 Secs accepted after a power up 168 Start At PowerUp Default 0 Disabled Enables disables a feature
225. e will be the time it takes to ramp the Units 0 1 Secs voltage from Maximum Voltage to Min Adj Voltage An S curve can be applied to the ramp using Adj Volt Scurve Important This ramp and Decel Time 1 2 parameters 142 143 must ramp to zero for drive to Stop 677 Adj Volt S Curve Default 0 0 Sets the percentage of accel or decel Min Max 0 0 100 0 time to be applied to the voltage ramp as Units 0 1 S curve Time is added 1 2 at the beginning and 1 2 at the end Adjust Voltage Publication 20B UM002D EN P Related Programming and Parameters 3 69 Pos Spd Profile File T Kal v o Parameter Name amp Description D See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values ec 700 Pos Spd Prof Sts Read Only Provides status of the profile indexer Bits 0 4 are a binary value y Sy e RY E RE amp OA S ML SIS ES IS S se ofojololojolojolx x x ojofofoloy Ie pits 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 65 4 3210 x Reserved Bit 0101010111 Step1 0101011101 Step2 UTU TTT TTT Step3 0101110101 Step4 0 0 1 0 1 Steps 0101111101 Step6 ofo 1 1 1 Step7 0 1 0 0 0 Steps 0 11001 Seng 0111011101 Step to O T O t 1 Step 11 0 1 1 0 0 Step 12 wi 0111110111 Step 13 S 0111111101 Step 14 o E 0 1 1 1 1 Step 15 110101010 Step 16 SR S S Z 701 Units T
226. ear ratio Min Max 1 00 40 00 Units 0 01 645 Motor Sheave Default 10 00 Inch O Sets the sheave diameter on the motor Min Max 0 25 25 00 Inch Units 0 01 Inch 646 Total Gear Ratio Default Read Only O Displays the calculated total gear ratio as Min Max 0 00 32000 00 follows Units 0 01 Gearbox Sheave x Gearbox Ratio Motor Sheave 647 DB Resistor Default 10 4 Ohms Calculates the negative torque maximum Min Max 0 0 100 0 Ohms available from the dynamic brake resistor Units 0 1 Ohms 648 Gearbox Limit Default 100 0 O Sets the gearbox torque limit This value Min Max 0 0 200 0 is used in determining the Pos Torque Units 0 1 Limit amp Neg Torque Limit Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters 3 67 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Group No Related Values File 650 Adj Volt Phase Default 1 3 Phase O 1 Phase 0 Select to operate single Options 0 1 Phase phase loads connected to the U amp V 1 3 Phase phases Not designed to operate single phase motors 3 Phase 1 Select to operate three phase loads 651 Adj Volt Select Default 2 Analog In 2 O Selects the source of the voltage Options 0 Reserved reference to the drive 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 6 Reserved 7 8 Not Used 9 MOP Level 10 Reserved
227. ecelTime Step 11 DecelTime Step 12 DecelTime Step 13 DecelTime Step 14 DecelTime Step 15 DecelTime Step 16 DecelTime This is the deceleration rate for the step Sets the time to ramp from Maximum Speed to zero Step 1 Value Step 2 Value Step 3 Value Step 4 Value Step 5 Value Step 6 Value Step 7 Value Step 8 Value Step 9 Value Step 10 Value Step 11 Value Step 12 Value Step 13 Value Step 14 Value Step 15 Value Step 16 Value Sets the step value used for time time blend digital input number parameter level and encoder based units Also determines the condition to move to the next step Time Time Blend 0 00 3600 00 seconds Digital Input 1 to 6 decimal ignored The sign value makes inputs active high and a makes them active low Parameter Level parameter number Encoder Absolute Encoder Incremental Encoder Incremental Blend 99 999 00 units see Counts per Unit Programming and Parameters 3 73 Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Related 10 0 Secs 0 0 3600 0 Secs 0 1 Secs 6 0 Based on Step x Type 0 01 Units dependent on Step x Type Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 74 Programming and Parameters File Group Profile Step 1 16 726 736 746 756 766 776 786 796 806 816 826 836 846 856 866 876 POS SPD PROFILE Parameter Name amp Descripti
228. ecifies the pump sheave diameter Min Max 0 25 200 00 Inch Units 0 01 Inch 638 Max Rod Torque Default 500 0 FtLb O Sets the desired maximum torque on the Min Max 0 0 3000 0 FtLb polished rod in a PCP oil well application Units 0 1 FtLb Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 66 Programming and Parameters mod o S Parameter Name amp Description 2 o 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 639 Min Rod Speed Default 0 0 RPM 081 O Sets the minimum speed for the polished Min Max 0 0 199 0 RPM 646 rod in a PCP oil well application Units 0 1 RPM 640 Max Rod Speed Default 200 0 RPM 082 O Sets the maximum speed for the polished Min Max 200 0 600 0 RPM 46 rod in a PCP oil well application Units 0 1 RPM 641 OilWell Pump Sel Default D Disable 190 O Selects the type of oil well application Options 0 Disable 213 Disable 0 Disables oil well T Pump Jack parameters 2 PC Oil Well Pump Jack 1 Sets parameters based on Pump Jack type oil well PC Oil Well 2 Sets parameters based on Progressive Cavity type Pumps 642 Gearbox Rating Default 640 0 King O Sets the gearbox rating Min Max 16 0 2560 0 King a Units 0 1 Kin 5 643 Gearbox Sheave Default 0 25 Inch Sets the Sheave diameter on the Min Max 0 25 100 00 Inch Gearbox Units 0 01 Inch 644 Gearbox Ratio Default 1 00 O Specifies the nameplate g
229. ecs zero during brake proving Units 0 1 Secs 609 BrkSlip Count Default 250 Sets the number of encoder counts to Min Max 0 65535 define a brake slippage condition Not Units 1 used in encoderless operation 610 Brk Alarm Travel Default 1 0 Revs Sets the number of motor shaft Min Max 0 0 1000 0 Revs revolutions allowed during the brake Units 0 1 Revs slippage test Drive torque is reduced to check for brake slippage When slippage occurs the drive allows this number of motor shaft revolutions before regaining control Not used in Encoderless TorqProve mode 611 MicroPos Scale Default 10 0 Sets the percent of speed reference to be Min Max 0 1 100 0 used when micropositioning has been Units 0 1 selected in TorqProve Cnfg Bit 2 of TorqProve Cnfg parameter 600 determines if the motor needs to come to a stop before this setting will take effect ID wm Joo IS I gt 3 o 5 l g gt Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters 3 65 no Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 612 Torq Prove Sts Read Only Displays the status bits for TorqProve A V A S ANA 3 ISLS ISS 3 ASAS A KEE g x x x x x x x x x ofolofolofojoy leE pits 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 y Reserved E Bit 613 eg Brake Test Torq Default 50 0 600 Sets test torque
230. ect Adjust Voltage 1277 437 Neg Torque Limit Torq Attributes 13 14 652 Adj Volt Ref Hi Adjust Voltage 3 67 438 Torque Setpoint2 Torq Attributes 3 14 653 Ad Volt Ref Lo Adjust Voltage 1277 440 Control Status Torq Attributes 3 14 654 660 Adj Volt Preseti 7 Adjust Voltage 3 67 441 MtrTorCurRef om Attributes 3 14 661 Min Adj Voltage Adjust Voltage 3 67 445 Ki Speed Loop Speed Regulator 3 26 662 Ad Volt Command Adjust Voltage 3 67 446 KpSpeedLoop Speed Regulator 3 26 663 MOP Adj VoltRate Adjust Voltage 3 67 447 Kf Speed Loop Speed Regulator 3 27 669 Adj Volt TrimSel___ Adjust Voltage 777 448 SpdErrFiltBW Speed Regulator 3 27 670 Adj Volt Trim Hi Adjust Voltage 3 68 449 Speed Desired BW Speed Regulator 3 27 671 AdjVolt Trim Lo Adjust Voltage 3 68 450 Total Inertia Speed Regulator 3 27 672 Adj Volt Trim Adjust Voltage 3 68 451 Speed Loop Meter Speed Regulator 3 27 675 AdjVolt AccTime Adjust Voltage 3 68 454 Rev Speed Limit Speed Regulator 3 19 676 AdjVoltDecTime Adjust Voltage 3 68 459 P Demy Time Process PI 3 26 677 AdjVoltS Curve _ Adjust Voltage 122 460 PI Reference Hi Process Pl 3 26 700 Pos Spd Prof Sts ProfSetup Status 3 69 461 PI Reference Lo Process PI 3 26 701 Units Traveled ProfSetup Status 3 69 462 PI Feedback Hi Process Pl 3 26 702 Home Position ProfSetup Status 3 69 463 PI Feedback Lo Process Pl 3 26 705
231. ed and necessary Should Recommended Should Not Not recommended Publication 20B UM002D EN P gt b gt P Overview P 3 Drive Frame Sizes Similar PowerFlex 700 drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes to simplify spare parts ordering dimensioning etc A cross reference of drive catalog numbers and their respective frame size is provided in Appendix A General Precautions ATTENTION This drive contains ESD Electrostatic Discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A B publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazar
232. eference Metering 3 7 100 Jog Speed 1 Discrete Speeds 3 22 12 DC Bus Voltage Metering 3 7 101 107 Preset Speed 1 7 Discrete Speeds 3 22 13 DC Bus Memory Metering 38 108 Jog Speed 2 Discrete Speeds 3 22 14 Elapsed kWh Metering 3 8 116 Trim Setpoint Speed Trim 3 22 16 Analog Int Value Metering 3 8 117 Trim In Select Speed Trim 3 22 17 Analog In2 Value Metering 3 8 118 Trim Out Select Speed Trim 3 22 18 PTC HW Value Metering 3 8 119 Trim Hi Speed Trim 3 22 21 Spd Fdbk No Filt Metering 3 8 120 Trim Lo Speed Trim 3 22 22 Ramped Speed Metering 3 8 121 Slip RPM FLA Slip Comp 3 23 23 Speed Reference Metering 3 8 122 Slip Comp Gain Slip Comp 3 23 24 Commanded Torque Metering 3 8 123 Slip RPM Meter Slip Comp 3 23 25 Speed Feedback Metering 3 8 124 PI Configuration Process P 3 23 26 Rated kW Drive Data 3 8 125 PI Control Process P 3 23 27 Rated Volts Drive Data 3 8 126 Pl Reference Sel Process P 3 24 28 Rated Amps Drive Data 3 9 127 PI Setpoint Process P 3 24 29 Control SW Ver Drive Data 3 9 128 PI Feedback Sel Process P 3 24 40 Motor Type Motor Data 3 9 129 PI Integral Time Process P 3 24 41 Motor NP Volts Motor Data 3 9 130 PI Prop Gain Process P 3 24 42 Motor NP FLA Motor Data 3 9 131 PI Lower Limit Process P 3 25 43 Motor NP Hertz Motor Data 3 9 132 PI Upper Limit Process P 3 25 44 Motor NP RPM Motor Data 3 9 133 PI Preload Process P 3 25 45 Motor NP Power Motor Data 3 9 134 PI Status Process P 3 25 46 Mtr NP Pwr Units Motor
233. egative Min Max Max Speed 0 0 Hz direction when in FVC Vector mode Max Speed 0 0 RPM O Used in bipolar mode only A value of Units 0 0 Hz zero disables this parameter and uses 0 0 RPM Maximum Speed for reverse speed limit Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 20 File SPEED COMMAND Speed References Group No 09 O Selects the source of the speed 091 092 093 O See Speed Ref A Sel 094 095 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Speed Ref A Sel o reference to the drive unless Speed Ref B Sel or Preset Speed 1 7 is selected 1 See Appendix B for DPI port locations Speed Ref A Hi Scales the upper value of the Speed Ref A Sel selection when the source is an analog input Speed Ref A Lo Scales the lower value of the Speed Ref A Sel selection when the source is an analog input Speed Ref B Sel Speed Ref B Hi Scales the upper value of the Speed Ref B Sel selection when the source is an analog input Speed Ref B Lo Scales the lower value of the Speed Ref B Sel selection when the source is an analog input Publication 20B UM002D EN P Values Default Options Default Units Default Units Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Min Max Min Max 2 Analog In 2 Analog I
234. ements Encoders must be line driver type quadrature dual channel or pulse single channel 8 15V DC output 4 6V DC when jumpers are in 5V position single ended or differential and capable of supplying a minimum of 10 mA per channel Maximum input frequency is 250 kHz The Encoder nterface Board accepts 12V DC square wave with a minimum high state voltage of 7 0V DC With the jumpers in the 5V position the encoder will accept a 5V DC square wave with a minimum high state voltage of 3 0V DC In either jumper position the maximum low state voltage is 0 4V DC Watts Loss Rated Load Speed amp PWM IP20 NEMA UL Type 1 Frames 0 6 Voltage ND Hp kW External Watts Internal Watts Total Watts Loss 240V 0 5 9 37 46 1 22 39 61 2 38 39 77 3 By 41 98 5 97 82 179 T5 134 74 208 10 192 77 269 15 276 92 368 20 354 82 436 25 602 96 698 30 780 96 876 40 860 107 967 50 1132 138 1270 60 1296 200 1496 75 1716 277 1993 100 1837 418 2255 400V 0 37 11 42 53 0 75 19 44 63 15 31 45 76 2 2 46 46 93 4 78 87 164 55 115 79 194 75 134 84 218 11 226 99 326 15 303 91 394 18 5 339 102 441 22 357 103 459 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Voltage ND Hp kW External Watts Internal Watts Total Watts Loss 400V 30 492 117 610 continued 37 568 148 717 45 722 207 930 55 821 286 1107 55 1130 397 1527 90 1402 443 1845 110 1711 493 2204 132 1930 583
235. emission as well as capacitive currents Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended e PowerFlex drives may cause radio frequency interference if used in a residential or domestic environment The installer is required to take measures to prevent interference in addition to the essential requirements for CE compliance listed below if necessary e Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee an entire machine or installation complies with CE EMC requirements Many factors can influence total machine installation compliance e PowerFlex drives can generate conducted low frequency disturbances harmonic emissions on the AC supply system e When operated on a public supply system it is the responsibility of the installer or user to ensure by consultation with the distribution network operator and Rockwell Automation if necessary that applicable requirements have been met 1 600V class drives below 77A Frames 0 4 are declared to meet the essential requirements of the Low Voltage Directive It is the responsibility of the user to determine compliance to the EMC directive Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 53 Essential Requirements for CE Compliance Conditions 1 6 listed below must be satisfied for PowerFlex drives to meet the requirements of EN61800 3 1 Standard PowerFlex 700 CE compatible Drive 2 Review important precautions attention statements throughout
236. ended that a minimum ratio of 4 1 be maintained Profile Command Control Word The profile indexer is controlled with Pos Spd Prof Cmd parameter 705 The bit definitions are as follows Bit Name Description 0 Start Step0 The binary value of these bits determines which step will be the 1 Start Step 1 Starting step for the profile when a start command is issued If the 2 Start Step 2 value of these bits are not 1 16 the drive will not run since it does not have a valid step to start from Valid Examples 00011 step 3 StartStep3 o 01100 step 12 4 Start Step 4 5 7 Reserved Reserved for future use 8 Hold Step When set this command will inhibit the profile from transitioning to the next step when the condition s required are satisfied When the hold command is released the profile will transition to the next step 9 Pos Redefine This bit is used to set the present position as home When this bit is set Profile Status bit At Home will be set and the Units Traveled will be set to zero 10 Find Home This bit is used to command the find home routine 11 Vel Override When this bit is set the velocity of the present step will be multiplied by the value in Vel Override 12 31 Reserved Reserved for future use The Pos Spd Prof Cmd bits can be set via DPI interface HIM or Comm or digital inputs When digital input s are programmed for Pos Sel 1 5 the starting step of the p
237. er Name amp Description Group Related o e ic 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 161 Bus Reg Mode A Default 1 Adjust Freq 160 162 Bus Reg Mode B 4 Both Frq 1st 163 O Sets the method and sequence of the DC Options 0 Disabled bus regulator voltage Choices are 1 Adjust Freq dynamic brake frequency adjust or both 2 Dynamic Brak Sequence is determined by programming 3 Both DB 1st or digital input to the terminal block 4 Both Frq 1st Dynamic Brake Setup If a dynamic brake resistor is connected to the drive both of these parameters must be set to either option 2 3 or 4 Refer to the Attention statement on page P 4 for important information on bus regulation ATTENTION The drive does not offer protection for externally mounted brake resistors A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected External resistor packages must be self protected from over temperature or the protective circuit shown 3 in Figure C 1 on page C 3 or equivalent must be supplied Oo 163 DB Resistor Type Default 2 None 161 Selects whether the internal or an Options 0 Internal Res 2 external DB resistor will be used 1 External Res 2 2 None a Important In Frame 0 2 drives only one DB resistor can be connected to the drive Connecting both an internal amp external resistor could cause damage If a dynamic brak
238. ere validated 0 break current of the derived power DC Bus Disconnects Allen Bradley Bulletin 1494 30 400A 194 30 400A or ABB OESA 600 amp 800A OESL all sizes Fuses Bussmann Type JKS all sizes Type 170M Case Sizes 1 2 and 3 or Ferraz Shawmut Type HSJ all sizes For any other devices please contact the factory 3 Drives have dual current ratings one for normal duty applications and one for heavy duty applications The drive may be operated at either rating 4 UL Type 12 1P54 flange mount heatsink ambient temperature rating is 40 C ambient of unprotected drive portion inside enclosure is 55 C The ambient temperature for the UL Type 12 1P54 stand alone drives is 40 C Also applies to P voltage class Also applies to J voltage class 7 Must remove top label and vent plate drive enclosure rating will be IP00 NEMA UL Type Open 8 Two 630A Bussmann 170M6608 can also be used Two 700A Bussmann 170M6611 can also be used 10 Bussmann or equivalent 5 6 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 25 Dimensions Figure A3 PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 3 0 Frame Shown A gt 15 0 0 59 gt D 5 8 0 23 dia see below gt Le C si A TW Q WW T wi P EH C B d E M CH gi D O D sag E 1 U gt lt 55 0 22
239. ero Changing Overload Hz 120 OL Hz 10 100 OL Hz 25 gt OL Hz 50 80 a 2 60 z E 40 O 20 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Base Speed Motor NP FLA is multiplied by Motor OL Factor to select the rated current for the motor thermal overload This can be used to raise or lower the level of current that will cause the motor thermal overload to trip The effective overload factor is a combination of Motor OL Hertz and Motor OL Factor Changing Overload Factor 140 OL 1 20 120 OL 1 00 2100 OL 0 80 bd 3 80 2 60 amp 40 20 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Base Speed Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 16 Application Notes Motor Overload Memory Retention Per 2005 NEC Firmware version 4 002 or greater has the ability to retain the motor overload count at power down per the 2005 NEC motor overtemp requirement To Enable Disable this feature refer to the table below Once Enabled the value for Testpoint 1 Sel may be changed Overload Retention Testpoint 1 Sel param 234 Testpoint 1 Data param 235 Enable 629 T Disable 499 1 o Il Default setting Firmware version 6 002 or greater when bit 0 of Motor OL Mode parameter 50 is set to 1 the value of
240. estart the drive In the case of a maintained start remove and reapply the start command In either case the drive should remain stopped and in a fault condition 13 Provide a Fault Reset command to the drive The drive fault should clear The drive should not start even if a maintained start is applied when the fault is reset 14 Provide the command to restart the drive In the case of a maintained start remove and reapply the start command In either case the drive should run normally 15 Stop the drive and disconnect all power from the drive including external control power 16 Disconnect the test switching devices from the two digital inputs 17 Determine a way to interrupt the continuity of the over temperature circuit when it is reconnected to the motor 18 Properly reconnect the motor over temperature contact connection to the drive and include the test mechanism to interrupt the over temperature circuit s continuity This includes both Digital Input 6 terminal 32 and the additional required digital input Reconnect the jumper between the two inputs if one had been in place 19 Reconnect power to the drive including external control power 20 Start drive and confirm that it is operating properly 21 Interrupt the continuity of the over temperature circuit connected to the drive The drive should stop and the motor coast to rest The HIM OIM should indicate that the drive is in an Auxiliary Input fault condition
241. etation a dedicated hardware enable configuration can be utilized This is done by removing a jumper and wiring the enable input to Digital In 6 1 Frames 0 6 Remove the I O Control Cassette amp cover as described on page 1 39 Frames 7 10 Remove HIM support plate to gain access to the Main Control Board 2 Locate amp remove Jumper J10 on the Main Control Board see diagram 3 Re assemble cassette 4 Wire Enable to Digital In 6 see page 1 40 or 1 41 5 Verify that Digital In6 Sel parameter 366 is set to 1 Enable Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 44 Installation Wiring UO Wiring Examples Input Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes Potentiometer e Adjust Scaling Unipolar Speed F Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 Reference D View Results 10k Ohm Pot e Parameter 002 Recommended 0 2k Ohm Minimum Joystick Bipolar O e Set Direction Mode Speed Reference 1 Parameter 190 1 Bipolar 10V Input e Adjust Scaling Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 e View Results Parameter 002 Analog Input e Set Direction Mode Bipolar Speed Parameter 190 1 Bipolar Reference e Adjust Scaling 10V Input Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 e View Results Parameter 002 Analog Voltage e Configu
242. ete 39 Prof Homing 40 Prof Dwell 41 Prof Batch 4257 Prof Step1 16 58 Manual Mode 5 59 Fast Braking 60 TrqPrv Brake 61 Speed Fdbk 5 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Ka OO Ke 4 CO GA Ka CO LO Ka CO M Q IGO CO Ka O e Ka CO IO Io O M Io CO pr e CO Io LE M ek CO KC pr In e CA Eat S jo N ds gt Y l CD CG3 Io E Co ES Ka Y Kai Programming and Parameters 3 61 mo S Parameter Name amp Description S O 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 381 Dig Out Level Default 0 0 380 385 Dig Out2 Level 0 0 389 Dig Out3 Level 0 0 Sets the relay activation level for options Min Max 0 0 819 2 10 15 in Digital Outx Sel Units are Units 0 1 assumed to match the above selection i e At Freq Hz At Torque Amps 382 Dig Outi OnTime Default 0 00 Secs 380 386 Dig Out2 OnTime 0 00 Secs 390 Dig Out3 OnTime Min Max 0 00 600 00 Secs Sets the ON Delay time for the digital Units 0 01 Secs outputs This is the time between the o occurrence of a condition and activation CH lt of the relay a 2 383 Dig Outt OffTime Default 0 00 Secs 380 S 6 1387 Dig Out2 OffTime 0 00 Secs S E 391 Dig Outs OffTime Min Max 0 00 600 00 Secs 2 E Sets the OFF Delay time for the digital Units 0 01 Secs ou
243. etween restart attempts Min Max 0 5 10800 0 Secs when Auto Rstrt Tries is set to a value Units 0 1 Secs other than zero Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters 3 33 Kl o EJ Parameter Name amp Description S O 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 178 Sleep Wake Mode Default 0 Disabled O Enables disables the Sleep Wake Options 0 Disabled function Important When enabled the 1 Direct Enabled O following conditions must be met 2 Invert Enabled 7 e A proper value must be programmed for Sleep Level amp Wake Level e A speed reference must be selected in Speed Ref A Sel e Atleast one of the following must be programmed and input closed in Digital Inx Sel Enable Stop CF Run Run Forward Run Reverse ATTENTION Enabling the Sleep Wake function can cause unexpected machine operation during the Wake mode Equipment damage and or personal injury can result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do Not use this function without considering the information below and in Appendix C In addition all applicable local national amp international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines must be considered Conditions Required to Start Drive 1213 N 3 After Power Up After a Drive Fault After a Stop Command Reset by Stop CF Reset by Clear E Input HIM or
244. ev i i Dig In 18 A digital Start input has been configured without a Stop input or other ConflictB functions are in conflict Combinations that conflict are marked with a a and will cause an alarm Stop Jog Fwd Start CF Run Run Fwd Run Rev 1 2 JogFwd Jog Rev Rev Start Stop CF Run Run Fwd Run Rev Jog 1 2 Jog Fwd Jog Rev Fwd Rev KI du Publication 20B UM002D EN P 4 12 Troubleshooting Alarm Dig In ConflictC Drive OL Level 1 Drive OL Level 2 FluxAmpsRef Rang Ground Warn Home Not Set In Phase Loss IntDBRes OvrHeat IR Volts Range Ixo Vit Rang Load Loss MaxFreq Conflict Motor Thermistor Motor Type Cfict lt o No O Typel Description More than one physical input has been configured to the same input function Multiple configurations are not allowed for the following input functions Forward Reverse Hun Reverse Bus Regulation Mode B Speed Select 1 Jog Forward Acc2 Dec2 Speed Select 2 Jog Reverse Accel 2 Speed Select 3 Run Decel 2 Run Forward Stop Mode B The calculated IGBT temperature requires a reduction in PWM frequency If Drive OL Mode is disabled and the load is not reduced an overload fault will eventually occur The calculated IGBT temperature requires a reduction in Current Limit If Drive OL Mode is di
245. f 152 mm 6 0 in at the top of the enclosure Additionally allow a minimum of 102 mm 4 0 in on each side OR 152 mm 6 0 in in the back AC Supply Source Considerations PowerFlex 700 drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering up to a maximum of 200 000 rms symmetrical amperes damage caused by improper fusing or circuit breaker selection use only ATTENTION To guard against personal injury and or equipment A the recommended line fuses circuit breakers specified in Appendix A If a system ground fault monitor RCD is to be used only Type B adjustable devices should be used to avoid nuisance tripping Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 4 Installation Wiring Unbalanced Ungrounded Resistive or B Phase Grounded Distribution Systems If phase to ground voltage will exceed 125 of normal line to line voltage or the supply system is ungrounded refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES IN001 contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground These devices must be disconnected if the drive is not installed on a solidly grounded system See page 1 24 for details i ATTENTION To guard against drive damage PowerFlex 700 drives Input Power Conditioning Certain events on the power system supplying a drive can cause component damage or shortened product life These conditions are divided into 2 basic categories 1 All drives
246. f ten links is allowed Establishing A Link Key s Example Displays FOR Parameter The parameter value screen will appear Accel Time 1 Accel Time 2 2 Press Enter to edit the parameter The cursor es Besame will move to the value line neo in 0 1 Secs 3 Press ALT and then View Sel Next press ALT O Max 3600 0 Secs the Up or Down Arrow to change Present Value to Define Link Press Enter 4 Enter the Source Parameter Number and press Enter The linked parameter can now be viewed two different ways by repeating steps 1 4 and selecting Present Value or Define Link If an attempt is made to edit the value of a linked parameter Parameter is Linked will be displayed indicating that the value is coming from a source parameter and can not be edited 5 To remove a link repeat steps 1 5 and change the source parameter number to zero 0 6 Press Esc to return to the group list Dit 10 0 Secs Present Value Define Link Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 Link 017 Analog In1 Value Publication 20B UM002D EN P HIM Overview B 8 Table B B Linkable Parameters No Parameter No Parameter No Parameter 54 Maximum Voltage 183 Sleep Time 608 TorqLim SlewRate 58 Flux Up Time 185 Power Los
247. f time 0 1 RPM Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 64 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 603 SpdBand Integrat Default 60 mSec Sets the amount of time before a faultis Min Max 1 200 mSec issued when Spd Dev Band is outside Units 1 mSec its threshold 604 Brk Release Time Default 0 10 Secs Sets the time between the brake release Min Max 0 00 10 00 Secs command and when the drive begins to Units 0 01 Secs accelerate In Encoderless mode this parameter sets the time to release the brake after drive starts 605 ZeroSpdFloatTime Default 5 0 Secs Sets the amount of time the drive is Min Max 0 1 500 0 Secs below Float Tolerance before the brake Units 0 1 Secs is set Not used in Encoderless TorgProve mode Group File No g Related NO 606 Float Tolerance Default 0 2 Hz Sets the frequency level where the float 6 0 RPM timer starts Also sets the frequency level Min Max 0 1 5 0 Hz where the brake will be closed in 3 0 150 0 RPM Encoderless TorqProve mode Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM gt 607 Brk Set Time Default 0 10 Secs 3 Defines the amount of delay time Min Max 0 00 10 00 Secs between commanding the brake to be set Units 0 01 Secs E and the start of brake proving S 608 TorqLim SlewRate Default 10 0 Secs Sets the rate to ramp the torque limits to Min Max 0 5 300 0 S
248. fe MW HR Fract 2 1 0 4294967295 0 10 MW HR Frac Unit 2 1 0 4294967295 0 11 MCB Life Time 0 0001 Hrs 0 214748 3647 0 12 Raw Analog In 1 1 0 0 13 Raw Analog In 2 1 0 0 16 CS Msg Rx Cnt 1 0 65535 0 17 CS Msg Tx Cnt 1 0 65535 0 18 CS Timeout Cnt 1 0 255 0 19 CS Msg Bad Cnt 1 0 255 0 22 PC Msg Rx Cnt 1 0 65535 0 23 PC Msg Tx Cnt 1 0 65535 0 24 29 PC1 6 Timeout Cnt 1 0 255 0 30 CAN BusOff Cnt 1 0 65535 0 31 No of Analog Inputs 1 0 X 0 32 Raw Temperature 1 0 65535 0 33 MTO Norm Mtr Amp 0 1 Amps 0 65535 0 34 DTO Cmd Frequency 1 0 420 0 35 DTO Cmd Cur Lim 0 1 0 0 36 DTO Cmd DC Hold 1 0 32767 0 37 Control Bd Temp 0 1 0 0 60 0 0 0 629 Motor OL Count 1 Enter in Testpoint x Sel 2 Use the equation below to calculate total Lifetime MegaWatt Hours Value of Code 9 Value of Code 10 Publication 20B UM002D EN P x 0 1 Value of Code 5 Total Lifetime MegaWatt Hours Appendix A Supplemental Drive Information For information on See page Specifications A 1 Communication Configurations A 6 Output Devices A 9 Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings A 9 Dimensions A 25 Specifications Frames 0 4 Category 230 480V 600V 5 6 7 10 Specification Agency VW viv vw Listed to UL508C and CAN CSA C22 2 No 14 05 Listings o US Packaged drives may be listed to UL508A Certification or Tests VW viv vw A EC Type Examination Ce
249. feedback Note that all selections are 1 Slip Comp S a available when using Process PI 2 Reserved oF Open Loop 0 no encoder is present 3 Encoder WK and slip compensation is not needed 4 Reserved oi Slip Comp 1 tight speed control is 5 Simulator needed and encoder is not present Encoder 3 an encoder is present Simulator 5 Simulates a motor for testing drive operation amp interface check 081 Minimum Speed Default 0 0 079 O Sets the low limit for speed reference Min Max 0 0 Maximum Speed after scaling is applied Refer to Units 0 1 Hz peas parameter 083 Overspeed Limit 0 1 RPM 095 082 Maximum Speed Default 50 0 or 60 0 Hz volt class 055 Gen Sets the high limit for speed reference Motor NF AEM G after scaling is applied Refer to Min Max 5 0 400 0 Hz 091 parameter 083 Overspeed Limit 75 0 24000 0 RPM or Units 0 1 Hz 094 202 0 1 RPM Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 18 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Related Group File No 083 Overspeed Limit Default 10 0 Hz 055 O Sets the incremental amount of the 300 0 RPM output frequency above Maximum Min Max 0 0 20 0 Hz Speed allowable for functions such as 0 0 600 0 RPM slip compensation Units 0 1 Hz O Maximum Speed Overspeed Limit 0 1 RPM must be lt Maximum Fre
250. fications Wire Size Range Torque No Name Frames Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended O lO Cassette 0 6 Removable I O Cassette I O Terminal 0 6 Signal amp control 2 5mm2 020 mm 0 6 Nam 0 6 Nem Block connections 14 AWG 22 AWG 5 3 Ibein 5 3 bein 7 10 4 0mm 0 049mm2 0 6Nem 0 6 Nem 12 AWG 30 AWG 5 3 bein 5 3 Ibein Encoder 0 10 Encoder power amp 0 75 mm 0 196mm 0 6Nem 0 6 Nem Terminal Block signal connections 18 AWG 24 AWG 5 3 lbein 5 3 Ibein UI Maximum minimum that the terminal block will accept these are not recommendations Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 40 Installation Wiring 4 6 6 Table 1 H I O Terminal Designations Frames 0 6 Description 1 Analog In 1 GU 2 Isolated bipolar differential 10V 0 20 320 2 Analog In 1 mA 11 bit 8 sign For 0 20 mA a jumper 327 3 Analog In 2 90 must be installed at terminals 17 amp 18 or 4 Analog In 2 19 amp 20 88k ohm input impedance when configured for volt amp 95 3 ohm for current 5 Pot Common For and 10V pot references 6 Analog Out 1 2 Single ended bipolar current outputis 340 7 Analog Out 1 not bipolar 10V 0 20mA 11 bit amp sign 347 8 Analog
251. g Flange Mount 61 69 136 0 81 65 180 0 1 Weights include HIM and Standard 1 0 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 35 Figure A 10 Frame 5 Flange Mount Cutout 4 00 0 157 Dia Holes 40 Places in Minimum 14 GA 1 9 Steel Mounting Surface Deburr Pilot Holes 10 0 y Le 458 0 sl and Drive Cutout 0 39 18 03 1039 0 40 91 In A de A D 1026 5 40 41 kal 948 5 37 34 A 870 5 34 27 Ba A 792 5 31 20 A Cutout S 714 5 28 13 1019 0 D R 40 12 636 5 25 06 E A 558 5 21 99 480 5 18 92 L ke 402 5 15 85 ha 324 5 12 78 Si 246 5 9 71 i 168 5 6 63 kal 90 5 3 56 y YYYYYYYYYY y 12 5 0 49 59 0 2 32 131 0 5 16 203 0 7 99 275 0 10 83 he gt 347 0 13 66 419 0 16 50 478 0 18 82 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 36 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 11 Frame 6 NEMA UL Type 12 Standalone 400 690V drives only L 711 3 28 00 4 24 1 0 90 gt gt 663 1 26 10 123 6 4 90 gt D L T N a R e 0 1828 8 e 72 00 A 1795 2 70 70 1279 5 50 40
252. g input 1 RPM Trim Lo Default 0 0 Hz Scales the lower value of the Trim In Min Max Maximum Speed Select selection when the source is an Units 0 1 Hz analog input Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 RPM Related j Z CO KC Ga Kal O IO CH I gt O G Kak kak Co I gt O IO I gt O CO S x m kak Kal et ba CH KC Ga Kal Io CO InN x Ee Kal E x Programming and Parameters 3 23 Kl Parameter Name amp Description S 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions E Important Parameters in the Slip Comp Group are used to enable and tune the Slip Compensation Regulator In order to allow the regulator to control drive operation parameter 080 Speed Mode must be set to 1 Slip Comp 121 Slip RPM FLA Default Based on Motor NP RPM 061 Sets the amount of compensation to Min Max 0 0 1200 0 RPM os drive output at motor FLA Units 0 1 RPM 123 If the value of parameter 061 Autotune a 3 Calculate changes made to this 8 parameter will not be accepted 2 Value may be changed by Autotune 2 when Encoder is selected in Feedback Select parameter 080 122 Slip Comp Gain Default 40 0 080 Sets the response time of slip Min Max 1 0 100 0 compensation Units 0 1 123 Slip RPM Meter Defaul
253. ge Drop Ixo Voltage Drop Flux Current Ref and Slip RPM FLA 062 IR Voltage Drop Default Based on Drive Rating 053 Value of voltage drop across the resis Min Max 0 0 Motor NP Volts x0 25 061 tance of the motor stator at rated motor Units 0 1 VAC current Used only when parameter 53 is set to Sensrls Vect SV Economize or FVC Vector 063 Flux Current Ref Default Based on Drive Rating 053 Value of amps for full motor flux Used Min Max 0 00 Motor NP FLA 061 only when parameter 53 is set to Sensrls Units 0 01 Amps Vect SV Economize or FVC Vector Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters 3 13 no a S Parameter Name amp Description o 2 se page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 064 Ixo Voltage Drop Default Based on Drive Rating O Value of voltage drop across the leakage Min Max 0 0 230 0 480 0 575 VAC inductance of the motor at rated motor Units 0 1 VAC current Used only when parameter 53 is set to Sensrls Vect SV Economize or FVC Vector 066 Autotune Torque Default 50 0 053 O Specifies motor torque applied to the Min Max 0 0 150 0 motor during the flux current and inertia Units 0 1 tests performed during an autotune 067 Inertia Autotune Default 0 Ready 053 O Provides an automatic method of setting Options 0 Ready 450 Total Inertia This test is automatically 1
254. ges 1 27 through 1 37 Important Frame 0 6 drives contain common mode capacitors which must be connected jumper installed in order to conform with the EMC directive Additionally MOVs are required to meet UL certification Removing these devices will withdraw the associated directive In addition on an ungrounded distribution system where the line to ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125 of the nominal line to line voltage an isolation transformer should be installed See Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES IN001 for more information on impedance grounded and ungrounded systems Jumper Installation Removal and Storage PowerFlex 700 drives utilize plug in style jumpers and jumper wires Most drives will have a jumper storage area inside the front cover Extra jumpers or jumpers that have been removed should be stored in this location for use at a later time Insulating Jumper Wires Some drives utilize nylon screws and spacers to insulate jumper wires from ground and secure them to the chassis The components must be installed as shown Drive Identification Refer to the drive nameplate and locate the Voltage Code Current Rating Frame Series and UL Type Frames 5 6 Use this information to locate the proper procedure in the following tables Publication 20B UM002D EN P Voltage Code UL Type Series Current Rating Caf
255. gn of Step x Value gt lt determines when to transition Step x Next and compares Step x Dwell to the value specified by the parameter number in Step x Value POS SPD PROFILE Profile Step 1 16 The following step types use the point to point position regulator Encoder Incr 4 drive ramps to Step x Velocity holds speed then ramps to zero at encoder position defined by Step x Value within position tolerance window Encoder Abs 6 drive ramps to Step x Velocity in direction required holds speed then ramps to zero at position within tolerance window End Hold Pos 7 drive holds last position for Step x Dwell time then stops The drive must have Direction Mode set to Bipolar for the position regulator to function properly Current Torque and Regen Power Limits must be set so as not to limit the programmed deceleration time If one of the limits occur the position regulator may overshoot the position set point Sleep Mode must be turned off Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 72 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 721 Step 1 Velocity Default 0 0 731 Step 2 Velocity 741 Step 3 Velocity 751 Step 4 Velocity 761 Step 5 Velocity 771 Step 6 Velocity 781 Step 7 Velocity 791 Step 8 Velocity 801 Step 9 Velocity 811 Step 10 Velocity 821
256. greater than zero DC braking can be applied to a spinning motor that will provide more braking torque without causing the drive to regenerate 1 On Stop the drive output will decrease based on the motor speed keeping the motor out of the regen region This is accomplished by lowering the output frequency below the motor speed where regeneration will not occur This causes excess energy to be lost in the motor 2 The method uses a PI based bus regulator to regulate the bus voltage to a reference e g 750V by automatically decreasing output frequency at the proper rate 3 When the frequency is decreased to a point where the motor no longer causes the bus voltage to increase the frequency is forced to zero DC brake will be used to complete the stop if the DC Braking Time is non zero then the output is shut off 4 Use of the current regulator ensures that over current trips don t occur and allow for an easily adjustable and controllable level of braking torque 5 Use of the bus voltage regulator results in a smooth continuous control of the frequency and forces the maximum allowable braking torque to be utilized at all times 6 Important For this feature to function properly the active Bus Reg Mode A or B must be set to Adjust Freq and NOT be Disabled Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 44 Application Notes Test Example for Fast Braking Tek Run 250 S s Sample REE 7 F T T d WS D Bus Voltage ER
257. he input line voltage to the internal voltage used for the capacitor fan and phase detector module If the line voltage is different than the voltage class specified on the drive nameplate it may be necessary to change transformer taps as shown Frame 9 drives use a single phase capacitor bank fan and a three phase blower for cooling Proper phasing must be supplied to terminals R S and T of the Power Terminal Block AC drives or the Blower Terminal Block DC drives to assure correct blower rotation To verify this a Phase Monitor see page 1 18 for location is used When wiring is complete apply drive power If phasing is correct a solid triangle will be displayed on the Phase Monitor A Vas If the blower does not operate L1 L2 L3 C or 1 Remove all input power and wait 5 Fana minutes for the DC bus to discharge Verify that the DC bus has discharged by measuring across the and DC bus terminals The reading must be less than 50 volts 2 Verify blower fuses and replace if necessary Switch any two input power leads at the top of the blower fuse block 4 Apply power and verify proper operation Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 13 Frame 10 Fan Connections Drive Rating No of Type Enclosure 120VAC Fans Connect at DC IPOO NEMA 1000 VA 2 TB9 amp 10 Input UL Type Open Requires user supplied 120V AC See page IP20 NEMA 1000 VA 2 1 20 for TB loca
258. hed for Flux Up Time before acceleration 058 Flux Up Time Default 0 000 Secs 053 Sets the amount of time the drive will use Min Max 0 000 5 000 Secs 058 to try and achieve full motor stator flux Units 0 001 Secs When a Start command is issued DC current at current limit level is used to build stator flux before accelerating Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 12 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 059 SV Boost Filter Default 500 Sets the amount of filtering used to boost Min Max 0 32767 voltage during Sensorless Vector and Units 1 FVC Vector encoderless operation Group Related File No 061 Autotune Default 3 Calculate 053 O Provides a manual or automatic method Options 0 Ready 062 for setting IR Voltage Drop Flux 1 Static Tune Current Ref and Ixo Voltage Drop Valid 2 Rotate Tune only when parameter 53 is set to Sensrls 3 Calculate Vect SV Economize or FVC Vector Ready 0 Parameter returns to this setting following a Static Tune or Rotate Tune It also permits manually setting IR Voltage Drop Ixo Voltage Drop and Flux Current Ref Static Tune 1 A temporary command that initiates a non rotational motor stator resistance test for the best possible automatic setting of IR Voltage Drop in all valid modes and a non
259. hielded pair 3 9892 is 3 individually shielded pairs 3 channel 0 33 mm 22 AWG 1 shielded pair 0 5 mm 20 AWG for power Hl 9773 is 3 individually shielded pairs 2 channel power If 3 channel is required use 9774 5 If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits the use of shielded wire may not be necessary but is always recommended Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 39 Table 1 F Recommended Control Wire for Digital I O Min Insulation Type Wire Type s Description Rating Unshielded Per US NEC or applicable national or local code 300V Shielded Multi conductor shielded cable such as Belden 0 750 mm 18AWG 60 C 8770 or equiv 3 conductor shielded 140 F The I O Control Cassette Frames 0 6 Figure 1 7 shows the I O Control Cassette and terminal block locations The cassette provides a mounting point for the various PowerFlex 700 T O options To remove the cassette follow the steps below Cassette removal will be similar for all frames Frame 0 drive shown Step Description Disconnect the two cable connectors shown below _ Loosen the two screw latches shown below Slide the cassette out D Remove screws securing cassette cover to gain access to the boards Figure 1 7 PowerFlex 700 Cassette amp I O Terminal Blocks Frames 0 6 UO Terminal Blocks Table 1 G 1 0 Terminal Block Speci
260. iagnostics Drive Status 1 2 209 210 Dig Out Status 217 Status 1 2 Fault 227 228 Drive Status 36x 222 Drive Temp 218 Status 3 Fault x 223 Drive Alarm 1 2 211 212 Drive OL Count 219 Alarm 1 2 Fault 229 230 Speed Ref Source 213 Motor OL Count 220 Testpoint 1 2 Sel 234 236 Start Inhibits 214 Fault Speed 224 Testpoint 1 2 Data 235 237 Last Stop Source 215 Fault Amps 225 Mtr OL Trip Time 221 Dig In Status 216 Fault Bus Volts 226 Faults Fault Config 1 238 Fault Clear Mode 241 Fault 1 8 Code 243 257 Fault Clear 240 Power Up Marker 242 Fault 1 8 Time 244 258 Alarms Alarm Config 1 259 Alarm Clear 261 Alarm1 8 Code 262 269 Scaled Blocks Scale1 2InVal 476 482 Scalet 2OutLo 480 486 Scale3 4 In Lo 490 496 Scale1 2 In Hi 477 483 Scale1 2 Out Val 481 487 Scale3 A Out H 491 497 Scale1 2 In Lo 478 484 Scale3 4 ln Val 488 494 Scale3 4 OutLo 492 488 Scale1 2 Out Hi 479 485 Scale3 4 In Hi 489 495 Scale3 4 Out Val 493 499 Communication Comm Control DPI Baud Rate 270 Drive Ramp Deh 272 DPI Ref Select 298 Drive Logic Pet 271 DPI Port Sel 274 DPI Fdbk Select 299 Drive Ref Det 272 DPI Port Value 275 Masks 8 Owners Logic Mask 276 Fault Clr Mask 283 Reference Owner 292 Start Mask 277 MOP Mask 284 Accel Owner 293 Jog Mask 278 Local Mask 285 Decel Owner 294 Direction Mask 279 Stop Owner 288 Fault Clr Owner 295 Reference Mask 280 Start Owner 289 MOP Owner 296 Accel Mask 281 Jog Owner 290 Local Owner 297 Decel Mask 282 Direction Owner 291 Datalinks Data In A1 D2 300 30
261. idth Modulated PWM AC DRIVES IN001 Drives Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Drive System Equipment DRIVES TD001 Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of SGI 1 1 Solid State Control A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 100 2 10 Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000 4 5 2 To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative To locate your local Rockwell Automation distributor visit www rockwellautomation com locations Use the contacts below for PowerFlex 700 technical support Online at By Email at By Telephone at www ab com support abdrives support drives ra rockwell com 262 512 8176 Manual Conventions e In this manual we refer to the PowerFlex 700 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive as drive PowerFlex 700 or PowerFlex 700 Drive e To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text the following conventions will be used Parameter Names will appear in brackets For example DC Bus Voltage Display Text will appear in quotes For example Enabled e The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action Word Meaning Can Possible able to do something Cannot Not possible not able to do something May Permitted allowed Must Unavoidable you must do this Shall Requir
262. in Max DPI reference for peer to peer Units communications The value shown is the value prior to the accel decel ramp and the corrections supplied by slip comp PI etc 273 Drive Ramp Rslt Default Present frequency reference scaled as a Min Max DPI reference for peer to peer Units communications The value shown is the value after the accel decel ramp but prior to any corrections supplied by slip comp Pl etc Related 1 500 kbps 0 125 kbps 1 500 kbps Read Only 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved Read Only 2147483647 1 Read Only 2147483647 1 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 50 File COMMUNICATION Group No Comm Control Masks amp Owners Programming and Parameters 274 275 298 299 276 277 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values DPI Port Sel Default DPI Port 1 Selects which DPI port reference value Options 1 5 DPI Port 1 5 will appear in DPI Port Value DPI Port Value Default Read Only Value of the DPI reference selectedin Min Max 32767 DPI Port Sel Units 1 DPI Ref Select Default D Max Freq Scales DPI on maximum frequency or Options 0 Max Freq maximum speed 1 Max Speed DPI Fdbk Select Default 17 Speed Fdbk 2 Selects the DPI units displayed on the Options 0 Output Freq first line of the HIM and
263. inals can cause signal noise driving it from a voltage source could cause component damage Verify ATTENTION Configuring an analog input for 0 20mA operation and A proper configuration prior to applying input signals when using bipolar input sources Noise and drift in sensitive input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motor speed and direction Use speed command parameters to help reduce input source sensitivity ATTENTION Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage exists Signal and Control Wire Types Table 1 E Recommended Signal Wire Signal Type Belden Wire Type s Min Insulation Where Used or equivalent Description Rating Analog I O A PTC 8760 9460 0 750 mm 18AWG twisted pair 100 300V shield with drain 75 90 C Remote Pot 8770 0 750 mm2 18AWG 3 cond shielded 167 194 F Encoder Pulse UO Combined 97300 0 196 mm 24 AWG individually lt 30 m 100 ft shielded Encoder Pulse I O Signal 9730 9728 1 0 196 mm 24AWG indiv shielded 30 to 152 m Power 87902 0 750 mm 18AWG 100 to 500 ft Combined 9892 0 330 mm or 0 500 mm Encoder Pulse WO Signal 9730 9728 1 0 196 mm2 24AWG indiv shielded 152 to 259 m Power 87902 0 750 mm 18AWG 500 to 850 ft Combined 9773 9774 0 750 mm2 18AWG indiv shielded pair 1 9780 is 3 individually shielded pairs 2 channel power If 3 channel is required use 9728 2 8790 is 1 s
264. ing and Parameters 3 37 no o S Parameter Name A Description o 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 196 Param Access Lvl Default 0 Basic Selects the parameter display level Options 0 Basic viewable on the HIM 1 Advanced e Basic Reduced parameter set 2 Reserved e Advanced Full parameter set e Reserved Full parameter set and Engineering parameters refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual This parameter is not reset when Reset to Defaults is selected 197 Reset To Defalts Default 0 Ready 041 Resets parameters to factory defaults Options 0 Ready thru except Mtr NP Pwr Units Speed Units 1 Factory 047 Param Access Lvl Language Voltage 2 Low Voltage 054 Class amp TorqProve Cnfg params 46 3 High Voltage 055 79 196 201 202 amp 600 062 e Option 1 resets parameters to factory 063 defaults based on Voltage Class ra e Options 2 amp 3 will set Voltage Class a to low or high settings and reset 082 parameters to corresponding factory 148 defaults 158 gt Important Frames 5 amp 6 the internal WE S fan voltage may have to be changed E when using Option 2 or 3 See Selecting g Verifying Fan Voltage on page 1 14 6 1198 Load Frm Uer Set Default D Ready 199 O Loads a previously saved set of Options 0 Ready parameter values from a selected user 1 User Set 1 set location in drive non
265. ion 20B UM002D EN P C 4 Application Notes Lifting Torque Proving The TorqProve feature of the PowerFlex 700 is intended for applications where proper coordination between motor control and a mechanical brake is required Prior to releasing a mechanical brake the drive will check motor output phase continuity and verify proper motor control torque proving The drive will also verify that the mechanical brake has control of the load prior to releasing drive control brake proving After the drive sets the brake motor movement is monitored to ensure the brakes ability to hold the load TorqProve can be operated with an encoder or encoderless TorqProve functionality with an encoder includes e Torque Proving includes flux up and last torque measurement e Brake Proving e Brake Slip feature slowly lowers load if brake slips fails e Float Capability ability to hold full torque at zero speed e Micro Positioning e Fast Stop e Speed Deviation Fault Output Phase Loss Fault Encoder Loss Fault Encoderless TorqProve functionality includes e Torque Proving includes flux up and last torque measurement e Brake Proving e Micro Positioning e Fast Stop e Speed Deviation Fault Output Phase Loss Fault Important Brake Slip detection and Float capability ability to hold load at zero speed are not available in encoderless TorqProve cause personal injury and or equipment damage Loads must always be controlled by the driv
266. ion Descriptions Enable Enables TorqProve features Encoderless Enables encoderless operation bit 0 must also be enabled MicroPosSel A 1 allows the Micro Position digital input to change the speed command while the drive is running Preload Sel 0 uses the last torque for preload 1 uses TorqRef A if commanded direction is forward and TorqRef B for reverse Load Spd Lim Enables drive to perform load calculation at base speed Drive will then limit operation above base speed depending on load NoEnclsBkSlp A 1 Disables the partial Brake Slip routine from the drive when encoderless is selected StoppedBkSlp Check for brake slip while stopped Test Brake Before releasing brake test for slip using Brake Test Torque Fast Stop Bk Immediately apply brake when a Fast Stop is initiated TorqProve Setup Allows control of specific torque proving functions through a communication device Torque Proving 60 x x x x x x x 0 0 Res 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 10 Disable N x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values 602 Spd Dev Band Default 2 0 Hz 603 Defines the allowable difference between 60 0 RPM the commanded frequency and encoder Min Max 0 1 15 0 Hz colx lt Y x Dm ax ax K Co feedback value A fault will occur when 3 0 450 0 RPM the difference exceeds this value fora Units 0 1 Hz period o
267. ion Test 3 Set the following parameters as shown No Name Value Notes 053 Motor Cntl Sel _ 0 Sensrls Vect 080 Feedback Select 0 Open Loop 090 Speed Ref A Sel 11 Preset Spd1 238 Fault Config 1 Bit 8 In PhaseLoss 1 Bit 12 OutPhaseLoss 1 380 Digital Out Sel 4 Run releases brake Important If the direction of travel is critical at this point perform short jogs to determine which run direction RUNFWD or RUNREV should be used in the next steps direction of motor rotation If rotation is not in the desired direction Press Start and run the drive in the desired direction Observe the remove drive power and reverse the two motor leads or set bit 5 of Compensation parameter 56 to Mtr Lead Rev With the drive running observe Encoder Speed parameter 415 If the sign of the encoder is not the same as the displayed frequency remove drive power and reverse encoder leads A and A NOT With the drive running verify correct motor rotation and encoder direction Set Motor Fdbk Type parameter 412 to 1 Quad Check Stop the drive Rotate AutoTune Test The motor will be run for 12 seconds at base frequency 60 Hz ATTENTION In this test the following conditions will occur e Note that equipment travel during this 12 second interval may exceed equipment limits However travel distance can be reduced by setting Maximum Spee
268. ion and for most multi motor applications Torque production is generally good Sensorless Vector This technology combines the basic Volts Hertz concept with known motor parameters such as Rated FLA Hp Voltage stator resistance and flux producing current Knowledge of the individual motor attached to the drive allows the drive to adjust the output pattern to the motor and load conditions By identifying motor parameters the drive can maximize the torque produced in the motor and extend the speed range at which that torque can be produced This technology is excellent for applications that require a wider speed range and applications that need maximum possible torque for breakaway acceleration or overload Centrifuges extruders conveyors and others are candidates Torque Controllers Vector This technology differs from the two above because it actually controls or regulates torque Rather than allowing the motor and load to actually determine the amount of torque produced Vector technology allows the drive to regulate the torque to a defined value By independently identifying and controlling both flux and torque currents in the motor true control of torque is achieved High bandwidth current regulators remain active with or without encoder feedback to produce outstanding results This technology is excellent for those applications where torque control rather than mere torque production is key to the success of the process Thes
269. ion that may be limiting either the current or the torque reference SVS A V Y NY AS Se PEL 1 Condition True 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 de pits 1413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 54 3210 e Bit Y OANA AJANIN SJA SS SE 1 Condition True X X X x x x x x x x x 0 0 O 0 0 A e p 81 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 er False Bit 441 Mtr Tor Cur Ref Default Read Only 053 Displays the torque current reference Min Max 32767 0 Amps value that is present at the output of the Units 0 01 Amps current rate limiter parameter 154 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 15 Programming and Parameters 3 no Parameter Name amp Description 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 069 Start Acc Boost Default Based on Drive Rating 053 Sets the voltage boost level for starting Min Max 0 0 Motor NP Volts x 0 25 070 and acceleration when Custom V Hz Units 0 1 VAC mode is selected Refer to parameter 083 Overspeed Limit 070 Run Boost Default Based on Drive Rating 053 Sets the boost level for steady state or Min Max 0 0 Motor NP Volts x 0 25 069 deceleration when Fan Pmp V Hz or Units 0 1 VAC Custom V Hz modes are selected See parameter 083 Overspeed Limit 071 Break Voltage Default Motor NP Volts x 0 25 053 Sets the voltage the drive will output at Min Max 0 0 Motor NP Volts 072 Break Frequency Refer to parameter Units 0 1 VAC 08
270. ire from PE and insulate secure it to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components Important Do Not Remove Disconnect the larger green yellow wire 2 MOV Input Filter Cap jumper wires should be insulated from ground If necessary remove the jumper wires from PE and individually insulate secure them to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components AC input drives only MOV s and input filter caps do not exist on DC input drives When removing MOV s the input filter capacitor must also be removed Mov 1 2 a Frame Voltage Code Current Rating All All A green yellow wire connected to Power Terminal Block PE Power Source Type Solid Ground Publication 20B UM002D EN P e The green yellow MOV jumper wire should be connected to PE Non Solid Ground e The green yellow MOV jumper wire should be insulated from ground If necessary remove the wire from PE and insulate secure it to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components Installation Wiring 1 37 Factory Default Jumper Settings Mov 2 Frame Voltage Code Current Rating Power Source Type Al A green yellow wire connected to the Solid Ground PE bus bar 8 9 All e The green yellow MOV jumper wire should be connected to PE MOV under
271. is selected voltage control is independent from frequency control The voltage and frequency components have independent references and accel decel rates Typical applications include non motor loads or power supplies Fan Pmp V Hz FVC Vector 0 0 1 2 Custom V Hz 3 4 5 Adj Voltage Torq Attributes Important FVC Vector mode requires autotuning of the motor Being coupled to the load will determine inertia preferably lightly loaded Total Inertia parameter 450 will have to be estimated if uncoupled for tuning of the speed loop or separately adjust Ki and Kp parameters 445 amp 446 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters 3 11 S 3 a a l Parameter Name A Description T G CU iL O Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 054 Maximum Voltage Default Drive Rated Volts 202 Sets the highest voltage the drive will Min Max Rated Volts x 0 25 Rated output Based on Voltage Class Volts parameter 202 Units 0 1 VAC 055 Maximum Freq Default 110 0 or 130 0 Hz 083 O Sets the highest frequency the drive will Min Max 5 0 420 0 Hz 202 output Based on Voltage Class Units 0 1 Hz parameter 202 Also refer to Overspeed Limit parameter 083 056 Compensation Enables disables correction options Q k Z AAA S S V ES ISS IS Ss SES ASES OILY NESNE 0 1 4 0114 1 Enabled O x 0 0 Disabled 8 21
272. l Time 1 142 S Curve 146 Accel Time 2 141 Decel Time 2 143 Load Limits Current Lmt Sel 147 Current Lmt Val 148 Stop Brake Stop Brk Mode A 155 DC Brk Lvl Sel 157 Bus Reg Mode A 161 Modes Stop Brk Mode B 156 DC Brake Level 158 Bus Reg Mode B 162 DC Brake Time 159 DB Resistor Type 163 Restart Modes Start At PowerUp 168 Auto Rstrt Tries 174 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 Power Loss Power Loss Mode 184 Power Loss Time 185 Power Loss Level 186 Direction Config Direction Mode 190 Drive Memory Param Access Lvl 196 Load Frm Usr Set 198 Language 201 Reset To Defalts 197 Save To User Set 199 Diagnostics Start Inhibits 214 Dig In Status 216 Dig Out Status 217 Faults Fault Config 1 238 Alarms Alarm Config 1 259 Analog Inputs Anlg In Config 320 Analog In2 Hi 325 Analog Int Hi 322 Analog In2 Lo 326 Analog Int Lo 323 Analog Outputs Analog Out 2 Sel 342 Analog Outt 2Lo 344 Analog Out2 Hi 346 Analog Out Hi 343 Analog Out1 2 Sel 345 Analog Outi 2Lo 347 Digital Inputs Digital In1 6 Sel 361 366 Digital Outputs Digital Out 3 Sel 380 388 Dig Out1 3 Level 381 389 These parameters will only be displayed when parameter 053 Motor Cntl Sel is set to option 2 or 3 These parameters will only be displayed when parameter 053 Motor Cntl Sel is set to option 4 6 x Firmware version 6 002 and later Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters 3 5 Advanced Parameter View Parameter 196 Param Access Lvl set to option 1 Advanced Fil
273. l voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the Publication 20B UM002D EN P Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors D 5 Preparation 1 Disconnect all power from the drive including control power if supplied Disconnect the motor from the driven load if necessary to run this test Disconnect the motor over temperature contact connections from the drive This includes both Digital Input 6 terminal 32 and the additional required input typically Digital Input 5 terminal 31 Remove the jumper between the two inputs if one is in place Connect a means to open and close a N C contact between Digital Input 6 terminal 32 and input common Connect a separate means to open and close a N C contact between the additional input typically Digital Input 5 terminal 31 and input common see Figure D 3 The switching devices pushbutton relay etc must have contacts rated for either the 24V DC or 115V AC input circuit whichever was supplied with the drive Figure D 3 Example Test Circuit External Power Supply Internal 24V Power Supply Zoe 115V ommon 24V s 24 24V DC Zi B 25 F 25 Digital In Common 26 ere C d 22 22 Digital Input 6 Digital Input 6 5 Vo
274. lemental Drive Information Figure A 2 Logic Status Word Logic Bits 15 14 131121110987 6 5 4 Status Description Ready 0 Not Ready 1 Ready Active 0 Not Active 1 Active Command 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward Actual 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward X Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating X Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating X Alarm 0 No Alarm 1 Alarm X Fault 0 No Fault 1 Fault D At Speed 0 Not At Reference 1 At Reference x x x Local 000 Port 0 TB Controll 001 Port 1 010 Port 2 011 Port 3 100 Port 4 101 Port 5 110 Reserved 111 No Local X X X X Reference 0000 Ref A Auto Source 0001 Ref B Auto 1 See Owners on page 3 50 for further information Publication 20B UM002D EN P 0010 Preset 2 Auto 0011 Preset 3 Auto 0100 Preset 4 Auto 0101 Preset 5 Auto 0110 Preset 6 Auto 0111 Preset 7 Auto 1000 Term Blk Manual 1001 DPI 1 Manual 1010 DPI 2 Manual 1011 DPI 3 Manual 1100 DPI 4 Manual 1101 DPI 5 Manual 1110 Reserved 1111 Jog Ref Supplemental Drive Information A 9 Output Devices Common mode cores are internal to the drive For information on output contactors see page 1 23 Other devices such as cable terminators and output reactors are discussed in the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines manual publication DRIVES INO01 Drive F
275. lid start command 285 290 Jog Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapters that are presently issuing a oe valid jog command Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 52 Programming and Parameters no Parameter Name A Description 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 291 Direction Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapter that currently has exclusive thru control of direction changes 285 292 Reference Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapter that has the exclusive control of thru the command frequency source 288 selection 293 Accel Owner See Stop Owner 140 Adapter that has exclusive control of 216 selecting Accel Time 1 2 thru 285 294 Decel Owner See Stop Owner 142 S Adapter that has exclusive control of SB selecting Decel Time 1 2 thru S 285 295 Fault Clr Owner See Stop Owner 276 S Adapter that is presently clearing a fault thru p IS p y ing 285 296 MOP Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapters that are currently issuing thru a increases or decreases in MOP 3 command frequency E 297 Local Owner See Stop Owner 276 2 Adapter that has requested exclusive thru 2 control of all drive logic functions If an 285 adapter is in local lockout all other 8 functions except stop on all other adapters are locked out and non functional Local control can only be obtained when the drive is not running 300 Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Default 0 0
276. lt 1 Speed Reg 053 Selects the torque reference source Options 0 Zero Torque Zero Torque 0 torque command 0 1 Speed Reg Speed Reg 1 drive operates as a F e aa D speed regulator RE a 8 4 Max Torq Spd Torque Reg 2 an external torque 5 SumTorq Spd reference is used for the torque 6 Absolute Min command 7 Pos Spd Prof Min Torq Spa 3 selects the smallest algebraic value to regulate to when the torque reference and torque generated from the speed regulator are compared Max Torq Spd 4 selects the largest algebraic value when the torque reference and the torque generated from the speed regulator are compared Sum Torq Spd 5 selects the sum of the torque reference and the torque generated from the speed regulator Absolute Min 6 selects the smallest absolute algebraic value to regulate to when the torque reference and torque generated from the speed regulator are compared Pos Spd Prof 7 drive operates as a speed or position regulator as determined by the Profile Step parameters 720 877 and Setup parameters 705 719 SPEED COMMAND Spd Mode amp Limits ATTENTION The speed of the drive could reach Maximum Speed Overspeed Limit to meet required torque when any of the torque modes have been selected Equipment damage and or personal injury may result 454 Rev Speed Limit Default 0 0 RPM Sets a limit on speed in the n
277. lt 5 Code Fault 6 Code Fault 7 Code Fault 8 Code A code that represents the fault that tripped the drive The codes will appear in these parameters in the order they occur Fault 1 Code the most recent fault Fault 1 Time Fault 2 Time Fault 3 Time Fault 4 Time Fault 5 Time Fault 6 Time Fault 7 Time Fault 8 Time The time between initial drive power up and the occurrence of the associated trip fault Can be compared to Power Up Marker for the time from the most recent power up Fault x Time Power Up Marker Time difference to the most recent power up A negative value indicates fault occurred before most recent power up A positive value indicates fault occurred after most recent power up To convert this value to the number days hours minutes and seconds the following formula may be used Fault x Time 24 hours of days remaining time Remaining Time x 24 hours of hours Remaining Time x 60 minutes of minutes remaining time Remaining Time x 60 seconds of seconds Result of days of hours of minutes of seconds Example 1909 2390 Hrs 1 Day 24 Hrs 79 551625 Days 0 551625 Days x 24 Hrs Day 13 239 Hrs 0 239 Hrs x 60 Min Hr 14 34 Min 0 34 Min x 60 Sec Min 20 4 Secs Values Default Read Only Min Max 0 65535 Units 0 Default Read Only Min Max 0 0000 214748 3647 Hr Units 0 0001 Hr Publication 20B UM002D EN P
278. ltage is Board Dependent Not available with 115V UO Be sure both sets of test contacts are closed Assure all control connections are properly made to the drive Reapply power to the drive including external control power if supplied Test 6 7 Perform any necessary parameter adjustments and start the drive Confirm that the drive stops and starts normally then start and slowly accelerate the motor Open Digital Input 6 The drive should stop and the motor coast to rest The HIM OIM should indicate that the drive is Not Enabled Publication 20B UM002D EN P D 6 Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors 8 Close Digital Input 6 The drive should not start but the HIM OIM should indicate that the drive is Stopped Important The drive should not start when closing Digital Input 6 even if a maintained start command is present and had not been removed when the drive stopped 9 Provide the command to restart the drive In the case of a maintained start remove and reapply the start command In either case the drive should run normally 10 With the motor running open Digital Input 5 The drive should stop and the motor coast to rest The HIM OIM should indicate that the drive is in an Auxiliary Input fault condition 11 Close Digital Input 5 The drive should not start and the HIM OIM will continue to indicate an Auxiliary Input fault condition 12 Provide the command to r
279. ly set to a 1 then the loop will become enabled as soon as the drive goes into run Pl Enabled TT PI Output Spd Cmd PI Pre load Value 0 PI Pre load Value gt 0 PI Enabled J E LE E E _ 100 0 75 0 T 50 0 Pl E mm r Fl 25 0 tart at Spd Cmd j j j 00 PI Output L _ bert 500 75 0 100 0 e e r 1000 75 0 50 0 25 0 00 25 0 50 0 75 0 100 0 Normalized Feedback Normalized SQRT Feedback Spd Cmd Pre load to Command Speed Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 31 Application Notes Figure C 13 Process Trim Wm g m sawed alum PEAY wnug R asuigigd JUO Peay JAQUE aM PEAY JejaweJeg MUD Deen 0000 rh K
280. may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the Prepare For Drive Start Up Before Applying Power to the Drive LJ 1 Confirm that all inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are secure J 2 Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value of the drive LI 3 Verify that control power voltage is correct The remainder of this procedure requires that a HIM be installed If an operator interface is not available remote devices should be used to start up the drive Important When power is first applied the HIM may require approximately 5 seconds until commands are recognized including the Stop key Publication 20B UM002D EN P 2 2 Start Up Applying Power to the Drive J 4 Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive If any of the six digital inputs are configured to Stop CF CF Clear Fault or Enable verify that signals are present or reconfigure Digital Inx Sel If an I O option is not installed i e no TO terminal block verify that Digital Inx Sel is not configured to Stop CF or Enable If this is not done the drive will not start Refer to Alarm Descriptions on page 4 11 for a list of potential digital input conflicts If a fault code appears refer to Chapter 4 Tf the STS LED is not flashing green at this
281. meter is not reset when Reset 072 to Defaults is selected 082 148 158 203 Drive Checksum Default Read Only Provides a checksum value that indicates Min Max 0 65535 whether or not a change in drive Units 1 programming has occurred 204 Dyn UsrSet Cnfg O Enables Disables dynamic selection of user parameter sets Important In dynamic mode changes to the parameters are not saved to nonvolatile storage Switching user sets restores the values last saved before enabling dynamic mode y Ei os o SL gt SS 5 ES x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 Dynamic Mode pus 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 10 1 Enabled 0 Disabled a Ctrl Source Factory Default Bit Values 1 Dyn UserSat Sel 0 Digital Inputs x Reserved 205 Dyn UsrSet Sel O Selects user set if Dyn UsrSet Cnfg xxxx xx11 Important All digital input selections parameters 361 366 must be identical in all three user sets for proper Dynamic User Set operation even if only two sets are used E amp Sg S SWS o 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 0 x Reserved User Set 1 User Set 2 User Set 3 User Set 3 o 00 x Ax ep lee ojx Elx x MIS X X Xx x x x x pus 14 13 12 11 10 9 Bit Factory Default Bit Values alulolo Publication 20B UM002D EN P File UTILITY Programming and Pa
282. mmable stop modes including Ramp Coast DC Brake Ramp to Hold and S curve Accel Decel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 3600 seconds in 0 1 second increments Intermittent Overload 110 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 150 Overload capability for up to 3 seconds Current Limit Capability Proactive Current Limit programmable from 20 160 of rated output current Independently programmable proportional amp integral gain Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 4 Supplemental Drive Information Category Specification Control Electronic Motor Overload Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response Investigated by U L to continued Protection comply with N E C Article 430 U L File E59272 volume 12 Digital Analog Input Latency Motor Latency Signal Control Min Max Typical Digital Start FVC 8 4 ms 10 4ms 8 4ms Input svc 9 2ms 16 0ms 9 2 ms Stop FVC 10 0ms 12 4ms 10 4ms SVC 10 0ms 12 0ms_ 10 4ms Analog Torque FVC 772 us 1 06ms 840 us Input 4 kHz PWM Torque FVC 1 008 ms 1 46ms 1 256 ms 2 kHz PWM Speed FVC 4 6 ms 8 6 ms 4 8 ms Speed SVC 4 8 ms 12 4ms 6 4ms Encoder Type ncremental dual channel Supply 12V 250 mA 12V 10 mA minimum inputs isolated with differential transmitter 250 kHz maximum Quadrature 90 27 degrees at 25 degrees C Duty Cycle 50 10 Requir
283. moval 1 8 Torque Ref x Hi 3 13 Cable Entry Plate Removal 1 8 Torque Ref x Lo 3 13 Encoder 1 43 Hardware Enable 1 43 1 0 1 38 Potentiometer 1 44 Torque Ref x Sel 3 13 Torque Reference Source 1 46 Torque Setpoint1 3 14 Power 1 6 Torque Setpoint2 3 14 Write Mask Cfg 3 53 Total Gear Ratio 3 66 WWW World Wide Web P 1 P 2 Total Inertia 3 27 Back 2 Trim Setpoint 3 22 Trim Hi 3 22 Z lug Y 3 22 Zero SpdFloatTime 3 64 Trim Out Select 3 22 Trnsistr OvrTemp Fault 4 9 Troubleshooting 4 1 U Unbalanced Ungrounded Supply 1 4 UnderVoltage Alarm 4 13 Fault 4 9 Ungrounded Distribution Systems 1 24 Units Traveled 3 69 Unshielded Power Cables 1 6 User Configurable Alarm 4 1 User Sets B 5 UserSet Chksum Fault 4 9 Utility File 3 35 V Vel Override 3 70 VHz Neg Slope Alarm 4 13 Viewing and Changing Parameters B 6 Voltage Class 3 38 Voltage Tolerance C 45 Volts per Hertz Group 3 15 W Wake Level 3 34 Wake Time 3 34 Waking Alarm 4 13 Web Sites see WWW World Wide Web Wire Publication 20B UM002D EN P PowerFlex 700 Parameter Record Number Parameter Name _ Setting Number Parameter Name Setting 40 Motor Type 142 143 Decel Time X 41 Motor NP Volts 145 DB While
284. move HIM confirmation screen appears 2 Press Enter to confirm that you want to remove the HIM 3 Remove the HIM from the drive To install HIM 1 Insert into drive or connect cable Key s OO Example Displays Remove Op Intrfc Press Enter to Disconnect Op Intrfc Port 1 Control Publication 20B UM002D EN P B 4 HIM Overview Menu Structure Figure B 3 HIM Menu Structure User Display D ooo Y Y Alarms i l Faults Device Items PA Ty Device Version gt PowerFlex 700 HIM Version Product Data Main Control Board Power Unit Board LCD Module Product Data LCD HIM Control Board Keyboard Numeric Param Access Lvl FGP gt FGP File _ Numbered List Changed Params File 2 Name View Links File 3 Name PowerFlex 700 Connected DPI Devices Device Select gt Device gt HIM e Continue gt Intro gt SMART Start Over B L es o Detailed Applications s c More Info Drive Identity Change Password User Dspy Lines User Dspy Time gt OO User Dspy Video Reset User Dspy Contrast ZS View selected through OO pe selectos rough NENN SS Y View Alarm Queue x Clr Alarm Queue gt Fault Info gt Drive Status 1 View Fault Queue Drive Status 2 Clear Faults Drive Alarm 1 Clr Fault Queue Drive Alarm 2 Reset Device Speed Ref Source Start Inhibits Last Stop Source Dig In Status Dig Out Status Drive Temp Drive OL Count Motor OL Count Basic Advanced
285. move increment from the current position in the direction distance and speed programmed When started the drive ramps to the desired velocity holds the speed then ramps to zero speed landing or ending at the commanded position within the tolerance window Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 22 Application Notes End Hold Position The drive holds the last position and stops the profile after dwell time expires Must be used with position regulated profile Do Not use End Homing Routine Each time the profile indexer is enabled the drive requires a home position to be detected The following options are available e Homing to Marker Pulse with Encoder Feedback When Find Home is commanded the homing routine is run when a start command is issued The Homing bit 11 in Profile Status will be set while the homing routine is running The drive will ramp to the speed and direction set in Find Home Speed parameter 713 at the rate set in Find Home Ramp parameter 714 until the digital input defined as Home Limit is activated The drive will then ramp to zero and then back up to first marker pulse prior to the Home Limit switch at 1 10 the Find Home Speed When on the marker pulse the At Home bit 13 is set in Profile Status and the drive is stopped Figure C 5 shows the sequence of operation for homing to a marker pulse Encoder Z Chan parameter 423 must be set to Marker Input or Marker Check for thi
286. mple LCD Displays 1 Press ALT and then Esc S M A R T The SMART start screen appears Ga Esc E F gt Stopped Auto 2 View and change parameter values as desired For HIM information see SMART List Appendix B Digital In2 Sel 3 Press Esc to exit the S M A R T start S Esc Minimum Speed Running an Assisted Start Up Important This start up routine requires an LCD HIM The Assisted start up routine asks simple yes no or enter data questions Access Assisted Start Up by selecting Start Up from the Main Menu To perform an Assisted Start Up Step GTO Example LCD Displays 1 In the Main Menu press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to Start Up O A Fs Stopped SS 2 Press Enter Ss Hz Main Menu Memory Storage Preferences Publication 20B UM002D EN P Chapter 3 Programming and Parameters Chapter 3 provides a complete listing and description of the PowerFlex 700 parameters The parameters can be programmed viewed edited using an LCD HIM Human Interface Module As an alternative programming can also be performed using DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive software and a personal computer Refer to Appendix B for a brief description of the LCD HIM For information on See page About Parameters 3 1 How Parameters are Organized 3 3 Monitor File 3 7 Motor Control File 3 9 Speed Command File 3 17 Dy
287. n detected between the drive and motor in this phase Excessive current has been detected between these two output terminals DPI port stopped communicating A SCANport device was connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k baud The communications card has a fault EEPROM data is corrupt on drive power up DC bus voltage remained below 85 of nominal for longer than Power Loss Time Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 on page 3 45 One or more of the output transistors were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage Action Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option 1 Restore defaults 2 Reload User Set if used 1 Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive 2 Program the drive parameters as needed 1 Check the wiring between the drive and motor 2 Check motor for grounded phase 3 Replace drive Check the motor and drive output terminal wiring for a shorted condition 2 Replace drive pu If adapter was not intentionally disconnected check wiring to the port Replace wiring port expander adapters Main Control Board or complete drive as required 2 Check HIM connection 3 If an adapter was intentionally disconnected an
288. n 1 Analog In 2 Reserved Pulse In Encoder MOP Level 10 Reserved 11 Preset Spd1 12 Preset Spd2 13 Preset Spd3 14 Preset Spd4 15 Preset Spd5 16 Preset Spd6 17 Preset Spd7 18 DBL Port 1 19 DBL Port 2 1 20 DPI Port 3 1 21 DPI Port 4 1 22 DBL Port 5 1 2324 Reserved 25 Scale Block1 26 Scale Block2 27 Scale Block3 28 Scale Block4 29 Reserved 30 HighRes Ref Maximum Speed Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 0 01 RPM 0 0 Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 0 01 RPM 11 Preset Spd1 See Speed Ref A Sel Maximum Speed Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 0 01 RPM 0 0 Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 0 01 RPM Related io iO MN e Y Kal Io CO IN S Kal Io IGO por See 090 e VG Kal I gt CO 95 e Y Kal I gt O IS I gt O G Programming and Parameters 3 21 mod o S Parameter Name amp Description S O 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 096 TB Man Ref Sel Default 1 Analog In 1 097 O Sets the manual speed reference source Options 1 Analog In 1 098 when a digital input parameter 2 Analog In 2 1 361 366 is configured for Auto 3 8 Reserved Manual or Manual Auto v7 002 amp 9 MOP Level later 10 17 Reserved 1
289. n 2 O Selects the source of the voltage trim that Options 0 Reserved is added to or subtracted from the voltage 1 Analog In 1 reference 2 Analog In 2 3 6 Reserved 7 8 Not Used 9 MOP Level 10 Reserved 11 17 Preset Volt1 7 1822 DPI Port 1 5 670 Adj Volt Trim Hi Default 100 0 O Scales the upper value of the Adj Volt Min Max 0 0 100 0 of Drive Rated TrimSel selection when the source is an Volts analog input Units 0 1 671 Adj Volt Trim Lo Default 0 0 O Scales the lower value of the Adj Volt Min Max 0 0 100 0 of Drive Rated TrimSel selection when the source is an Volts analog input Units 0 1 672 Adj Volt Trim Default 0 0 Scales the total voltage trim value from Min Max 100 0 of Drive Rated all sources Analog In 1 amp 2 are scaled Volts separately with Adj Volt Trim Hi 8 Adj Units 0 1 Volt Trim Lo then Adj Volt Trim sets the trim value The sign of this value will determine if trim is added or subtracted from the reference 675 Adj Volt AccTime Default 0 0 Secs Sets the rate of voltage increase The Min Max 0 0 3600 0 Secs value will be the time it takes to ramp the Units 0 1 Secs voltage from Min Adj Voltage to Maximum Voltage An S curve can be applied to the ramp using parameter 677 676 Adj Volt DecTime Default 0 0 Secs Sets the rate of voltage decrease The Min Max 0 0 3600 0 Secs valu
290. n Max 10 0 Secs 10 0 Secs 0 0 3600 0 Secs 0 1 Secs 10 0 Secs 10 0 Secs 0 0 3600 0 Secs 0 1 Secs 0 0 100 1 Cur Lim Val Cur Lim Val Analog In 1 Analog In 2 Rated Amps x 1 5 MPO O Equation yields approxi mate default value Based on Drive Rating 0 1 Amps 250 0 5000 1 Both PWM 1st Disabled Reduce CLim Reduce PWM Both PWM 1st ono U 140 thru 143 Kk gt e gt gt CO be A Ka ek D Ko Ka A Y gt Co IK Ee IO Programming and Parameters 3 29 Parameter Name amp Description Group Related o e ic 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 151 PWM Frequency Default 4 kHz R 2 kHz Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM pe output Drive derating may occur at Refer to Appendix A higher carrier frequencies For derating Min Max 2 10 kHz information refer to the PowerFlex Units 2 4 8 10 kHz Reference Manual Important If parameter 053 Motor Cntl Sel is set to FVC Vector the drive will run at 2 kHz when operating below 6 Hz 152 Droop RPM FLA Default 0 0 RPM Selects amount of droop that the speed Min Max 0 0 200 0 RPM reference is reduced when at full load Units 0 1 RPM N E torque Zero disables the droop function 3 Important Selecting Slip Comp with 3 parameter 080 in conjunction with parame
291. n ground Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection Some local codes may require redundant ground connections The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 6 Installation Wiring Fuses and Circuit Breakers The PowerFlex 700 can be installed with input fuses or an input circuit breaker National and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes may determine additional requirements for these installations Refer to Appendix A for recommended fuses circuit breakers circuit protection Specifications for the recommended fuse or circuit breaker to provide protection against short circuits are provided in Appendix A ATTENTION The PowerFlex 700 does not provide branch short Power Wiring and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types conductor sizes branch circuit protection and disconnect devices Failure to do so may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION National Codes and standards NEC VDE BSI etc Cable Types Acceptable for 200 600 Volt Installations A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations For many installations unshielded cable is adequate provided it can be
292. n viewing or changing parameters Previous programming may affect the drive status and operation when power is applied If the I O Cassette has been changed a Reset Defaults operation must be performed Torque Proving applications can use the Assisted Start Up to tune the motor However it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the hoist crane equipment during the routine If this is not possible refer to the manual tuning procedure on page C 4 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 2 5 aunpecodd dn uge ay yeoday pue synejap Ap 0 SAP SU 19991 SINIDO UOIJENyIS SIU Y Onea eUIBYO Jeu 0119991 aq ou Jeu Sia oWeJed esey aJnped0id auUN o Ne y Start Up Figure 2 2 Start Up Menu Bulioge nom ssa ay DUUHD BALIP ay WOJ PAAOWA S 1amod 4 99E L9E PUB 912 9 z 080 ESO ap siajaweled papae ay ajajduoo si dn LIS USym sanjea euso 13y 011999 UB ase senjea asay uoyelado dn es sadoxd 10 sanjea JoJoWeed urea AjI poW Kew anp 3y sasnpadoid Burun pue Sigal 103014 uung 1 sinding Bojeuy 9 sequalajay peedg oi reu6ig O I Sat dwey 40 ajeos pue Voten Aja eum e eum Z 18980 1999 one BANOS pue Dous omg Beg apow doe gier enbyuoo anbioy aziundo elnbyuog dund 13447 dN 1010W SI 13 10 u09 s w dwey ad L au0g Ae dsiq ss99014 wuejy onbe anbioyypaads Slsal 010 On dorspsers eyeq dund pue ejeg 1030W dung 19M seguelejey paad 104 ejeos
293. nalog Out Lo 3 56 Analog Out Sel 3 56 Analog Out2 Lo 3 56 Analog Out2 Sel 3 56 Analog Outputs Group 3 55 Anlg Cal Chksum Fault 4 5 Anlg In Config 3 54 Anlg In Loss 3 55 Anlg In Sqr Root 3 54 Anlg Out Absolut 3 55 Anlg Out Config 3 55 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Index 2 Anlg Out Setpt 3 57 Applications File 3 63 Armored Cable 1 6 Assisted Start Up 2 4 ATEX Approved Motors Operation with D 1 Auto Mode 1 46 Auto Rstrt Delay 3 32 Auto Rstrt Tries 3 32 Auto Rstrt Tries Fault 4 5 Auto Manual Control 1 47 Modes 1 46 Auto Reset Start 4 1 Autotune 3 12 AutoTune Aborted Fault 4 5 Autotune Torque 3 13 Auxiliary Input Fault 4 5 Before Applying Power 2 1 Bipolar Conflict Alarm 4 11 Bipolar Inputs 1 38 Bottom Plate Removal 1 8 Bottom View Dimensions A 29 Brake Dynamic 3 31 Brake Slipped Alarm 4 11 Brake Slipping Alarm 4 11 Brake Test Torq 3 65 Break Frequency 3 15 Break Voltage 3 15 Brk Alarm Travel 3 64 Brk Release Time 3 64 Brk Set Time 3 64 BrkSlip Count 3 64 Bus Capacitors Discharging P 3 Bus Reg Kd 3 31 Bus Reg Ki 3 30 Bus Reg Kp 3 31 Bus Reg Mode A 3 31 Bus Reg Mode B 3 31 Bypass Contactors 1 23 C Cable Entry Plate Removal 1 8 SHLD Terminal 1 5 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Cable Length Motor 1 8 Cable Trays 1 8 Cables Power Armored 1 6 Insulation 1 6 Separation 1 6 Shielded 1 6 Type 1 6 Unshielded 1 6 Capacitors Bus Discharging
294. namic Control File 3 28 Utility File 3 35 Communication File 3 49 Inputs amp Outputs File 3 54 Applications File 3 63 Pos Spd Profile File 3 69 Parameter Cross Reference by Name 3 76 Parameter Cross Reference by Number 3 79 About Parameters To configure a drive to operate in a specific way drive parameters may have to be set Three types of parameters exist e ENUM Parameters ENUM parameters allow a selection from 2 or more items The LCD HIM will display a text message for each item e Bit Parameters Bit parameters have individual bits associated with features or conditions If the bit is 0 the feature is off or the condition is false If the bit is 1 the feature is on or the condition is true e Numeric Parameters These parameters have a single numerical value i e 0 1 Volts The example on the following page shows how each parameter type is presented in this manual Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 2 Programming and Parameters 0900 o 2 35 ic G Z Parameter Name amp Description Values 198 Load Frm Usr Set Default 0 Ready 199 O Loads a previously saved set of Options 0 Ready 2 parameter values from a selected user 1 User Set 1 O G set location in drive nonvolatile memory 2 User Set 2 to active drive memory 3 User Set 3 216 Dig In Status Read Only 361 Status of the digital inpu
295. ncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper Table 1 D Recommended Power Jumper Configurations DC Bus MOV Input Common Benefits Of Correct Power Source Type UI Filter Caps Mode Cape Configuration Unknown Connected Disconnected See Solid amp Non Solid Ground points below Solid Ground Connected Connected e UL compliance e AC fed solidly grounded e Reduced electrical noise e DC fed from passive rectifier e Most stable operation which has an AC source and e EMC compliance Solid ground e Reduced voltage stress on components and motor bearings Non Solid Ground Disconnected Disconnected e Helps avoid severe e AC fed ungrounded equipment damage when e Impedance grounded ground fault occurs e High resistive ground s B phase ground e Regenerative unit such as common DC bus supply amp brake e DC fed from an active converter 1 Itis highly recommended to accurately determine the power source type and then configure appropriately 2 When MOVs are disconnected the power system must have its own transient protection to ensure known and controlled voltages Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 26 Installation Wiring To connect or disconnect these devices refer to pa
296. nd route through the enclosure wall Connect it to the mating connector located above the HIM cradle 3 Ground the drive chassis ATTENTION To avoid possible drive damage ensure that the thermistor wiring described above has been properly performed Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 14 Installation Wiring Auxiliary Control Power Supply If desired an auxiliary control power supply can be used with certain drives to keep the control logic up when the main AC power is removed An auxiliary control power supply can only be used with e 400 480 and 600 690 Volt drives with Vector Control 15 position of the catalog number string equals C or D Using an auxiliary control power supply will require the use of some type of AC line monitoring as well as control of the Precharge Enable signal Consult the factory for additional guidance with any PowerFlex 700 Standard Control drive or 200 240 Volt Vector Control drive Using the power supply with these drives will cause equipment component damage ATTENTION An Auxiliary Control Power Supply Must Not be used Refer to pages 1 16 through 1 21 for terminal block location Power supply must provide UL Installation 300V DC 10 Frames 0 3 40 W 165 mA Non UL Installation 270 600V DC 10 Frame 5 80 W 90 mA Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 15 Power Terminal Block Refer to pages 1 16 through 1 20 for typical locations Table 1 C
297. ndication Corrective Action Drive is Faulted Flashing red Clear fault status light e Press Stop e Cycle power e Set Fault Clear to 1 See page 3 45 e Clear Faults on the HIM Diagnostic menu Incorrect input wiring See pages 1 44 amp None Wire inputs correctly and or install 1 45 for wiring examples jumper e 2wire control requires Run Run Forward Run Reverse or Jog input e 3wire control requires Start and Stop inputs e Jumper from terminal 25 to 26 is required Incorrect digital input programming None Program Digital Inx Sel for correct e Mutually exclusive choices have been inputs See page 3 58 made i e Jog and Jog Forward Start or Run programming may be e 2 wire and 3 wire programming may be missing conflicting Flashing yellow Program Digital Inx Sel to resolve e Exclusive functions i e direction control Status light and conflicts See page 3 58 may have multiple inputs configured Digin CflctB Remove multiple selections for the e Stop is factory default and is not wired de on same function Install stop button to apply a signal at Drive Status 2 stop terminal shows type 2 alarm s Drive does not Start from HIM Corrective Action If 2 wire control is required no action needed See Save HIM Ref on page 3 36 If 3 wire control is required program Digital Inx Sel for correct inputs See page 3 58 Cause s Drive is programmed for 2 wire control HIM Start button is dis
298. ndidates for shielded cable Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents for some applications In addition the increased impedance of shielded cable may help extend the distance that the motor can be located from the drive without the addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks Refer to Reflected Wave in Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives pub DRIVES INO01 Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by the environment of the installation including temperature flexibility moisture characteristics and chemical resistance In addition a braided shield should be included and be specified by the cable manufacturer as having coverage of at least 75 An additional foil shield can greatly improve noise containment A good example of recommended cable is Belden 295xx xx determines gauge This cable has four 4 XLPE insulated conductors with a 100 coverage foil and an 85 coverage copper braided shield with drain wire surrounded by a PVC jacket Other types of shielded cable are available but the selection of these types may limit the allowable cable length Particularly some of the newer cables bundle 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield This construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and reduce the overall drive performance Unless specified in the individual distance tables a
299. nformal La a D Position k Positions m n are only required oal Note 600V class drives below 77 Amps when custom firmware is supplied Rollin Frames 0 4 are declared to meet the Low Front IP00 NEMA UL Type Open Voltage Directive It is the responsibility of the U Back Heatsink IP54 NEMA 12 user to determine compliance to the EMC Frames 8 amp 9 Only directive Frames 7 10 400 480V AC drives gt Voltage Rating codes C and D meet CE Roll in with Conformal Coat Certification requirements when installed per v Front IP00 NEMA UL Type Open fecornmendations Back Heatsink IP54 NEMA 12 Frames 8 amp 9 Only 3 Only available for Frame 5 amp Frame 6 drives 400 690V Only available for Frames 7 10 Only available with Vector Control option Publication 20B UM002D EN P Refer to Internal EMC Filter for details on selecting this option for each frame size 4 Only available for 208 240V Frame 0 3 drives Chapter 1 Installation Wiring This chapter provides information on mounting and wiring the PowerFlex 700 For information on Page For information on Page Opening the Cover Frames 0 7 1 1 Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Caps 1 24 Mounting Considerations 1 2 UO Wiring 1 38 AC Supply Source Considerations 1 3 Reference Control 1 46 General Grounding Requirements 1 5 Auto Manual Examples 1 47 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 1 6 Lifting To
300. ng This rating is greater than the 3 second current rating and less than the hardware overcurrent fault level It is typically 200 250 of the drive continuous rating Difference between Commanded Speed and Encoder Speed has exceeded the level set in Spd Dev Band for a time period greater than Spd Band Integrat Output transistors have exceeded their maximum operating temperature DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 407V DC at 400 480V input or 204V DC at 200 240V input Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 page 3 45 The checksum read from the user set does not match the checksum calculated 1 See page 4 1 for a description of fault types Troubleshooting 4 9 Action 1 Check wiring 2 Replace pulse generator Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive sek Cycle power to the drive If problem persists replace drive Restore defaults Reprogram parameters gt Read the Attention on page C 5 relating to the use of TorqProve with no encoder Check load requirements and Current Lmt Val setting Replace Main Control Board Replace Main Control Board Check for excess load improper DC boost setting DC brake volts set too high gt Check wiring between drive and motor Check release of mechanical brake 1 Verify that maximum ambient temperature has not been exceeded 2 Check fan 3 Check for excess load Monitor the incoming AC line for l
301. nk A Word 2 314 Data Out C1 Link C Word 1 See Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 315 Data Out C2 Link C Word 2 Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 316 Data Out D1 Link D Word 1 See Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 317 Data Out D2 Link D Word 2 Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 595 Port Mask Act Read Only Bits 0 5 indicate status for DPI port communication Bit 15 indicates when security software is controlling the parameter AAAA N N VIVEZVS E ia EE as 2 pris 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved 2 Bit 1 Firmware 6 002 and later Z Factory Default Bit Values S 596 Write Mask Cfg O Enables disables write access parameters links etc for DPI ports Changes to this parameter only become effective when power is cycled the drive is reset or bit 15 of Write Mask Ach transitions from 1 to 0 a VARS Ee vlslaisislxlslxivilililiiiiilz Mee IR 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Bit 1 Firmware 6 002 and later Factory Default Bit Values 597 Write Mask Act Read Only Status of write access for DPI ports When bit 15 is set network security is controlling the write mask instead of Write Mask Cfg Ss CAOT S SII S E S Cy VWRAAYS l 3 Ojx x x x x x x x 1 1 1 1 1 1 x con pits 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
302. odes 3 29 Adj Volt DecTime 676 Adjust Voltage 3 68 DC Brake Level 158 Stop Brake Modes 3 30 Adj Volt Phase 650 Adjust Voltage 3 67 DC Brake Time 159 Stop Brake Modes 3 30 Adj Volt Preset1 7 654 660 Adjust Voltage 3 67 DC Brk Lvl Sel 157 Stop Brake Modes 3 30 Adj Volt Ref Hi 652 Adjust Voltage 3 67 DC Bus Memory 13 Metering 3 8 Adj Volt Ref Lo 653 Adjust Voltage 3 67 DC Bus Voltage 12 Metering 3 7 Adj Volt S Curve 677 Adjust Voltage 3 68 Decel Mask 282 Masks amp Owners 3 51 Adj Volt Select 651 Adjust Voltage 3 67 Decel Owner 294 Masks amp Owners 3 52 Adj Volt Trim 672 Adjust Voltage 3 68 Decel Time X 142 143 Ramp Rates 3 28 Adj Volt Trim Hi 670 Adjust Voltage 3 68 Digln DataLogic 411 Digital Inputs 3 59 Adj Volt Trim Lo 671 Adjust Voltage 3 68 Dig In Status 216 Diagnostics 3 42 Adj Volt TrimSel 669 Adjust Voltage 3 68 Digital InX Sel 361 366 Digital Inputs 3 58 Alarm Clear 261 Alarms 3 47 Digital OutX Sel 380 Digital Outputs 3 60 Alarm Config 1 259 Alarms 3 47 384 388 Alarm X Fault 229 230 Diagnostics 3 44 Dig Out Invert 392 Digital Outputs 3 61 Alarm X Code 262 269 Alarms 3 47 Dig Out Mask 394 Digital Outputs 3 62 Analog In X Hi 322 325 Analog Inputs 13 55 Dig Out Param 393 Digital Outputs 3 62 Analog In X Lo 323 326 Analog Inputs 3 55 Dig Out Setpt 379 Digital Outputs 3 60 Analog In X Loss 324 327 Analog Inputs 3 55 Dig Out Status 217 Diagnostics 3 42 Analog Int Value 16 Metering 38 Dig OutX
303. of disconnecting or isolating certain motors loads If a contactor is opened while the drive is operating power will be removed from the respective motor but the drive will continue to produce voltage at the output terminals In addition reconnecting a motor to an active drive by closing the contactor could produce excessive current that may cause the drive to fault If any of these conditions are determined to be undesirable or unsafe an auxiliary contact on the output contactor should be wired to a drive digital input that is programmed as Enable This will cause the drive to execute a coast to stop cease output whenever an output contactor is opened Bypass Contactor Precaution ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed bypass system can result in component damage or reduction in product life The most common causes are e Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals e Improper bypass or output circuits not approved by Allen Bradley e Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor Contact Allen Bradley for assistance with application or wiring Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 24 Installation Wiring Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Caps The PowerFlex 700 drive contains protective MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors referenced to ground see below To guard against unstable operation and or damage the drive must be properly configured as shown in Table 1 D on page 1 25
304. off of the home limit switch Publication 20B UM002D EN P Values Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options None 0 0 None 1 Light 2 Heavy 0 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 3 Hz 0 1 0 9 Hz 0 1 Hz Read Only qa 47483647 64 2 20000 4 Pulse Input 0 0 Pulse Input 1 Pulse Check 2 Marker Input 3 Marker Check Related I gt SA Ca Io WSA Co Programming and Parameters 3 17 Speed Command File Parameter Name amp Description Group Related o e ic 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 079 Speed Units Default 0 HZ O Selects the units to be used for all speed Options 0 Hz related parameters Options 0 4 1 1 RPM indicate status only 2 amp 3 will convert 2 Convert Hz configure the drive for that selection 3 Convert RPM Convert Hz 2 converts all speed based parameters to Hz and changes the value proportionately i e 1800 RPM 60 Hz Convert RPM 3 converts all speed based parameters to RPM and changes the value proportionately This parameter is not reset when Reset to Defaults is selected o 080 Feedback Select Default 0 Open Loop 412 S O Selects the source for motor speed Options 0 Open Loop F
305. olation External source must be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE Input provides high common mode immunity Contacts in unpowered state Any relay programmed as Fault or Alarm will energize pick up when power is applied to drive and deenergize drop out when a fault or alarm exists Relays selected for other functions will energize only when that condition exists and will deenergize when condition is removed 150 mA maximum Load Not present on 115V versions A 10k ohm 2 watt burden resistor must be installed on each digital input when using a triac type device The resistor is installed between each digital input and neutral common Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 41 Table 1 1 1 0 Terminal Designations Frames 7 10 gt S No Signal A Description co T Analog in T 0 H Isolated bipolar differential 10V 4 20mA 11 320 2 Analog In 1 bit amp sign 88k ohm input impedance For 4 20mA 327 3 Analog In 2 90 a jumper must be installed at terminals 17 amp 18 or 4 Analog In 2 LO 13 amp 20 B Pot Common For and 10V pot references 6 Analog Out 1 2 Bipolar current output is not bipolar 10V 340 7 Analog Out 1 4 20mA 11 bit 8 sign voltage mode limit current 347 8 Analog Out 2 to 5 mA Current mode max load resistance is
306. olt Ref Lo 3 67 Adj Volt S Curve 3 68 Adj Volt Select 3 67 Adj Volt Trim 3 68 Adj Volt Trim Hi 3 68 Adj Volt Trim Lo 3 68 Adj Volt TrimSel 3 68 Adjust Voltage Group 3 67 Adjustable Voltage Operation C 1 AdjVoltRef Cflct Alarm 4 11 Agency Certification A 1 Alarm amp Fault Types 4 1 Alarm 1 Fault 3 44 Alarm 2 Fault 3 44 Alarm Clear 3 47 Alarm Config 1 3 47 Alarm Descriptions 4 11 Alarm x Code 3 47 Alarms AdjVoltRef Cflct 4 11 Analog In Loss 4 11 Bipolar Conflict 4 11 Brake Slipped 4 11 Brake Slipping 4 11 Decel Inhibt 4 11 Dig In Conflict 4 11 Drive OL Level 4 12 FluxAmpsRef Rang 4 12 Index Ground Warn 4 12 Home Not Set 4 12 In Phase Loss 4 12 IntDBRes OvrHeat 4 12 IR Volts Range 4 12 Ixo Vit Rang 4 12 Load Loss 4 12 MaxFreq Conflict 4 12 Motor Thermistor 4 12 Motor Type Cflct 4 12 NP Hz Conflict 4 13 PI Config Conflict 4 13 Power Loss 4 13 Precharge Active 4 13 Prof Step Cflct 4 13 PTC Conflict 4 13 Sleep Config 4 13 Speed Ref Cflct 4 13 Start At PowerUp 4 13 TB Man Ref CH 4 13 Torq Prove Cflct 4 13 UnderVoltage 4 13 VHz Neg Slope 4 13 Waking 4 13 Alarms Group 3 47 Alarms Clearing 4 11 ALT Key Functions B 3 ALT Key Functions B 3 Ambient Temperature 1 2 Analog In Loss Alarm 4 11 Analog In Loss Fault 4 5 Analog In x Hi 3 55 Analog In x Lo 3 55 Analog Inputs Group 3 54 Analog Inx Value 3 8 Analog Out Scale 3 56 Analog Out1 Hi 3 56 A
307. olt S Curve 3 68 Adj Volt Select 3 67 Adj Volt Trim 3 68 Adj Volt Trim Hi 3 68 Adj Volt Trim Lo 3 68 Adj Volt TrimSel 3 68 Alarm 1 Fault 3 44 Alarm 2 Fault 3 44 Alarm Clear 3 47 Alarm Config 1 3 47 Alarm x Code 3 47 Analog In x Hi 3 55 Analog In x Lo 3 55 Analog Inx Value 3 8 Analog Out Scale 3 56 Analog Out Hi 3 56 Analog Out Lo 3 56 Analog Ou Sel 3 56 Analog Out2 Hi 3 56 Analog Out2 Lo 3 56 Analog Out2 Sel 3 56 Anlg In Config 3 54 Anlg In Loss 3 55 Anlg In Sqr Root 3 54 Anlg Out Absolut 3 55 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Anlg Out Config 3 55 Anlg Out Setpt 3 57 Auto Rstrt Delay 3 32 Auto Rstrt Tries 3 32 Autotune 3 12 Autotune Torque 3 13 Brake Test Torq 3 65 Break Frequency 3 15 Break Voltage 3 15 Brk Alarm Travel 3 64 Brk Release Time 3 64 Brk Set Time 3 64 BrkSlip Count 3 64 Bus Reg Kd 3 31 Bus Reg Ki 3 30 Bus Reg Kp 3 31 Bus Reg Mode A 3 31 Bus Reg Mode B 3 31 Commanded Speed 3 7 Commanded Torque 3 8 Compensation 3 11 Control Status 3 14 Control SW Ver 3 9 Counts per Unit 3 70 Current Lmt Gain 3 28 Current Lmt Sel 3 28 Current Lmt Val 3 28 Current Rate Limit 3 29 Data In Ax 3 52 Data Out Ax 3 53 DB Resistor 3 66 DB Resistor Type 3 31 DB While Stopped 3 29 DC Brake Level 3 30 DC Brake Time 3 30 DC Brk Levl Sel 3 30 DC Bus Memory 3 8 DC Bus Voltage 3 7 Decel Mask 3 51 Decel Owner 3 52 Decel Time x 3 28 ig In Status 3 42
308. ommand j DC Brake Time gt Re issuing a Command Speed Start Command 1 This method combines two of the methods above It uses drive output reduction to stop the load and DC injection to hold the load at zero speed once it has stopped On Stop drive output will decrease according to the programmed pattern from its present value to zero The pattern may be linear or squared The output will decrease to zero at the rate determined by the programmed Maximum Freq and the programmed active Decel Time x The reduction in output can be limited by other drive factors such as bus or current regulation When the output reaches zero three phase drive output goes to zero off and the drive outputs DC voltage on the last used phase at the level programmed in DC Brake Level parameter 158 This voltage causes a holding brake torque DC voltage to the motor continues until a Start command is reissued or the drive is disabled If a Start command is reissued DC Braking ceases and the drive returns to normal AC operation If an Enable command is removed the drive enters a not ready state until the enable is restored Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 43 Mode Description Fast Brake Bus Voltage Output Voltage Output Current Motor Speed Command Speed Time Stop Command This method takes advantage of the characteristic of the induction motor whereby frequencies
309. on See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Step 1 Dwell Step 2 Dwell Step 3 Dwell Step 4 Dwell Step 5 Dwell Step 6 Dwell Step 7 Dwell Step 8 Dwell Step 9 Dwell Step 10 Dwell Step 11 Dwell Step 12 Dwell Step 13 Dwell Step 14 Dwell Step 15 Dwell Step 16 Dwell After the condition to move to the next step has been satisfied the drive continues at its present velocity or position until the dwell time expires At that point the next step is executed Not applicable for blend type moves Step 1 Batch Step 2 Batch Step 3 Batch Step 4 Batch Step 5 Batch Step 6 Batch Step 7 Batch Step 8 Batch Step 9 Batch Step 10 Batch Step 11 Batch Step 12 Batch Step 13 Batch Step 14 Batch Step 15 Batch Step 16 Batch Sets the number of times to run this step 0 continuously run this step Publication 20B UM002D EN P Values Default Min Max Based on Step x Type Units Default Min Max 0 1000000 Units Related 10 0 0 01 Secs If Step x Type Param Level units are the same as the parameter number specified in Step x Value E 1 w LL ke G a G a 2 a O a Group o 7 z o 2 L 2 o 2 a 877 Parameter Name 8 Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Step 1 Next Step 2 Next Step 3 Next Step 4 Next Step 5 Next Step 6 Next Step 7 Next S
310. on by displaying the following e Faulted appears in the status line Fault F e Fault number OverVoltage e Fault name e Time that has passed since fault occurred Press Esc to regain HIM control Drive is indicating an alarm The LCD HIM immediately reports the alarm condition by displaying the following e Alarm name Type 2 alarms only e Alarm bell graphic F gt Faulted auto Time Since Fault 0000 23 52 F gt Power Loss l ilauto Hz Main Menu Diagnostics Parameter Device Select Manually Clearing Faults Step Key s 1 Press Esc to acknowledge the fault The fault information will be removed so that you can use the HIM B 2 Address the condition that caused the fault The cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared 3 After corrective action has been taken clear the fault by one of these methods e Press Stop e Cycle drive power O e Set parameter 240 Fault Clear to 1 e Clear Faults on the HIM Diagnostic menu Publication 20B UM002D EN P Fault Descriptions Table AA Fault Types Descriptions and Actions Fault Analog In Loss Anlg Cal Chksum Auto Rstrt Tries AutoTune Aborted Auxiliary Input Cnt Bd Overtemp DB Resistance Decel Inhibit Drive OverLoad Drive Powerup Excessive Load E E 29 108 CO Type Description An analog input is configured to fault on signal los
311. onnected Start Up Routines The PowerFlex 700 start up routines allow the user to commission the drive more quickly and accurately If you have an LCD HIM two methods are provided SMART Start This routine is accessible by using the ALT function key on the LCD HIM This keystroke brings up a list of parameters needed to program the eight most commonly adjusted drive functions These include Start Stop Minimum Speed Maximum Speed Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Reference source speed command and Electronic Overload setting for the motor No knowledge of parameter organization or access is required S M A R T Start can commission the drive in just a few minutes See page 2 6 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 2 4 Start Up e Assisted Start Up Three levels of Assisted Start Up Basic Detailed and Application aid the user in commissioning the drive asking simple Yes No or Enter Data questions The user is guided through the Start Up to reduce the amount of time necessary to get the drive up and running The following are included in startup See Input Voltage Ratings Motor Data Motor Tests amp Auto tuning Speed Torque Control amp Direction Limits Speed Reference Start amp Stop Modes Ramp Setup Digital and Analog UO Application Set up TorqProve Oil Well Pumps Positioning Speed Profiling page 2 6 for details Important Information Power must be applied to the drive whe
312. onnecting an internal amp external resistor could cause damage DC DC Bus DC Input Brake Connections DC DC Bus PE PE Ground PS AUX Auxiliary Control Voltage see page 1 14 for details PS AUX at Motor Ground U U T1 To Motor V V T2 W W T3 R R L1 AC Line Input Power S S L2 Three Phase R S amp T T T L3 Single Phase R amp S Only Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 23 gt Using Input Output Contactors Input Contactor Precautions ATTENTION A contactor or other device that routinely disconnects and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive hardware damage The drive is designed to use control input signals that will start and stop the motor If an input device is used oper ation must not exceed one cycle per minute or drive damage will occur ATTENTION The drive start stop enable control circuitry includes solid state components If hazards due to accidental contact with mov ing machinery or unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exist an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive An auxiliary braking method may be required Output Contactor Precaution ATTENTION To guard against drive damage when using output contactors the following information must be read and understood One or more output contactors may be installed between the drive and motor s for the purpose
313. ons Values E File Group 278 Jog Mask See Logic Mask 288 O Controls which adapters can issue jog thru commands 297 279 Direction Mask See Logic Mask 288 thru Controls which adapters can issue forward reverse direction commands 280 Reference Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can select an an alternate reference Speed Ref A B Sel K or Preset Speed 1 7 281 Accel Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can select an Accel Time 1 2 a 282 Decel Mask See Logic Mask 288 Control s which adapters can select bil Decel Time 1 2 283 Fault Clr Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can clear a fault Se 2 284 MOP Mask See Logic Mask 288 S 9 Controls which adapters can issue MOP pil 2 commands to the drive all 2 2 285 Local Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters are allowed to Se S take exclusive control of drive logic commands except stop Exclusive local control can only be taken while the drive is stopped 288 Stop Owner Read Only 276 Adapters that are presently issuing a valid stop thru command 285 YNNN IS 1 Issuing Command Xx x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 0 1 pits 1413 12 11 10 9 817 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LRT Bit 289 Start Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapters that are presently issuing a thru va
314. or programming User Dspy Time Set the wait time for the User Display or enable disable it User Dspy Video Select Reverse or Normal for the Frequency and User Display lines Reset User Dspy _ Return all the options for the User Display to factory default values Viewing and Editing Parameters LCD HIM Step 1 Inthe Main Menu press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to Parameter 2 Press Enter FGP File appears on the top line and the first three files appear below it 3 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the files 4 Press Enter to select a file The groups in the file are displayed under it 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select a group and then a parameter The parameter value screen will appear 6 Press Enter to edit the parameter 7 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to change the value If desired press Sel to move from digit to digit letter to letter or bit to bit The digit or bit that you can change will be highlighted 8 Press Enter to save the value If you want to cancel a change press Esc 9 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the parameters in the group or press Esc to return to the group list Numeric Keypad Shortcut Key s O O ES z S Example Displays BGP File Monitor Motor Control Speed Command ERD Group Motor Data Torq Attributes Volts per Hertz FOR Parameter Maximum Voltage
315. or reprogram Accel Time acceleration x See page 3 28 Speed command source or value is None Check for the proper Speed Command using not as expected Steps 1 through 7 above Programming is preventing the None Check Maximum Speed See page 3 17 and drive output from exceeding limiting Maximum Freq See page 3 11 to assure values that speed is not limited by programming Motor operation is unstable Corrective Action 1 Correctly enter motor nameplate data 2 Perform Static or Rotate Autotune procedure Param 061 page 3 12 Cause s Motor data was incorrectly entered None or Autotune was not performed Publication 20B UM002D EN P Troubleshooting 4 17 Drive will not reverse motor direction Cause s Indication Corrective Action Digital input is not selected for None Check Digital Inx Sel page 3 58 Choose reversing control correct input and program for reversing mode Digital input is incorrectly wired None Check input wiring See page 1 38 Direction mode parameter is None Reprogram Direction Mode page 3 35 for incorrectly programmed analog Bipolar or digital Unipolar control Motor wiring is improperly phased None Switch two motor leads for reverse A bipolar analog speed command None 1 Use meter to check that an analog input input is incorrectly wired or signal is voltage is present absent 2 Check wiring See page 1 38 Positive voltage commands fo
316. orque Proving is being 361 used float will be ignored at end of ramp and the mechanical brake will be set e Excl Link Links digital input to a digital output if the output is set to Input 1 6 Link This does not 361 need to be selected in the Vector option Find Home Starts the commissioning procedure when a start command is issued to automatically position the motor to a home position established by a limit switch Hold Step Inhibits profile from transitioning to next step when active Home Limit This input is used for the home position Input 1 6 Link When Digital Output 1 is set to one of these i e Input 3 Link in conjunction with 380 Digital Input 3 set to Excl Link the Digital Input 3 state on off is echoed in the Digital Output 1 Micro Pos Micropostion input When closed the command frequency is set to a percentage 361 speed reference as defined in MicroPos Scale parameter 611 MOP Dec Decrements speed reference as long as input is closed 361 MOP Inc Increments speed reference as long as input is closed 361 MtrTrqCurRef Torque producing current reference 42 Param Cntl Parameter controlled analog output allows PLC to control analog outputs through data 342 links Set in AnlgX Out Geint parameters 377 378 Param Cntl Parameter controlled digital output allows PLC to control digital outputs through data 380 links Set in Dig Out Setpt parameter 379 Pl Reference Reference for PI block see Process PI
317. ort 1 5 DPI Loss 900 930 Fatal Faults 36 SW OverCurrent 86 2 Port 6 DPI Loss 38 Phase U to Grnd 87 IXo VoltageRange 1 Fault numbers not listed are reserved for future use 2 Firmware 6 002 and later only Publication 20B UM002D EN P Troubleshooting 4 11 Clearing Alarms Alarms are automatically cleared when the condition that caused the alarm is no longer present Alarm Descriptions Table 4 C Alarm Descriptions and Actions al Bl cant Alarm z Description AdjVoltRef 33 Invalid adjustable voltage reference selection conflict Cflct Analog In 5 An analog input is configured for Alarm on signal loss and signal loss has Loss occurred Bipolar 20 Parameter 190 Direction Mode is set to Bipolar or Reverse Dis and one Conflict or more of the following digital input functions is configured Fwd Reverse Run Forward Run Reverse Jog Forward or Jog Reverse Encoder movement has exceeded the level in BrkSlipCount after the brake was set Brake slip procedure is in progress Brake Slipped 32 Brake Slipping 16 v6 Decel Inhibt 10 Dig In 17 Digital input functions are in conflict Combinations marked with a e will ConflictA cause an alarm Drive is being inhibited from decelerating HO e Acc2 Dec2 Accel 2 Decel 2 Jog 1 2 Jog Fwd Jog Rev Fwd Rev Acc2 Dec2 Accel 2 Decel 2 Jog 1 2 A A Jog Fwd Jog Rev Fwd R
318. osen lower panel screws and pull the bottom edge out Tilt panel sufficiently to remove Hinge Tabs from the upper panel Remove panel and set aside Loosen upper panel screws and pull bottom edge out slightly Slide panel down until Locating Tabs clear chassis Remove panel and set aside Replace panels in reverse order Carefully align tabs and light pipes Mounting Considerations Operating Temperatures L fal Locating Tabs L backside of panel Light Pipes O Allen Bradley Hinge Tabs L PowerFlex 700 drives are designed to operate at 0 40 C ambient To operate the drive in installations between 41 50 C see the information below and refer to pages A 12 through A 24 for exceptions Table 1 A Acceptable Surrounding Air Temperature amp Required Actions Enclosure Rating Temperature Range Drive IP20 NEMA UL Type 1 with Top Label 10 40 C Frames 0 4 All Ratings 0 50 C Frames 5 6 Most Ratings 2 IP20 NEMA UL Type Open 0 50 C Most Ratings 2 Top Label Removed 1 0 45 C 20BC072 Only IP00 NEMA UL Type Open 0 50 C 20BC072 Only Top Label amp Vent Plate Removed Flange Mount Front IP00 NEMA UL Type Open 0 40 C Back External Frames 5 6 Back Heat Sink IP54 NEMA UL Type 12 0 55 C Front Inside Encl Stand alone Wall Mount IP54 NEMA UL 0 A0 Frames 5 6 Type 12 1 Frames 5 and 6 do not have
319. ource for DC Brake Level DC Brake Level Defines the DC brake current level injected into the motor when DC Brake is selected as a stop mode This also sets the braking current level when Fast Stop is selected The DC braking voltage used in this function is created by a PWM algorithm and may not generate the smooth holding force needed for some applications Refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual A DC Brake Time Sets the amount of time DC brake current is injected into the motor Not used for Ramp to Hold which will apply DC braking continuously See page C 42 Bus Reg Ki Sets the responsiveness of the bus used braking Publication 20B UM002D EN P Values Default Options Default Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Min Max 0 DC Brake Lv 0 DC Brake Lv 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 Rated Amps 0 Rated Amps x 1 5 Equation yields approximate maximum value 0 1 Amps ATTENTION If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be ATTENTION This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors Motors may be demagnetized during 0 0 Secs 0 0 90 0 Secs 0 1 Secs 450 0 5000 1 gt e jn Sle ps loo c mn e INN regulator Programming and Parameters 3 31 Paramet
320. oved Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 28 Frame Installation Wiring 2 Eu Factory Default Jumper Settings S ES MOV Input DC Bus Common 28 S FilterCaps Mode Caps B All PE_MOV PE CAP a Installed Not installed C All PE_MOV PE CAP Installed Installed T YS BRI BR2 DC DC UTI VT2 WT3 BU au TILS E GEESS seg Power Source Type Solid Ground e Insert jumper at the PE_CAP location shown Verify that the PE_MOV jumper is installed Non Solid Ground e Remove jumper at the PE_MOV location Verify that the PE_CAP jumper is also removed Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 29 o 2 o Factory Default Jumper Settings 558 S MOV InputFilter DC Bus Common CZ Se Caps 2 Mode Caps Power Source Type 5 B All Two green Green yellow wire is Solid Ground D yellow wires insulated from 1 CM Cap jumper wire should be J connected to the ground connected to ground with a metal N Power Terminal screw Verify R Block rail e Series C Drives If necessary C All Two green Green yellow wire is remove the nylon screw spacer H except yellow wires connected to ground and insert a metal M5 x 8 screw
321. ow voltage or power interruption Re save user set Publication 20B UM002D EN P 4 10 Troubleshooting Table 4 B Fault Cross Reference No Fault No 1 Fault No Fault 2 Auxiliary Input 39 Phase V to Grnd 88 Software Fault 3 Power Loss 40 Phase W to Grnd 89 Software Fault 4 UnderVoltage 41 Phase UV Short 90 Encoder Quad Err 5 OverVoltage 42 Phase VW Short 91 Encoder Loss 7 Motor Overload 43 Phase UW Short 92 Pulse In Loss 8 Heatsink OvrTemp 48 Params Defaulted 93 Hardware Fault 9 Trnsistr OvrTemp 49 Drive Powerup 100 Parameter Chksum 10 Heatsink Low Temp 51 IER QueueCleared 101 103 UserSet Chksum 12 HW OverCurrent 52 Faults Cleared 104 Pwr Brd Chksum1 13 Ground Fault 55 Cnt Bd Overtemp 105 Pwr Brd Chksum2 15 Load Loss 63 Shear Pin 106 Incompat MCB PB 16 Motor Thermistor 64 Drive OverLoad 107 Replaced MCB PB 17 Input Phase Loss 69 DB Resistance 108 Anlg Cal Chksum 18 Hardware PTC 70 Power Unit 109 NVS VO Checksum 20 TorqPrv Spd Band 71 75 Port 1 5 Adapter 110 NVS UO Failure 21 Output PhaseLoss 76 2 Port 6 Adapter 111 Power Down Csum 24 Decel Inhibit 77 IR Volts Range 121 UO Comm Loss 25 OverSpeed Limit 78 FluxAmpsRef Rang 122 1 0 Failure 28 See Manual 79 Excessive Load 130 Hardware Fault 29 Analog In Loss 80 AutoTune Aborted 131 Hardware Fault 33 Auto Rstrt Tries 81 85 P
322. ox Ratio 3 66 Gearbox Sheave 3 66 Gnd Warn Level 3 34 HighRes Ref 3 53 Home Position 3 69 Inertia Autotune 3 13 IR Voltage Drop 3 12 Ixo Voltage Drop 3 13 Jog Mask 3 51 Jog Owner 3 51 Jog Speed 1 3 22 Jog Speed 2 3 22 Kf Speed Loop 3 27 Ki Speed Loop 3 26 Kp Speed Loop 3 26 Language 3 37 Last Stop Source 3 41 Load Frm Usr Set 3 37 Load Loss Level 3 35 Load Loss Time 3 35 Local Mask 3 51 Local Owner 3 52 Logic Mask 3 50 3 54 Logic Mask Act 3 54 Man Ref Preload 3 36 Marker Pulse 3 16 Max Rod Speed 3 66 Max Rod Torque 3 65 Maximum Freq 3 11 Maximum Speed 3 17 Maximum Voltage 3 11 MicroPos Scale 3 64 Min Adj Voltage 3 67 Min Rod Speed 3 66 Minimum Speed 3 17 MOP Adj VoltRate 3 67 MOP Mask 3 51 MOP Owner 3 52 MOP Rate 3 36 MOP Reference 3 7 Motor Cntl Sel 3 10 Motor Fdbk Type 3 15 Motor NP FLA 3 9 Motor NP Hertz 3 9 Motor NP Power 3 9 Motor NP RPM 3 9 Motor NP Volts 3 9 Motor OL Count 3 42 Motor OL Factor 3 10 Motor OL Hertz 3 10 Motor OL Mode 3 10 Motor Poles 3 10 Motor Sheave 3 66 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Index 10 Motor Type 3 9 Mtr OL Trip Time 3 42 Mtr Tor Cur Ref 3 14 Neg Torque Limit 3 14 Notch Filter K 3 16 Notch FilterFreq 3 16 OilWell Pump Sel 3 66 Output Current 3 7 Output Freq 3 7 Output Power 3 7 Output Powr Fctr 3 7 Output Voltage 3 7 Overspeed Limit 3 18 Param Access Lvl 3 37 PCP Pump Sheave 3 65 PI BW Filter 3 2
323. ox Ratio 644 TorgAlarm Action 633 Min Rod Speed 639 Motor Sheave 645 TorqAlarm Dwell 634 Max Rod Speed 640 Total Gear Ratio 646 TorgAlrm Timeout 635 OilWell Pump Sel 641 DB Resistor 647 TorgAlrm TO Act 636 Gearbox Rating 642 Gearbox Limit 648 Pos Spd Profile ProfSetup Pos Spd Prof Sts 700 Encoder Pos Tol 707 Find Home Ramp 714 Status Units Traveled 701 Counts Per Unit 708 Pos Reg Filter 718 Home Position 702 Vel Override 711 Pos Reg Gain 719 Pos Spd Prof Cmd 705 Find Home Speed 713 Profile Step 1 16 Step x Type 720 Step x DecelTime 723 Step x Batch 726 Step x Velocity Tahe Step x Value 724 Step x Next 727 Step x AccelTime 722 Step x Dwell 725 These parameters will only be displayed when parameter 053 Motor Cntl Sel is set to option 2 or 3 These parameters will only be displayed when parameter 053 Motor Cntl Sel is set to option 4 8x Firmware version 6 002 and later Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters 3 7 Monitor File r 2 o S S Parameter Name amp Description 3 ic G Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 001 Output Freq Default Read Only Output frequency present at T1 T2 8 T3 Min Max Maximum Freq U V amp W Units 0 1 Hz 002 Commanded Speed Default Read Only 079 Value of the active Speed Frequency Min Max Maximum Speed Reference Displayed in Hz or RPM Units 0 1 Hz depending on value of Speed Units 0 1 RPM 003 Ou
324. parameter is an element in a group By default the LCD HIM displays parameters by File Group Parameter view Numbered List View All parameters are in numerical order Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 4 File Monitor Speed Command Inputs amp Outputs AN Programming and Parameters Basic Parameter View Parameter 196 Param Access Lvl set to option 0 Basic Group Parameters Metering Output Freq 001 Commanded Speed002 Commanded Torque 024 Output Current 003 Torque Current 004 DC Bus Voltage 012 Motor Data Motor NP Volts 041 Motor NP RPM 044 Motor OL Hetz 047 Motor NP FLA 042 Motor NP Power 045 Motor Poles 049 Motor NP Hertz 043 Mtr NP Pwr Units 046 Torq Attributes Motor Cntl Sel 053 Autotune Torque 066 Torque Ref A Lo 429 Maximum Voltage 054 Inertia Autotune 067 Pos Torque Limit 436 Maximum Freq 055 Torque Ref A Sel 427 Neg Torque Limit 437 Autotune 061 Torque Ref A Hi 428 Speed Feedback Motor Fdbk Type 412 Encoder PPR 413 Spd Mode amp Speed Units 079 Minimum Speed 081 Rev Speed Limit 454 Limits Feedback Select 080 Maximum Speed 082 Speed Speed Ref A Sel 090 Speed RefBHi 094 TB Man bei Lo 098 References Speed RefAHi 091 Speed Hei BLO 095 Pulse Input Ref 099 Speed RefALo 092 TB Man Ref Gel 096 Speed Ref B Gel 093 TB Man Ref Hi 097 Discrete Speeds Jog Speed 1 100 Jog Speed 2 108 Preset Speed 1 7 101 107 Ramp Rates Accel Time 1 140 Dece
325. per Unit Sets the number of encoder counts equal to one unit A 1024 PPR quadrature encoder has 4096 pulses counts in one revolution Vel Override This value is a multiplier to the Step x Velocity value when Vel Override bit of Pos Spd Prof Cmd is set to 1 This is applicable to all step types Find Home Speed Sets the speed and direction that are active when Find Home of Pos Spd Prof Cmd is active The sign of the value defines direction Forward gt Reverse Find Home Ramp Sets the rate of acceleration and deceler ation of the Find Home moves Pos Reg Filter Sets the error signal filter in the position regulator Pos Reg Gain Sets the gain adjustment for the position regulator Publication 20B UM002D EN P Values Default Min Max Units Default Units Default Units Default Min Max Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Related 10 1 50000 1 4096 1 1000000 1 100 0 10 0 150 0 0 1 10 0 of Maximum Speed 50 0 of Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM 10 0 Secs 0 0 3600 0 Secs 0 1 Secs 25 0 0 0 500 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 200 0 0 1 Programming and Parameters 3 71 Parameter Name amp Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 720 Step 1 Type Default 1 Tim
326. plays the output speed Min Max 0 0 Maximum Freq of the drive at the time of the last fault 0 0 Maximum Speed Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Fault Amps Default Read Only Captures and displays motor amps at the Min Max 0 0 Rated Amps x 2 time of the last fault Units 0 1 Amps Fault Bus Volts Default Read Only Captures and displays the DC bus Min Max 0 0 Max Bus Volts voltage of the drive at the time of the last Units 0 1 VDC fault Status 1 Fault Read Only Captures and displays Drive Status 1 bit pattern at the time of the last fault wae S EE S Z EE E 1 Condition T Conaition Irue 2 2 2 A 1 N l 7 7 i 1 d 0 Condition False ig x Reserved Bit 3 43 Related IND IND M 209 224 thru 230 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 44 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Status 2 Fault Captures and displays Drive Status 2 bit pattern at the time of the last fault File Values 22 CO Read Only 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved 22 Ko Alarm 1 Fault Captures and displays Drive Alarm 1 at the time of the last fault Read Only 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved UTILITY Diagnostics
327. point refer to Status Indicators below LJ 5 Proceed to Start Up Routines Status Indicators Figure 2 1 Drive Status Indicators E SS Frames 0 1 Frames 2 6 n E h al OCH 83888 3585 Frames g S 7 10 Be AN D a piy Publication 20B UM002D EN P Start Up 2 3 Name Color State Description OQ PWR Green Steady Illuminates when power is applied to the drive Power O STS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running and no faults are present Status Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing A start inhibit condition exists the drive cannot be See page Drive Stopped started Check parameter 214 Start Inhibits 4 11 Flashing An intermittent type 1 alarm condition is occurring Drive Running Check parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Steady A continuous type 1 alarm condition exists Drive Running Check parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Red Flashing Fault has occurred Check Fault x Code or Fault Queue See page 4 5 Steady A non resettable fault has occurred 6 PORT Refer to the Communication Status of DPI port internal communications if present MOD Adapter User Manual Status of communications module when installed NETA Status of network if connected NET B Status of secondary network if c
328. port internal communications if present MOD Yellow Status of communications module when installed NETA Red Status of network if connected NET B Red Status of secondary network if connected Precharge Board LED Indications Precharge Board LED indicators are found on AC input drives Frames 5 10 Name Color State Description Power Green Steady Indicates when precharge board power supply is operational Alarm Yellow Flashing Number in T indicates flashes and associated alarm 1 1 Low line voltage lt 90 2 Very low line voltage lt 50 3 Low phase one phase lt 80 of line voltage 4 Frequency out of range or asymmetry line sync failed 5 Low DC bus voltage triggers ride through operation 6 Input frequency momentarily out of range 40 65 Hz 7 DC bus short circuit detection active Fault Red Flashing Number in indicates flashes and associated fault 2 DC bus short Udc lt 2 after 20 ms 4 Line sync failed or low line Uac lt 50 Unom 1 An alarm condition automatically resets when the condition no longer exists 2 A fault indicates a malfunction that must be corrected and can only be reset after cycling power Publication 20B UM002D EN P 4 4 Troubleshooting HIM Indication The LCD HIM also provides visual notification of a fault or alarm condition Drive is indicating a fault The LCD HIM immediately reports the fault conditi
329. q Allowable Output Frequency Range Bus Regulation or Current Limit lt lt Allowable Output Frequency Range Normal Operation s gt lower limit on this range can be 0 depending on the value of Speed Adder lt Allowable Speed Reference Range gt gt Maximum l Voltage l l l l l l Lt Voltage ala Mecca R KR R K cing gt l l l l t l I Iech 2 Motor NP l ee lt E lt Frequency Trim l ES o 1 due to Speed I ER a ES l Control Mode Overspeed oO y 5 l 1 Limit SW E a LL a 2 i H S Start i a o Boost 1 vn Ku Run Boost L 4 l 0 Minimum Break Motor NP Hz Maximum Output Maximum Speed Frequency Speed Frequency Frequency Frequency Limit 084 Skip Frequency 1 Default 0 0 Hz 087 085 Skip Frequency 2 Default 0 0 Hz 086 Skip Frequency 3 Default 0 0 Hz O Sets a frequency at which the drive will Min Max Maximum Speed not operate Units 0 1 Hz 087 Skip Freq Band Default 0 0 Hz 084 Determines the bandwidth around a skip Min Max 0 0 30 0 Hz frequency Skip Freq Band is split Units 0 1 Hz i applying 1 2 above and 1 2 below the actual skip frequency The same bandwidth applies to all skip frequencies Publication 20B UM002D EN P Programming and Parameters 3 19 Kl o S Parameter Name 8 Description S O 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 088 Speed Torque Mod Defau
330. rameters 3 39 no GH Parameter Name amp Description T See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 206 Dyn UserSet Actv Read Only Indicates the active user set and if the operation is dynamic or normal S S S T D D 2 5 SSNS Se x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 US IR 14 13 12 11 10 98 7 65 4 3210 x Reserved Bit 209 Drive Status 1 Read Only 210 Present operating condition of the drive ZA TS Dd A Cy SRL SS NS SS ISS SS EEE A ESE RSS XX X XN NN AAA DATA A ATA 8 ololo o 1 1lofolololo 1 1lolo keodie Tue plis 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Bit Bits 2 Bits 1 15 14 13 12 Description 11 10 9 Description 0 O O O RefA Auto 0 lO O PortO TB 0 0 0 1 RefBAuto 0 I0 1 Port1 0 O 1 10 Preset2 Auto 0 1 0 Port2 2 0 JO 1 1 Preset3 Auto 0 1 1 Port3 O 1 10 O Preset4 Auto 1 10 J0 Port4 3 0 1 10 1 Preset5 Auto 1 0 1 Port5 5 0 1 1 0 Preset 6 Auto 1 1 0 Port6 SS O 1 1 1 Preset 7 Auto 1 11 11 No Local D 1 0 0 10 TBManual Control 1 0 O 1 Port Manual 1 O 11 10 Port2 Manual 1 0 11 1 Port3 Manual 1 11 0 10 Port4 Manual 1 1 0 1 Port5 Manual 1 1 1 0 Port6 Manual 1 1 1 1 Jon Ref 210 Drive Status 2 Read Only 209 Present operating condition of the drive Publication 20B UM002D EN P
331. raveled Default Read Only Dn DN o E Number of units traveled from the home Min Max 21474836 47 S E position Units 0 01 702 grag Home Position Default 0 00 701 A Find Home or a Redefine Pos sets Min Max 21474836 47 Units Traveled to this value Units 0 01 705 Pos Spd Prof Cmd Control word for the profile indexer The control functions are the same as those in the digital input section If a digital input is configured to provide the starting step bits 0 4 then its starting step value takes priority over Pos Spd Prof Cmd If a digital input is configured for any of bits 8 12 the corresponding functions will respond to the digital input status or the status of Pos Spd Prof Cmd D A KR amp A7 C CA e Ce CLL SVS NREX ESS SS C KL x oJoloJojo oJo xIx xlo olojojo 4zBnabied E 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Bit 1 Firmware 6 002 and later Factory Default Bit Values Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 70 Group File No POS SPD PROFILE ProfSetup Status Programming and Parameters 707 708 711 713 714 71 CO 719 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Encoder Pos Tol Sets the At Position tolerance window see Pos Spd Prof Sts bit 12 around the encoder count The value is subtracted from and added to the encoder unit value It is applied to all steps using encoder units Counts
332. re Input with parameter 320 Input Unipolar Speed Reference 0 to 10V Input CO oa O o 3 3 S Dp Ajo DOO gt q OB e Adjust Scaling Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 e View results Parameter 002 Analog Current Input Unipolar Speed Reference 0 20 mA Input Ge m D O Common e Configure Input for Current Parameter 320 and add jumper at appropriate terminals e Adjust Scaling Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 e View results Parameter 002 Analog Input PTC Ferrite e Set Fault Config 1 PTC OT set gt 5V geg Parameter 238 bit 7 Enabled PTC OT cleared lt 4V Ge e Set Alarm Config 1 PTC Short lt 0 2V Parameter 259 bit 11 Enabled e View Status Drive Alarm 1 3 32k Parameter 211 bit 11 True Ohm HW PTC Input Ferrite s Set Fault Config 1 PTC OT set gt 5V Bead Parameter 238 bit 13 Enabled PTC OT cleared lt 4V 15 T ad 23 e Set Alarm Config 1 PTC Short lt 0 2V Parameter 259 bit 18 Enabled O U Hi LU U A 3 e View Status Drive Alarm 1 Parameter 211 bit 18 True 1 Refer to the Attention statement on page 1 38 for impo
333. red to the load when the mechanical brake is released When torque proving is enabled open phase loss detection is performed regardless of the setting of Bit 12 of Fault Config 1 parameter 238 If the drive passes all tests the brake will be released and the drive will take control of the load after the programmed time in Brk Release Time parameter 604 which is the typical mechanical release time of the brake Brake Proving When the drive receives a stop command to end a lifting operation the following actions occur 1 The brake is commanded closed when the speed of the motor reaches zero After the time period programmed in Brk Set Time parameter 607 the drive will verify if the brake is capable of holding torque It will do this by ramping the torque down at a rate set in TorqLim SlewRate parameter 608 Note that the drive can be started again at anytime without waiting for either of the above timers to finish While the torque is ramping down the drive will perform a brake slip test If movement exceeds the limit set in BrkSlip Count parameter 609 then an alarm is set 32 Brake Slipped and the drive will start a brake slip procedure The drive will allow the motor to travel the distance programmed Brk Alarm Travel parameter 610 Another slip test will be performed and will repeat continuously until A the load stops slipping or B the load reaches the ground This feature keeps control of the load and ret
334. rofile is exclusively controlled by the digital inputs The DPI interface value for bits 0 4 will be ignored If a digital input is configured for the bit 8 11 functions see above the DPI interface or the digital input can activate the command Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 20 Application Notes Velocity Regulated Step Types and Parameters Each of the Velocity Regulated steps has the following associated parameters or functions Refer to the following page for descriptions Accel Decel Next Step Step Type Value Velocity Time Time Condition Dwell Batch Next Time Total Move Speed amp Accel Rate Decel Rate Time greater Dwell Time Batch Next Time Direction than Step Value Number Step Time Blend Total Time Speed amp Accel Rate Decel Rate Time greater NA NA Next Direction than Step Value Step Digital Input Digital Input Speed amp Accel Rate Decel Rate Digital Input logic Dwell Time Batch Next Number Direction Number Step Encoder Position A Speed Accel Rate Decel Rate At Position NA NA Next Incremental Direction Step Value Step Blend Parameter Parameter Speed amp Accel Rate Decel Rate Step Value gt or Compare NA Next Level Number Direction lt Step Dwell Value Step End NA NA NA Decel Rate At Zero transition Dwell Time NA Stop NA Function not applicable to this step type Time When started
335. rotational motor leakage inductance test for the best possible automatic setting of Ixo Voltage Drop in FVC Vector mode A start command is required following initiation of this setting The parameter returns to Ready 0 following the test at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode Used when motor cannot be rotated Rotate Tune 2 A temporary command that initiates a Static Tune followed by a rotational test for the best possible automatic setting of Flux Current Ref In FVC Vector mode with encoder feedback a test for the best possible automatic setting of Slip RPM FLA is also run A start command is required following initiation of this setting The parameter returns to Ready 0 following the test at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode Important If using rotate tune for Sensrls Vect mode the motor should be uncoupled from the load or results may not be valid With FVC Vector either a coupled or uncoupled load will produce valid results MOTOR CONTROL Torq Attributes ATTENTION Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this procedure To guard against possible injury and or equipment damage it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding Calculate 3 This setting uses motor nameplate data to automatically set IR Volta
336. rqProve both bits O and 1 of TorqProve Cnfg parameter 600 must be set to 1 Once this is set a Type 2 alarm will be active until the following settings are entered No Name Value Moie 053 Motor Cntl Sel 4 FVC Vector or 0 Sensrls Vect 080 Feedback Select 1 Slip Comp Encoderless Guidelines You can not hold zero speed in encoderless mode or operate near zero speed because of this it is very important to set Minimum Speed parameter 81 to two or three times the slip frequency when in encoderless mode Example A 1740 RPM motor has 2 Hz of slip Set Minimum Speed to 4 6 Hz Also set Float Tolerance parameter 606 to one to three times the slip frequency when in encoderless mode You should also use fast accel and decel times less than 2 seconds when operating in encoderless mode Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 8 Application Notes Installation Wiring When TorqProve Cnfg is set to Enable the Digital Out 1 relay is used to control the external brake contactor The normally open N O contact when closed is intended to energize the contactor This provides the mechanical brake with voltage causing the brake to release Any interruption of power to the contactor will set the mechanical brake Programming Digital Outl Sel parameter 380 will be ignored when TorqProve Cnfg is set to Enable Figure C 2 Typical 24V Torque Proving Configuration
337. rque Proving 1 50 Power Wiring 1 6 Using PowerFlex Drives with Regenerative Units 1 50 Using Input Output Contactors 1 23 DC Input Common Bus and Precharge Notes 1 52 EMC Instructions Frames 0 6 1 52 Most start up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring Every precau tion must be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed All items must be read and understood before the actual installation begins installation The Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper Opening the Cover Frames 0 7 Frames 0 4 Locate the slot in the upper left corner Slide the locking tab up and swing the cover open Special hinges allow cover to move away from drive and lay on top of adjacent drive if present See page 1 8 for frame 4 access panel removal Frame 5 Slide the locking tab up loosen the right hand cover screw and remove See page 1 8 for access panel removal Frame 6 Loosen 2 screws at bottom of drive cover Carefully slide bottom cover down amp out Loosen the 2 screws at top of cover and remove Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring Frame 7 Lo
338. rrent trips Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 2 Application Notes Fixed Frequency Control Applications Many of the applications require a fixed frequency operation with variable voltage levels For these applications it is best to set the frequency ramp rates to 0 using Accel Time 1 amp 2 and Decel Time 1 amp 2 parameters 140 143 The ramp rates for output voltage are independently controlled with parameters Adj Volt AccTime and Adj Volt DecTime parameters 675 676 Output Filters Several adjustable voltage applications may require the use of output filters Any L C or sine wave filter used on the output side of the drive must be compatible with the desired frequency of operation as well as the PWM voltage waveform developed by the inverter The drive is capable of operating from 0 400 Hz output frequency and the PWM frequencies range from 2 10 kHz When a filter is used on the output of the drive Drive OL Mode parameter 150 should be programmed so that PWM frequency is not affected by an overload condition i e 0 Disabled or 1 Reduce CLim Trim Function The trim function can be used with the Adjustable Voltage mode The value of the selection in Adj Volt TrimSel parameter 669 is summed with the value of Adj Volt Select parameter 651 Scaling of the trim function is controlled with Adj Volt Trim parameter 672 When the sign of Adj Volt Trim is negative the value selected in Adj Vol
339. rtant bipolar wiring information Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 0 Wiring Examples continued Installation Wiring 1 45 Input Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes Analog Output Configure with Parameter 340 10V 0 20 mA Bipolar Select Source Value 10V Unipolar shown Parameter 380 Digital Out Sel Adjust Scaling Parameters 343 344 2 Wire Control Disable Digital Input 1 Non Reversing Parameter 361 0 Unused 24V DC internal supply Set Digital Input 2 D Parameter 362 7 Run 70 SO enn Set Direction Mode Parameter 190 0 Unipolar 2 Wire Control Neutral 145V Set Digital Input 1 Reversing 1 Common 24V Parameter 361 8 Run External supply qe Forward VO Board dependent Da Pon Erd Set Digital Input 2 2 S Parameter 362 9 Run SEN Reverse 3 Wire Control No Changes Required Internal supply 3 Wire Control Neutral 115V No Changes Required External supply conan a I O Board dependent Requires 3 wire functions only Digital Int Sel Using 2 wire selections will cause a type 2 alarm page 4 11 Digital Input a u No Changes Required PLO Sa Card Board Qu eo Conan x se dependent 10k Ohm 2 Watt d el gt Control from Digital Output Relays two at terminals
340. rtificate TUV 05 ATEX 7153 for S directive 94 9 EC Safe turn off of certified ATEX motors PA used in Group Il Category 2 GD potentially explosive E atmospheres Ven Vi v EPRI EPRI Quality Star Certificates SEMIF47 115 and SEMIF47 SEMIF47 127 for SEMI F47 compliance 480V units tested VW VW ABS American Bureau of Shipping MA Certificate 08 HS303172B 1 PDA for auxiliary services on AB Classed vessels and offshore platforms v v LLoyd s Lloyd s Register Type Approval Certificate 08 60015 Register marine certification Vv viv RINA RINA Type Approval Certificate ELE283205CS Registo Italiano Navale marine certification Vi Viv Trentec Tested by Trentec to be compliant with AC156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification Testing of Nonstructural Components and 2003 International Building Code for worst case seismic level for USA excluding site class F Rockwell Certified by Rockwell Automation to be in conformity with Automation C the essential requirements of the applicable European Certifications Directives and the standards referenced below have been applied kW VW II vw 2006 95 EC Low Voltage Directive EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations Vv v v 2004 108 EC EMC Directive EN 61800 3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods Vi Vi Vi Certified by Rockwell Automation to be in conformity with the requirements of the applicable Australian legisl
341. rward direction Negative voltage commands reverse direction Stopping the drive results in a Decel Inhibit fault Cause s Indication Corrective Action The bus regulation feature is Decel Inhibit fault 1 See Attention statement on page DA enabled and is halting deceleration screen 2 Reprogram parameters 161 162 to due to excessive bus voltage LCD Status Line eliminate any Adjust Freq selection Excess bus voltage is normally due indicates to excessive regenerated energy or Faulted unstable AC line input voltages Internal timer has halted drive operation so Disable bus regulation parameters 161 amp 162 and add a dynamic brake 4 Correct AC input line instability or add an isolation transformer 5 Reset drive Publication 20B UM002D EN P 4 18 Testpoint Codes and Functions Troubleshooting Select testpoint with Testpoint x Sel parameters 234 236 Values can be viewed with Testpoint x Data parameters 235 237 Values No 1 Description Units Minimum Maximum Default 01 DPI Error Status 1 0 255 0 02 Heatsink Temp 0 1 degC 100 0 100 0 0 03 Active Cur Limit 1 0 32767 0 04 Active PWM Freq 1 Hz 2 10 4 05 Life MegaWatt Hd 0 0001 MWh 0 214748 3647 0 06 Life Run Time 0 0001 Hrs 0 214748 3647 0 07 Life Pwr Up Time 0 0001 Hrs 0 214748 3647 0 08 Life Pwr Cycles 1 0 4294967295 0 09 Li
342. s 040 Motor Type Default 0 Induction 053 Gen Set to match the type of motor Options 0 Induction connected 1 Synchr Reluc 1 4 1 Important Selecting option 1 or 2 2 Synehr PMP also requires selection of Custom V Hz option 2 in parameter 53 041 Motor NP Volts Default Based on Drive Rating O Set to the motor nameplate rated volts Min Max 0 0 Rated Volts Units 0 1 VAC 042 Motor NP FLA Default Based on Drive Rating 047 O Set to the motor nameplate rated full load Min Max 0 0 Rated Amps x 2 048 amps Units 0 1 Amps 2 043 Motor NP Hertz Default Based on Drive Cat No 5 Z O Set to the motor nameplate rated Min Max 5 0 400 0 Hz 3 frequency Units 0 1 Hz S 3 044 Motor NP RPM Default 1750 0 RPM S O Set to the motor nameplate rated RPM Min Max 60 0 24000 0 RPM Units 1 0 RPM 045 Motor NP Power Default Based on Drive Rating 046 O Set to the motor nameplate rated power Min Max 0 00 1000 00 Units 0 01 kW HP See Mtr NP Pwr Units 046 Mtr NP Pwr Units Default Drive Rating Based O Selects the motor power units to be used 0 Horsepower This parameter is not reset when Reset Options 1 kiloWatts to Defaults is selected 2 Convert HP 3 Convert kW Convert HP converts all power units to Horsepower Convert kW converts all power units to kilowatts Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3
343. s A signal loss has occurred Configure with Anlg In 1 2 Loss on page 3 55 The checksum read from the analog calibration data does not match the checksum calculated Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of Fit RstRun Tries Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 on page 3 45 Autotune function was canceled by the user or a fault occurred Auxiliary input interlock is open The temperature sensor on the Main Control Board detected excessive heat Resistance of the internal DB resistor is out of range The drive is not following a commanded deceleration because it is attempting to limit bus voltage Drive rating of 110 for 1 minute or 150 for 3 seconds has been exceeded Troubleshooting 4 5 Action 1 Check parameters 2 Check for broken loose connections at inputs Replace drive Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear Restart procedure Check remote wiring 1 Check Main Control Board fan 2 Check surrounding air temperature 3 Verify proper mounting cooling Replace resistor 1 Verify input voltage is within drive specified limits 2 Verify system ground impedance follows proper grounding techniques 3 Disable bus regulation and or add dynamic brake resistor and or extend deceleration time Refer to the Attention statement on page P 4 for further info Reduce load or extend Accel Time No fault displayed U
344. s 006 Ses Ee Sp Sly 882 Op 1 0b H Ove 8 StvOE0 e E 009 096 096 Ser 002 BCP 099 887 SZE 922 93 1 0y z 08L gt gt 009 0001 0001 Sly 008 Gly Do Zb S9E ERG 99E 1 0p H 002 8 1 9989908 w e 009 056 056 Sev 002 Sev 099 887 Get 922 93 1 0y Y 08L S 009 056 056 Sey 002 Sev 887 BRE 1 G t D ci 93 1 0b T 08L Z SeeoE0e 00y URL oss ose oss ose 936 S68 93 CRL 92 1 0y t Os 00y 058 058 GLE 059 GLE BCP cee GBC EUZ 1 EBC 0t T D I Z 2620908 indu Ov HOA 00t 0 OPL SISQUINN Dosis aJgeneny T XEN XEN Wy XEN 1 YIN a Xew yy 988 E UN 7002 eu sdy 2 28 GH dN ST San q buey Juano Di Di asny Leer asny Aejaq sdwyinding sbuneg duet baid Bue 3 Bojexe9 algejsnipy I 10199019 JOJOJA NOEL 103081014 JaMBalg AUIIJ UON au UaWely indu WMd MA anu mam won ng EI sajoN 104 02 7 bed aag panuyuoy saciaaq uoNoa old du DY HOA OOF Oe LL Publication 20B UM002D EN P osz 00S 009 See 007 Gee 09 D i 08L pL 691 pos Z 0SH 1 00p 002 002 00 oss 00 ZLE ELIZ 8c v6L EEZ pSt C 002 9 8pzagoz S osz URP 009 002 ose 002 cle vec 9GL cel Lyk 009 y Seb E 1 osz 009 009 BCC 00p See ULZ 861 08L LbL 69 pos T OSE 9 08 agoz is z osz SIE 00S GLI URZ SL USC 881
345. s P 3 25 Load Loss Level 187 Power Loss 3 35 PI Output Gain 464 Process P 3 26 Load Loss Time 188 Power Loss 3 35 PI Output Meter 138 Process P 3 25 Local Mask 285 Masks amp Owners 3 51 PI Preload 133 Process P 3 25 Local Owner 297 Masks amp Owners 3 52 PI Prop Gain 130 Process P 3 24 Logic Mask 276 Masks amp Owners 3 50 PI Ref Meter 135 Process P 3 25 Security 3 54 PI Reference Hi 460 Process P 3 26 Logic Mask Act 598 Security 3 54 PI Reference Lo 461 Process P 3 26 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 78 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name Number Group Page Parameter Name Number Group Page Pl Reference Sel 126 Process Pl 3 24 Speed Reference 23 Metering 3 8 PI Setpoint 127 Process Pl 3 24 Speed Units 79 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 PI Status 134 Process Pl 3 25 Speed Torque Mod 88 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 19 PI Upper Limit 132 Process Pl 3 25 Start At PowerUp 168 Restart Modes 3 32 Port Mask Act 595 Security 3 53 Start Inhibits 214 Diagnostics 3 41 Pos Reg Filter 718 ProfSetup S
346. s Time 609 Brk Slip Count 59 SV Boost Filter 186 Power Loss Level 610 Brk Alarm Travel 66 Autotune Torque 187 Load Loss Level 611 MicroPos Scale 69 Start Acc Boost 188 Load Loss Time 613 Brake Test Torq 70 Run Boost 189 Shear Pin Time 632 TorqAlarm Level 71 Break Voltage 195 MOP Rate 634 TorgAlarm Dwell 72 Break Frequency 308 HighRes Ref 635 TorqAlrm Timeout 84 86 Skip Frequency X 322 325 Analog In X Hi 637 PCP Pump Sheave 87 Skip Freq Band 323 326 Analog In X Lo 638 Max Rod Torque 91 Speed Ref A Hi 343 345 Analog OutX Hi 639 Min Rod Speed 92 Speed Ref A Lo 344 346 Analog OutX Lo 640 Max Rod Speed 94 Speed Ref B Hi 354 355 Anlg OutX Scale 642 Gearbox Rating 95 Speed Ref B Lo 377 358 Anlg OutX Setpt 643 Gearbox Sheave 97 TB Man Ref Hi 381 389 Dig OutX Level 644 Gearbox Ratio 98 TB Man Ref Lo 382 390 Dig OutX OnTime 645 Motor Sheave 100 Jog Speed 1 383 391 Dig OutX OffTime 647 DB Resistor 101 107 Preset Speed X 419 Notch FilterFreq 648 Gearbox Limit 108 Jog Speed 2 420 Notch Filter K 652 Adj Volt Ref Hi 116 Trim Setpoint 428 Torque Ref A Hi 653 Adj Volt Ref Lo 119 Trim Hi 429 Torque Ref A Lo 654 660 Adj Volt PresetX 120 Trim Lo 430 Torq Ref A Div 661 Min Adj Voltage 121 Slip RPM FLA 432 Torque Ref B Hi 663 MOP Adj VoltRate 122 Slip Comp Gain 433 Torque Ref B Lo 670 Adj Volt Trim Hi 127 PI Setpoint 434 Torg Ref B Mult 671 Adj Volt Trim Lo 129 PI Integral Time 435 Torque Setpoint1 672 Adj Volt Trim 130 PI Prop Gain 436 Pos
347. s several methods for stopping a load The method mode is defined by Stop Brk Mode A B parameters 155 amp 156 These modes include e Coast e Ramp e Ramp to Hold e DC Brake e Fast Brake Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 38 Application Notes Additionally Flux Braking parameter 166 can be selected separately to provide additional braking during a Stop command or when reducing the speed command For Stop commands this will provide additional braking power during Ramp or Ramp to Hold selections only If Fast Brake or DC Brake is used Flux Braking will only be active during speed changes if enabled A Ramp selection will always provide the fastest stopping time if a method to dissipate the required energy from the DC bus is provided i e resistor brake regenerative brake etc The alternative braking methods to external brake requirements can be enabled if the stopping time is not as restrictive Each of these methods will dissipate energy in the motor use care to avoid motor overheating Table C A describes several braking capability examples Table C A Braking Method Examples Method Use When Application Requires Braking Power Ramp e The fastest stopping time or fastest ramp time for speed Most if an changes external brake resistor or regenerative external resistor capability required for ramp times faster than the or regenerative methods below device is
348. s tested with the drive these cables are not recommended and their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known See Table 1 B Table 1 B Recommended Shielded Wire Location Rating Type Description Standard 600V 90 C 194 F e Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation Option 1 XHHW2 RHW 2 e Copper braid aluminum foil combination shield and Anixter B209500 B209507 tinned copper drain wire Belden 29501 29507 or j equivalent e PVC jacket Standard Tray rated 600V 90 C e Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation Option 2 1942 F RHH RHW 2 e 5 mil single helical copper tape 25 overlap min with Anixter OLF 7xxxxx or three bare copper grounds in contact with shield equivalent S e PVC jacket Class amp Il Tray rated 600V 90 C e Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation and Division amp 11 194 F RHH RHW 2 impervious corrugated continuously welded aluminum Anixter 7V 7xxxx 3G or armor equivalent e Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket overall e Three copper grounds on 10 AWG and smaller Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 8 Installation Wiring EMC Compliance Frames 0 6 refer to page 1 52 for details Frames 7 10 drives are CE Certified for use with 400V AC and 480V AC center grounded neutral power supply systems only Refer to page 1 52 for details Cable Trays and Conduit If cable trays or large conduits are to be used refer to
349. s type of homing Figure C 5 Homing to Marker 250 30 Homing 200 At Home 25 y 2 E Z S E 150 E 20 9 2 S gt 100 i Ki 15 8 Gi amp 5 S 5 3 10 o S 0 0 2 7 12 17 22 27 32 37 42 S 50 9 s Start Command Home Limit Input 100 E Find Home Command 0 Encoder Speed 415 gt Profile Status 700 Units Traveled 701 Dig In Status 216 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 23 Homing to Limit Switch with Encoder Feedback When Find Home is commanded the homing routine is run when a start command is issued The Homing bit 11 in Profile Status will be set while the homing routine is running The drive will ramp to the speed and direction set in Find Home Speed at the rate set in Find Home Ramp until the digital input defined as Home Limit is activated The drive will then reverse direction at 1 10 the Find Home Speed to the point where the Home Limit switch activated and stop Figure C 6 shows the sequence of operation for homing to a limit switch with encoder feedback without a marker pulse Encoder Z Chan must be set to Pulse Input or Pulse Check Figure C 6 Homing to a Limit Switch 250 30 Homing 200 25 v 4 At Home 3 3 Z 150 o 5 5 z 100 65 Home Limit Input e x Fa 3 S 3 8 50 og a 5 0 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 1 0 65 S
350. sabled and the load is not reduced an overload fault will eventually occur The calculated or measured Flux Amps value is not within the expected range Verify motor data and rerun motor tests Ground current has exceeded the level set in Gnd Warn Level Configurable alarm set in parameter 259 bit 17 When set to 1 this alarm is displayed when any of the following occur e parameter 88 is set to 7 Pos Spd Prof e on power up and parameter 88 7 e recall user sets and parameter 88 7 Alarm is cleared when e setting parameter 88 to a value other than 7 e reset defaults parameter 259 bit 17 is cleared a digital input is configured as Set Home and input is True parameter 705 bit 9 is Enabled parameter 700 bit 13 At Home is Enabled position regulator will set this bit if device is home The DC bus ripple has exceeded a preset level The drive has temporarily disabled the DB regulator because the resistor temperature has exceeded a predetermined value The drive auto tuning default is Calculate and the value calculated for IR Drop Volts is not in the range of acceptable values This alarm should clear when all motor nameplate data is properly entered Motor leakage inductance is out of range Output torque current is below Load Loss Level for a time period greater than Load Loss time The sum of Maximum Speed and Overspeed Limit exceeds Maximum
351. sed as a Power Up Marker in the Fault Queue indicating that the drive power has been cycled Motor did not come up to speed in the allotted time during autotune 1 Uncouple load from motor 2 Repeat Autotune Publication 20B UM002D EN P 4 6 Fault Encoder Loss 91 Troubleshooting No Typel Description Action Requires differential encoder Encoder Quad Err 90 Fatal Faults Faults Cleared 52 Fit QueueCleared 51 FluxAmpsRef 78 Rang Ground Fault 13 Hardware Fault 93 Hardware Fault Hardware Fault Hardware PTC 18 Heatsink LowTemp 10 Heatsink OvrTemp HW OverCurrent 12 900 930 130 131 One of the 2 encoder channel signals is missing Both encoder channels changed state within one clock cycle Diagnostic code indicating a drive malfunction 1 Check Wiring 2 Check motor rotation 3 Check encoder pulses rotation etc 4 Replace encoder Check for externally induced noise Replace encoder Cycle power Replace Main Control Board 3 Contact Tech Support ba No fault displayed Used as a marker in the Fault Queue indicating that the fault clear function was performed No fault displayed Used as a marker in the Fault Queue indicating that the clear queue function was performed The value for flux amps determined by the Autotune procedure exceeds the programmed Motor NP FLA A current path to earth groun
352. set parameter 196 Param Access Lvl to option 1 Advanced To view Engineering parameters refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM002 for details select option 2 Reserved Parameter 196 is not affected by the Reset to Defaults Option Description Changed Parameters changed for default Device Select Menu Use this menu to access parameters in connected peripheral devices Memory Storage Menu Drive data can be saved to or recalled from User and HIM sets User sets are files stored in permanent nonvolatile drive memory HIM sets are files stored in permanent nonvolatile HIM memory Option Description HIM Copycat Save data to a HIM set load data from a HIM set to active drive Device gt HIM memory or delete a HIM set Device lt HIM Device User Sets Save data to a User set load data from a User set to active drive memory or name a User set Reset To Defaults _ Restore the drive to its factory default settings Start Up Menu See Chapter 2 Publication 20B UM002D EN P B 6 HIM Overview Preferences Menu The HIM and drive have features that you can customize Option Description Drive Identity Add text to identify the drive Change Password Enable disable or modify the password User Dspy Lines Select the display parameter scale and text for the User Display The User Display is two lines of user defined data that appears when the HIM is not being used f
353. solute value at which a load Units 0 1 loss alarm will occur 188 Load Loss Time Default 0 0 Secs 187 Sets the time that current is below the Min Max 0 0 300 0 Secs level set in Load Loss Level before a Units 0 1 Secs fault occurs 189 Shear Pin Time Default 0 0 Secs 238 Sets the time that the drive is at or above Min Max 0 0 30 0 Secs current limit before a fault occurs Zero Units 0 1 Secs disables this feature Utility File Kl a 93 a Parameter Name amp Description K S 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values gt 190 Direction Mode Default 0 Unipolar 320 S O Selects method for changing direction Options 0 Unipolar thru lt Mode Direction Change 1 Bipolar E f E v ra 361 5 Unipolar Drive Logic 2 Reverse Dis thru e Bipolar Sign of Reference D Reverse Dis Not Changeable 366 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 36 HIM Ref Config Programming and Parameters 193 19 19 RH al Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Save HIM Ref Enables HIM to control Speed Reference only or Reference Start and Jog in Manual mode including two wire control Also enables a feature to save the present frequency reference value issued by the HIM to drive memory on power loss Value is restored to the HIM on power up Ss S SS Rey EN Z VY
354. ss 3 38 Wake Level 3 34 Wake Time 3 34 Write Mask Act Write Mask Act 3 53 Write Mask Cfg 3 53 Zero SpdFloatTime 3 64 Params Defaulted Fault 4 8 PCP Pump Sheave 3 65 PE Ground 1 5 Index 11 Phase Short Fault 4 8 Phase to Grnd Fault 4 8 PI BW Filter 3 25 PI Config Conflict Alarm 4 13 PI Configuration 3 23 PI Control 3 23 Deriv Time 3 26 Error Meter 3 25 Fdback Meter 3 25 PI Feedback Hi 3 26 PI Feedback Lo 3 26 PI Feedback Sel 3 24 PI Integral Time 3 24 PI Lower Limit 3 25 PI Output Gain 3 26 PI Output Meter 3 25 PI Preload 3 25 PI Prop Gain 3 24 PI Ref Meter 3 25 PI Reference Hi 3 26 PI Reference Lo 3 26 PI Reference Sel 3 24 PI Setpoint 3 24 PI Status 3 25 PI Upper Limit 3 25 Port 1 6 DPI Loss Fault 4 8 PORT LED 4 2 Ports DPI Type B 1 Pos Reg Filter 3 70 Pos Reg Gain 3 70 Pos Torque Limit 3 14 Pos Spd Prof Cmd 3 69 Pos Spd Prof Sts 3 69 Pos Spd Profile File 3 69 Potentiometer Wiring 1 44 Power Cables Wiring 1 6 Power Conditioning Input 1 4 Power Loss Alarm 4 13 Power Loss Fault 4 8 Power Loss Group 3 34 Power Loss Level 3 35 Power Loss Mode 3 34 Power Loss Ride Through C 27 Power Loss Time 3 34 Power Terminal Block 1 16 Power Unit Fault 4 8 Power Wiring Access Panel 1 8 General 1 8 uv U U Publication 20B UM002D EN P Index 12 PowerFlex 700 Reference Manual P 1 Powering Up the Drive 2 1 Powerup Delay 3 32 PowerUp Marker 3 45 Prec
355. t Read Only 080 Displays the present amount of Min Max 300 0 RPM z adjustment being applied as slip Units 0 1 RPM compensation E 124 PI Configuration 124 Sets configuration of the PI regulator thru O 138 o x v a e fe S S CA n S SATE TASES AAA ES E EEES o E EEN HHHH ae 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Option Description AdjVoltTrim 10 Configures the PI regulator output to trim the voltage reference rather than the torque or speed references The trim can be configured to be exclusive by setting Excl Mode bit 0 Trimming the voltage reference is not compatible with trimming the torque reference thus if bits 8 amp 10 are set a type Il alarm will occur setting Pl Cfg Cflct bit 19 in Drive Alarm 2 125 PI Control 080 Controls the PI regulator e E X X x x x x x x x x x x xj0 0 0 1 Enabled p 51413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Disabled x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 24 Programming and Parameters 12 Y 128 Q z a e o a U W a N 12 Ko 130 Parameter Name 4 Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions PI Reference Sel Selects the source of the PI reference 1 Adjustable Voltage Mode PI Setpoint Provides an internal fixed value for process setpoint when PI Reference Sel is set to Pl Setpoint PI Feedback Sel Selects the
356. t TrimSel is subtracted from the reference Process Control The Process PI loop in the drive can be configured to regulate the frequency or voltage commands of the drive Typical applications using the Adjustable Voltage mode will close the loop around the voltage command Process PI is enabled by selecting 1 AdjVoltTrim in bit 10 of PI Configuration parameter 124 This bit configures the PI regulator output to trim the voltage reference rather than the torque or speed references The trim can be configured to be exclusive by selecting 1 Excl Mode in bit 0 of PI Configuration parameter 124 Trimming the voltage reference is not compatible with trimming the torque reference thus if bits 10 and 8 of PI Configuration are set a type II alarm will occur setting bit 19 PI Cfg Cflct in Drive Alarm 2 parameter 212 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 3 External Brake Resistor mounted brake resistors A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected External resistor packages must be self protected from over temperature or a circuit equivalent to the one shown below must be supplied ATTENTION The drive does not offer protection for externally Figure C 1 External Brake Resistor Circuitry Three Phase AC Input Input Contactor M Knee R L1 S L2 T L3 Power Off Power On ole GC ER AU Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat Publicat
357. tact with chassis or components Important Do Not Remove Disconnect the larger green yellow wire MOV Input Filter Cap jumper wires should be insulated from ground If necessary remove the jumper wires from PE and individually insulate secure each jumper wire to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components Installation Wiring 1 35 o 2 Ea Factory Default Jumper Settings S S MOV InputFilter DC Bus Common CZ Ge Caps2 Mode Caps Power Source Type 6 E All Two green Green yellow wire to Solid Ground T yellow wires CMCapBoardis 11 The green yellow CM Cap and MOV connectedto disconnected jumper wires should be connected to Power Terminal DE Block PE and 2 The Input Filter Cap jumper wire top chassis right should be connected to F All Two green Green yellow wire to chassis ground with a metal screw W yellow wires CN Cap Board is Verify If necessary remove the connected to connected to Power nylon screw spacer and insert a Power Terminal Terminal Block PE metal M5 x 10 screw Torque to 3 2 Block PE and Nem 28 Ibein chassis Non Solid Ground 1 The green yellow CM Cap and MOV jumper wires should be insulated from ground If necessary remove ooood SE them from PE and individuall 53888 Input Filter Cap H Oooog insulate secure each jumper wire to guard against unintentional contact with chassis
358. tart Command Find Home Command 0 50 Encoder Speed 415 gt Profile Status 700 Units Traveled 701 Dig In Status 216 Homing to Limit Switch w o Encoder Feedback When Find Home is commanded the homing routine is run when a Start command is issued The Homing bit 11 in Profile Status will be set while the homing routine is running The drive will ramp to the speed and direction set in Find Home Speed at the rate set in Find Home Ramp until the digital input defined as Home Limit is activated The drive will then decelerate to zero If the switch is no longer activated the drive will reverse direction at 1 10 the Find Home Speed to the switch position and then stop The Home Limit switch will be active when stopped Figure C 7 shows the sequence of operation for homing to a limit switch without encoder feedback Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 24 Application Notes Figure C 7 Homing to Limit Switch No Feedback Homing At Home 150 smn S Start Command 100 50 Find Home Command 35 45 50 Speed Feedback 25 Profile Status 700 Dig In Status 216 e Position Redefine When Pos Redefine is set the present position is established as Home and Units Traveled is set to zero e Disable Homing Requirement If a home position is not required the routine can be disabled by clearing
359. tatus 3 70 Start Mask 277 Masks amp Owners 3 50 Pos Reg Gain 719 ProfSetup Status 3 70 Start Owner 289 Masks amp Owners 3 51 Pos Torque Limit 436 Torq Attributes 3 14 Start Acc Boost 69 Volts per Hertz 3 15 Pos Spd Prof Cmd 705 ProfSetup Status 3 69 Status 1 2 O Fault 227 228 Diagnostics 3 43 Pos Spd Prof Sts 700 ProfSetup Status 3 69 Status 3 9 Fault 223 Diagnostics 3 43 Power Loss Level 186 Power Loss 3 35 Step x AccelTime 722 Profile Setup 3 72 Power Loss Mode 184 Power Loss 3 34 Step x Batch 726 Profile Setup 3 74 Power Loss Time 185 Power Loss 3 34 Step x DecelTime 723 Profile Setup 3 73 Power Up Marker 242 Faults 3 45 Step x Dwell 725 Profile Setup 3 74 Powerup Delay 167 Restart Modes 3 32 Step x Next 727 Profile Setup 3 75 Preset Speed 1 7 101 107 Discrete Speeds 3 22 Step x Type 720 Profile Setup 3 71 PTC HW Value 18 Metering 3 8 Step x Value 724 Profile Setup 3 73 Pulse In Scale 422 Speed Feedback 3 16 Step x Velocity 721 Profile Setup 3 72 Pulse Input Ref 99 Speed Reference 3 21 Stop Mode X 155 156 Stop Brake Modes 3 29 PWM Frequency 151 Load Limits 3 29 Stop Owner 288 Masks amp Owners 3 51 Ramped Speed 22 Metering 3 8 SV Boost Filter 59 Torg Attributes 3 12 Rated Amps 28 Drive Data 3 9 TB Man Ref Hi 97 Speed Reference 3 21 Rated kW 26 Drive Data 3 8 TB Man Ref Lo 98 Speed Reference 3 21 Rated Volts 27 Drive Data 3 8 TB Man Ref Sel 96 Speed Reference
360. te data sek Check for proper motor sizing Check for correct programming of Motor NP Volts parameter 41 3 Additional output impedance may be required 1 Verify connections between motor and load 2 Verify level and time requirements An excessive motor load exists Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Motor NP FLA 1 Verify that thermistor is connected 2 Motor is overheated Reduce load 1 Cycle power and repeat function 2 Replace Main Control Board 1 Cycle power and repeat function 2 Replace Main Control Board Check the drive and motor wiring Check for phase to phase continuity at the motor terminals Check for disconnected motor leads Remove excessive load or overhauling conditions or increase Overspeed Limit rm Publication 20B UM002D EN P 4 8 Troubleshooting Fault Z Z OverVoltage 5 10 Parameter 100 Chksum Params Defaulted 48 Phase U to Grnd 38 Phase V to Grnd 39 Phase W to Grnd 40 Phase UV Short 41 Phase VW Short 42 Phase UW Short 43 Port 1 6 DPI Loss 81 Port 6 86 Port 1 6 Adapter 71 ETE Port 6 76 Power Down 111 RIR Csum Power Loss 310 Power Unit 70 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Description DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value The checksum read from the board does not match the checksum calculated The drive was commanded to write default values to EEPROM A phase to ground fault has bee
361. ted in Testpoint x Sel 238 Fault Config 1 Enables disables annunciation of the listed faults YD e gt gy SS SS Y o CES SESPESSISES WIS IVIGIIIASL xIx o ojo xlo o o 1 0 o 1 1 1 0 na ES 11109 8 7 654 3210 x Reserved Bit 1 Default is 1 for Frames 8 10 Factory Default Bit Values 2 When enabled the drive ignores the shear pin fault during any accel decel 3 Firmware 6 002 and later 4 If Torque Prove is enabled Output Phase Loss will always be performed 240 Fault Clear Default 0 Ready Resets a fault and clears the fault queue Options 0 Ready 1 Clear Faults 2 Cir Fit Que 241 Fault Clear Mode Default 1 Enabled Enables disables a fault reset clear Options 0 Disabled faults attempt from any source This 1 Enabled does not apply to fault codes which are cleared indirectly via other actions 242 Power Up Marker Default Read Only 244 Elapsed hours since initial drive power Min Max 0 0000 214748 3647 Hr a up This value will rollover to O after the Units 0 1 Hr 250 drive has been powered on for more than 250 the max value shown For relevance to 254 most recent power up see Fault x Time 256 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 46 File Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Fault 1 Code Fault 2 Code Fault 3 Code Fault 4 Code Fau
362. temperature must be configured correctly to assure that the drive will shut down independent of drive software operation and be put into a fault condition that will require a fault reset before the drive can be restarted Hardware Digital Input 6 must be configured as a Hardware Enable This is accomplished by removing Jumper J10 from the Main Control Board in the I O Control Cassette Refer to the instructions in the I O wiring section of the Installation Wiring Chapter in the drive User Manual Publication 20B UM002D EN P D 4 Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors Firmware e The functionality of Digital Input 5 is determined by parameter 365 Digital In5 Sel If a different digital input x is selected refer to the corresponding Digital In x Sel parameter This parameter must be set to a value of 3 to configure this input as an Aux Fault When this digital input is opened the drive will immediately shut down in a fault condition and require a fault reset before the drive can be restarted e Opening Digital Input 6 when configured as a Hardware Enable will interrupt IGBT gate firing directly Additionally Digital Input 6 will put the drive into a normal not enabled shutdown condition It is configured by parameter 366 Digital In6 Sel This parameter must be set to a value of 1 to configure this input as an Enable When Digital Input 6 is opened the gate firing
363. tep 8 Next Step 9 Next Step 10 Next Step 11 Next Step 12 Next Step 13 Next Step 14 Next Step 15 Next Step 16 Next Sets the step number to execute after this step is complete including Step x Batch Programming and Parameters 3 75 Values Default Min Max Units 2 1 16 1 Related Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 76 Programming and Parameters Parameter Cross Reference by Name Parameter Name Number Group Page Parameter Name Number Group Page Accel Mask 281 Masks amp Owners 3 51 Data In XX 300 307 Datalinks 3 52 Accel Owner 293 Masks amp Owners 3 52 Data Out XX 310 317 Datalinks 3 53 Accel Time X 140 141 Ramp Rates 3 28 DB Resistor 647 Oil Well Pump 3 66 Adj Volt AccTime 675 Adjust Voltage 3 68 DB Resistor Type 163 Stop Brake Modes 3 31 Adj Volt Command 662 Adjust Voltage 3 67 DB While Stopped 145 Stop Brake M
364. ter 3 25 Related O Z CO ie A g loc 124 thru 138 124 thru 138 124 thru 138 124 thru 138 137 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 26 Programming and Parameters 460 461 462 463 464 445 SPEED COMMAND 446 Speed Regulator Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions PI Deriv Time Refer to formula below dn Error Ploy KD Seo WS PI Reference Hi Scales the upper value of Pl Reference Sell PI Reference Lo Scales the lower value of Pl Reference Sel PI Feedback Hi Scales the upper value of Pl Feedback Sel PI Feedback Lo Scales the lower value of Pl Feedback Sel PI Output Gain Sets the gain factor for PI Output Meter Ki Speed Loop Controls the integral error gain of the speed regulator The drive automatically adjusts Ki Speed Loop when a non zero value is entered for Speed Desired BW or an autotune is performed Typically manual adjustment of this parameter is needed only if system inertia cannot be determined through an autotune Speed Desired BW is set to 0 when a manual adjustment is made to this parameter Kp Speed Loop Controls the proportional error gain of the speed regulator The drive automatically adjusts Kp Speed Loop when a non zero value is entered for Speed Desired BW or an auto tune is performed Typically manual adjustment of
365. ter 152 may produce undesirable results 153 Regen Power Limit Default 50 0 053 Sets the maximum power limit allowed to Min Max 800 0 0 0 transfer from the motor to the DC bus Units 0 1 When using an external dynamic brake set this parameter to its maximum value 154 Current Rate Limit Default 400 0 053 Sets the largest allowable rate of change Min Max 1 0 800 0 for the current reference signal This Units 0 1 number is scaled in percent of maximum motor current every 250 microseconds 145 DB While Stopped Default 0 Disabled 161 O Enables disables dynamic brake Options 0 Disabled 162 operation when drive is stopped DB may 1 Enabled operate if input voltage becomes too high 3 Disabled DB will only operate when 2 drive is running 2 Enable DB may operate whenever E drive is energized 2155 Stop Mode A Default 1 Ramp 157 amp 156 Stop Mode B Default 0 Coast 158 Active stop mode Stop Mode Alle active Options 0 Coast 159 unless Stop Mode B is selected by 1 Ramu inputs 2 Ramp to Hold O 1 When using options 1 2 or 4 refer to 3 DC Brake 4 Fast Brake 1 parameter 158 Attention statements Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 30 File Group Stop Brake Modes Programming and Parameters 158 159 160 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions DC Brake Lvl Sel Selects the s
366. the PowerFlex 700 User Manual publication 20B UMO002 since the last release Manual Updates Change Page s Added Frame 7 10 information Throughout Manual Updated content for firmware version 8 002 Throughout Manual Updated MOV and Common Mode Cap info Chapter 1 Publication 20B UM002D EN P soc ii Summary of Changes Notes Publication 20B UM002D EN P Preface Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Overview Installation Wiring Start Up Programming and Parameters Troubleshooting Table of Contents Who Should Use this Manual P 1 What Is Not in this Manual P 1 ATEX Approved Drives amp Motors P 1 Reference Materials P 2 Manual Conventions P 2 EE EE P 3 General Precautions P 3 Catalog Number Explanation P 5 Opening the Cover Frames 0 7 1 1 Mounting Considerations 1 2 AC Supply Source Considerations 1 3 General Grounding Requirements 1 5 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 1 6 Power EE 1 6 Using Input Output Contactors 1 23 Disconnecting MOVs and CM Caps 1 24 VO Wining EE 1 38 Reference Control seee see reee 1 46 Auto Manual Examples 1 47 Lifting Torque Proving 1 50 Using PowerFlex Drives w Regen Units 1 50 DC Input and Precharge Notes 1 51 EMC Instructions Frames 0 6 1 52 Prepare For Drive
367. the feedback 1 Command Spd word through any connected DPI 2 Output Amps peripheral 20 COMM x 1203 USB 3 Torque Amps etc 4 Flux Amps 1 Refer to Input Output Definitions on 5 Output Power page 3 57 6 Output Volts 2 g Mio afi 7 DC Bus Volts peed Fdbk is a filtered value 8 PI Reference Choose 25 SpdFb NoFilt if your py C Gr ee process requires speed feedback via 9 PI Feedbac a communication network 10 PI Error 11 Pl Output 12 Motor OL 13 Drive OL 14 CommandedTrq 15 MtrTrqCurRef 16 Speed Ref 17 Speed Fdbk 18 Pulse In Berni 19 Reserved 20 23 Scale Block1 4 1 24 Param Cnt 25 SpdFb Not Logic Mask Determines which ports can control the drive when Write Mask Act bit 15 is set to 1 If the bit for a port is set to 0 the port will have no control functions except for stop 9 111 1 Control Permitted 1 0 Control Masked xxx x x x x x x 1 1 1 1 1 pus 14 13 1211110 98 17 6 5 4 3 2 0 x Reserved Bit 4 1 Firmware 6 002 and later Factory Default Bit Values Start Mask See Logic Mask Controls which adapters can issue start commands Publication 20B UM002D EN P Related Programming and Parameters 3 51 o v S Parameter Name amp Description 5 Z See page 3 2 for symbol descripti
368. the guidelines presented in the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOO1 voltages unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both ends For the same reason if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled This will help minimize the possible shock hazard from cross coupled motor leads ATTENTION To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced Motor Cable Lengths Typically motor lead lengths less than 30 meters 100 feet are acceptable However if your application dictates longer lengths refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES IN001 or the PowerFlex 700 Technical Data publication 20B TD001 Cable Entry Plate Removal If additional wiring access is needed the Cable Entry Plate on Frame 0 3 drives can be removed Simply loosen the screws securing the plate to the chassis The slotted mounting holes assure easy removal Important Removing the Cable Entry Plate limits the maximum ambient temperature to 40 degrees C 104 degrees F Power Wiring Access Panel Removal Frames 0 5 Frame Removal Procedure Replace when wiring is complete 0 1 2 amp 6 Part of front cover see page 1 1 3 Open front cover and gently tap slide cover down and out 4 Loosen the 4 screws and remove 5 Remove front cover see page 1 1 gently tap slide panel up and out Publica
369. the internal fan s and must not be used to power other circuitry Frames 5 amp 6 Fan Connections Drive Rating No of Type Enclosure 120VAC Fans Connect at DC IP00 NEMA 100 VA 1 Power Terminal Block Input UL Type Open Frame 5 Requires user supplied 120 or 240V AC See 138 VA pages 1 16 and 1 21 for TB locations and Frame 6 terminal designations P20 NEMA 100VA 1 UL Type 1 Frame 5 P54 NEMA 138 VA UL Type 12 Frame 6 AC POO NEMA 100 VA 1 N A Connected internally Input UL Type Open Frame 5 A transformer matches the input line voltage 138 VA to the internal fan voltage If line voltage is Frame 6 different than the voltage class specified on P20 NEMA 100 VA 1 the drive nameplate it may be necessary to UL Type 1 Frame 5 change transformer taps P54 NEMA 138 VA The transformer is located behind the Power UL Type 12 Frame 6 Terminal Block on the right side of the drive Access is gained by releasing the terminal block from the rail To release terminal block and change tap 1 Locate the small metal tab at the bottom of the end block 2 Press the tab in and pull the top of the block out Repeat for next block if desired 3 Select appropriate transformer tap 4 Replace block s in reverse order Frame 7 Fan Connections Drive Rating No of Type Enclosure 120VAC Fans Connect at DC IPOO NEMA 250VA_ 1 Power Termin
370. tiometer Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM 012 DC Bus Voltage Default Read Only Present DC bus voltage level Min Max 0 0 Based on Drive Rating Units 0 1 VDC Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 8 Group Metering Drive Data Programming and Parameters 018 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions DC Bus Memory 6 minute average of DC bus voltage level Elapsed kWh Accumulated output energy of the drive Analog In1 Value Analog In2 Value Value of the signal at the analog inputs PTC HW Value Value present at the drive s PTC input terminals Spd Fdbk No Filt Displays the unfiltered value of the actual motor speed whether measured by encoder feedback or estimated Ramped Speed Value of commanded speed after Accel Decel and S Curve are applied Speed Reference Summed value of ramped speed process Pl and droop When FVC Vector mode is selected droop will not be added Commanded Torque Final torque reference value after limits and filtering are applied Percent of motor rated torque Speed Feedback Displays the lightly filtered value of the actual motor speed whether measured by encoder feedback or estimated Rated kW Drive power rating Rated Volts The drive input voltage class 208 240 400 etc Publication 20B UM002D EN P Values Default Min Max
371. tion 20B UM002D EN P Installation Wiring 1 9 Single Phase Input Power The PowerFlex 700 drive is typically used with a three phase input supply However single phase operation is possible for certain frames as explained below Condition 0 7 Listed by UL to operate on single phase input power with the requirement that the output current is derated by 50 of the three phase ratings see pages A 10 amp A 11 8 10 Not designed for single phase operation AC Input Phase Selection Frames 5 7 Only ATTENTION To avoid a shock hazard ensure that all power to the A drive has been removed before performing the following Moving the Line Type jumper located on the Precharge Board see below will allow single or three phase operation Important When selecting single phase operation input power must be applied to the R L1 and S L2 terminals This ensures that the fan will be properly powered Typical Location Phase Select Jumper Si AC Input 3 PH 1 PH ne E me SPARE 1 SPARE 2 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 10 Installation Wiring Fan Circuit Power Supply drive has been removed before changing connecting the fan supply ATTENTION To avoid a shock hazard ensure that all power to the Important Some drives utilize a fan transformer to power the internal fan s This transformer is sized specifically for
372. tion Wiring 1 19 Component DC Bus Brake Terminals PE Ground and MOV wire MOV located under boards 1 0 amp Auxiliary Control Voltage TB11 DC Link Choke AC input only Fan Terminal Block cap fan TB9 Phase Monitor Fan Transformer cap fan AC input only Blower Terminal Block three phase Main Control Board HIM Comm Module Optional 000000 Nameplate 80088005 Encoder Feedback Board Optional Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 20 Installation Wiring Figure 1 5 Component Locations Frame 10 AC Input shown For DC Input drives reference the left Inverter section See page 1 15 for TB specifications MOV Jumper Fan Terminal Block TB12 Heatsink Fan Publication 20B UM002D EN P Encoder Feedback Board Optional No Component No Component O Motor Terminal Block Inverter Section PE Ground Converter Section 1 0 amp Auxiliary Control Voltage TB11 G PE Bus Bar IP20 Only Fan Terminal Block TB9 d i DC Link Choke Capacitor Assembly Fan AC input only supplied loose for IP00 Fan Transformer IP20 Only BD AC Input Terminals Behind
373. tions and the diagram above UL Type 1 for terminal designations AC IPOO NEMA 1000 VA 3 TB9 108 12 Input UL Type Open Requires user supplied 120V AC See page 1 20 for TB locations and and the diagram above for terminal designations IP20 NEMA 1000 VA 3 TB9 10 amp 12 UL Type 1 A transformer see page 1 20 matches the Input Line Voltage input line voltage to the internal fan voltage If Y 480 400V AC 50 60 Hz 1 line voltage is different than the voltage class specified on the drive nameplate it may be E P necessary to change transformer taps nl H2 0 Additional Frame 10 Wiring Requirement for IP00 AC Input Drives The Inverter and Converter sections of Frame 10 AC Input IP00 NEMA UL Type Open drives are shipped separately Once installed the following connections will be required 1 DC Link Choke Wiring CNV INV DC link chokes are supplied N Lamda L 1 2 loose for customer mounting Input from pe 2 Output to Inverter and wiring in IPOO drives See Converter L we Capacitor Bank diagram for connection CH pA A DO a CNV e INV information and page A 12 Y e through A 19 for drive ratings to Mounting Foot 2 Thermistor Wiring Thermistor wiring will be coiled loose in the Converter section for shipping Locate the wire labeled To INV a
374. tor from overload conditions An electronic thermal overload 12T function emulates a thermal overload relay This operation is based on three parameters Motor NP FLA Motor OL Factor and Motor OL Hertz parameters 042 048 and 047 respectively Motor NP FLA is multiplied by Motor OL Factor to allow the user to define the continuous level of current allowed by the motor thermal overload Motor OL Hertz is used to allow the user to adjust the frequency below which the motor overload is derated The motor can operate up to 102 of FLA continuously If the drive was just activated it will run at 150 of FLA for 180 seconds If the motor had been operating at 100 for over 30 minutes the drive will run at 150 of FLA for 60 seconds These values assume the drive is operating above Motor OL Hertz and that Motor OL Factor is set to 1 00 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 15 Operation below 100 current causes the temperature calculation to account for motor cooling Motor Overload Curve 100000 Cold Hot 10000 Trip Time Sec 3 S E S 10 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 Full Load Amps Motor OL Hertz defines the frequency where motor overload capacity derate should begin The motor overload capacity is reduced when operating below Motor OL Hertz For all settings of Motor OL Hertz other than zero the overload capacity is reduced to 70 at an output frequency of z
375. tput Analog Out Lo Value Options Param 341 Signed Param 341 Absolute Analog Out Hi Value 0 Output Freq Maximum Speed 0 Hz Maximum Speed 1 Command Spd Maximum Speed 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed 2 Output Amps 0 Amps 0 Amps 200 Rated 3 Torque Amps 200 Rated 0 Amps 200 Rated 4 Flux Amps 0 Amps 0 Amps 200 Rated 5 Output Power 0 kW D kW 200 Rated 6 Output Volts 0 Volts 0 Volts 120 Rated Input Volts 7 DC Bus Volts 0 Volts 0 Volts 200 Rated Input Volts 8 Pl Reference 100 0 100 9 Pl Feedback 100 0 100 10 PI Error 100 0 100 11 Pl Output 100 0 100 12 Motor OL 0 0 100 13 Drive OL 0 0 100 14 CommandedTra 800 Rated 0 800 Rated TA 15 MtrTrqCurRef 200 Rated 0 200 Rated 5 2 16 Speed Ref Maximum Speed 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed E a 17 Speed Fdbk Maximum Speed 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed gt Ki 18 Pulse In Ref 25200 0 RPM OHz RPM Maximum Speed S o 19 Torque Est 800 0 800 a S 2023 Scale Block1 4 ER 3 Param Cntl 1 a lt 2 SpdFb NoFilt 1 Refer to Option Definitions on page 3 57 343 Analog Out Hi Default 20 000 mA 10 000 Volts 346 Analog Out2 Hi Min Max 0 000 20 000mA Sets the analog output value when the 10 000V source value is at maximum Units 0 001 mA 0 001 Volt 344 Analog Out Lo Default 0 000
376. tput Current Default Read Only The total output current present at T1 T2 Min Max 0 0 Drive Rated Amps x 2 amp T3 U V 8 W Units 0 1 Amps 004 Torque Current Default Read Only Based on the motor the amount of Min Max Drive Rating x 2 2 current that is in phase with the Units 0 1 Amps fundamental voltage component 005 Flux Current Default Read Only Amount of current that is out of phase Min Max Drive Rating x 2 2 with the fundamental voltage component Units 0 1 Amps 006 Output Voltage Default Read Only Output voltage present at terminals T1 Min Max 0 0 Drive Rated Volts gt T2 amp T3 U V amp W Units 0 1 VAC 5 007 Output Power Default Read Only o Output power present at T1 T2 8 T3 Min Max 0 0 Drive Rated kW x 2 U V amp W Units 0 1 kW Output Power SQRT 3 x Output Voltage x Output Current x Output Powr Fctr 008 Output Powr Fctr Default Read Only Output Power Factor Min Max 0 00 1 00 ABS SIN Commanded Voltage Vector Angle Units 0 01 Measured Current Vector Angle 009 Elapsed MWh Default Read Only Accumulated output energy of the drive Min Max 0 0 214748352 0 MWh Units 0 1 MWh 010 Elapsed Run Time Default Read Only Accumulated time drive is outputting Min Max 0 0 214748352 0 Hrs power Units 0 1 Hrs 011 MOP Reference Default Read Only 079 Value of the signal at MOP Motor Min Max Maximum Speed Operated Poten
377. tput Energized x x x x x x x x x x x x xj0 0j0 Z 5 pits 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 210 EE Bit Digital Out1 Sel 4 Default 1 Fault Digital Out2 Sel 4 Run Digital Out3 Sel 4 Run Selects the drive status that will energize Options 1 Faul a CRx output relay 2 Niam 3 Ready 4 Run 1 Any relay programmed as Fault or a Alarm will energize pick up when S MR GN power is applied to drive and 7 E oas un deenergize drop out when a fault or Auto Restart alarm exists Relays selected for other 8 Powerup DZ functions will energize only when that 9 At Speed condition exists and will deenergize 10 At Freq d when condition is removed Refer to 11 At Current pages 1 40 12 At Torque 2 Refer to Option Definitions on 13 At Temp page 3 57 14 At Bus Volts 3 Activation level is defined in Dig Outx 15 At PI Error Level below 16 DC Braking 4 When TorgProve Cnfg is set to 17 Curr Limit Enable Digital Out Sel becomes the 18 Economize brake control and any other selection 19 Motor Overld will be ignored 20 Power Loss 5 Firmware 6 002 amp Later 21 26 Input 1 6 Link 27 PI Enable 28 Pl Hold 29 Drive Overload 30 Param Cnt 31 Mask 1 AND 32 Mask 1 OR 33 Prof At Pos 34 Prot Enabled 35 Pol Running 36 Prof Holding 37 Prof At Home 38 ProfCompl
378. tputs This is the time between the disappearance of a condition and de activation of the relay 392 Dig Out Invert Inverts the selected digital output L W SIS VHS IIS 1 Inverted xIxixixIix x 0 0 0 817 65413210 0 Not Inverted X X X X X X X L 1413121110 9 x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 62 Programming and Parameters F Parameter Name amp Description S 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 393 Dig Out Param Default 0 PI Config Selects the value that the mask Dig Out Options 0 PI Config Mask will be applied to 1 PI Status 2 3 Drive Sts 1 2 4 5 DriveAlarm1 2 6 Startinhibit 7 Digln Status 8 9 DrvSts1 2Fit 10 AlrmSts1 2Fit 12 LogicCmdRsit 13 Stop Owner 14 Start Owner 15 Jog Owner 16 Dir Owner 17 Ref Owner 18 Accel Owner 19 Decel Owner 20 FitRst Owner 21 MOP Owner 22 Local Owner 23 Limit Status Ed 24 PortMaskAct 2 25 WriteMaskAct E 2 26 LogicMaskAct o E 27 TorqProvCnfg gt 3 28 TorqProvSet 5 gt 29 TorqProvSts S le 30 Profile Sts 31 Profile Cmd 394 Dig Out Mask Sets the mask that is applied to the selected value in Dig Out Param A bit AND OR is applied which is selected by the Digital Out
379. trol of the motor until the drive output reaches zero The drive output is then shut off The load and motor should follow the decel ramp Other factors such as bus regulation and current limit can alter the actual decal rate Ramp mode can also include a timed hold brake Once the drive has reached zero output hertz on a Ramp to Stop and both parameters DC Brake Time and DC Brake Level are not zero the drive applies DC to the motor producing current at the DC Brake Level for the DC Brake Time 1 On Stop drive output will decrease according to the programmed pattern from ts present value to zero The pattern may be linear or squared The output will decrease to zero at the rate determined by the programmed Maximum Freq and the programmed active Decel Time x 2 The reduction in output can be limited by other drive factors such as bus or current regulation 3 When the output reaches zero the output is shut off 4 The motor if rotating will coast from its present speed for a time that is dependent on the mechanics of the system inertia friction etc Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 42 Application Notes Mode Description Ramp to d Hold Bus Voltage Portia Bus Voltage Output Voltage Output Voltage Output Current Output Current Motor Speed Motor Speed GE Output Current e WEE Command Speed g Command Speed Output Voltage A DC Brake Level gt gt Time Stop 7 Zero C
380. ts a g 366 Ki ZS V S a SSS 1 Input Present xix x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 pits 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 0 O EES Bit 434 Torque Ref B Mult Default 1 0 053 S Defines the value of the multiplier for the Min Max 32767 0 e Torque Ref B Sel selection Units 0 1 No Description O File Lists the major parameter file category Group Lists the parameter group within a file 6 No Parameter number Note that all parameters in the PowerFlex 700VC are 32 bit O Parameter value cannot be changed until drive is stopped Parameter only displayed when Motor Cntl Sel is set to 4 This parameter only available with firmware version 6 002 and later Parameter Name amp Description Parameter name as it appears on an LCD HIM with a brief description of the parameters function O Values Defines the various operating characteristics of the parameter Three types exist ENUM _ Default Lists the value assigned at the factory Read Only no default Options Displays the programming selections available Bit Bit Lists the bit place holder and definition for each bit Numeric Default Lists the value assigned at the factory Read Only no default Min Max The range lowest and highest setting possible for the parameter Units Unit of measure and resolution as shown on the LCD HIM Important Some parameters will have two unit values e Analog
381. ts per Hertz 3 15 H Hardware Enable 1 43 Hardware Fault 4 6 Hardware PTC Fault 4 6 Heatsink LowTemp Fault 4 6 Heatsink OvrTemp Fault 4 6 HighRes Ref 3 53 HIM Menu Structure B 5 HIM Menus Diagnostics B 5 Memory Storage B 5 Preferences B 6 HIM Ref Config Group 3 36 HIM Removing Installing B 3 Home Not Set Alarm 4 12 Home Position 3 69 HW OverCurrent Fault 4 6 1 0 Cassette 1 39 Terminal Block 1 39 Wiring 1 38 UO Comm Loss Fault 4 7 UO Failure Fault 4 7 1 0 Terminal Block 1 40 1 41 In Phase Loss Alarm 4 12 Incompat MCB PB Fault 4 7 Inertia Autotune 3 13 Input Contactor Start Stop 1 23 Input Devices Circuit Breakers 1 6 Contactors 1 23 Fuses 1 6 Input Fusing 1 6 Input Phase Loss Fault 4 7 Input Potentiometer 1 44 Input Power Conditioning 1 4 Input Power Single Phase 1 9 Inputs 8 Outputs File 3 54 Publication 20B UM002D EN P Installation 1 1 IntDBRes OvrHeat Alarm 4 12 IR Voltage Drop 3 12 IR Volts Range Alarm 4 12 IR Volts Range Fault 4 7 Ixo Vit Rang Alarm 4 12 Ixo Voltage Drop 3 13 IXo VoltageRange Fault 4 7 J Jog Mask 3 51 Jog Owner 3 51 Jog Speed 1 3 22 Jog Speed 2 3 22 K Kf Speed Loop 3 27 Ki Speed Loop 3 26 Kp Speed Loop 3 26 L Language 3 37 Last Stop Source 3 41 LCD HIM Menus B 5 LEDs 4 2 Lifting Torque Proving C 4 Limit Switches C 11 Linear List 3 3 Linking Parameters B 7 Load Frm Usr Set 3 37 Load Limits Group
382. units methods Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 39 Configuration Stop Brk Mode A parameter 155 Stop Brk Mode B parameter 156 0 Coast 1 Ramp 2 Ramp to Hold 3 DC Brake 4 Fast Brake DC Brk Lvl Sel parameter 157 0 DC Brake Lvl selects parameter 158 as the source for the DC brake level 1 Analog in 1 2 Analog in 2 DC Brake Level parameter 158 sets the DC brake level in amps when parameter 157 DC Brake Lvl DC Brake Time parameter 159 sets the amount of time that DC braking is applied after the ramp if any Flux Braking parameter 166 may need to adjust parameter 549 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Digital InX Sel parameters 361 366 13 Stop Mode B setting a digital input to this function allows the use of a digital input to switch between Stop Mode A open input and Stop Mode B closed input Detailed Operation Mode Description Coast to Stop Bus Voltage Output Voltage Output Current Motor Speed Time Stop lt Coast Time is load dependent gt Command Coast is selected by setting Stop Mode A B to a value of 0 When in Coast to Stop the drive acknowledges the Stop command by shutting off the drive output and releasing control of the motor The load and motor will coast until the kinetic energy is dissipated Publication 20B UM
383. urns it to the ground in a controlled manner in the event of a mechanical brake failure Once a Brake Slipped alarm occurs drive power must be cycled to clear the alarm and re start the drive Publication 20B UM002D EN P C 10 Application Notes Speed Monitoring Speed Band Limit This routine is intended to fault the drive if the difference between the speed reference and the encoder feedback is larger than the value set in Spd Dev Band parameter 602 and the drive is NOT making any progress toward the reference SpdBand Integrat parameter 603 sets the time that the speed difference can be greater than the deviation band before causing a fault and setting the brake Float Float is defined as the condition when the drive is holding the load at zero hertz while holding off the mechanical brake The float condition starts when the frequency drops below the speed set in Float Tolerance parameter 606 Float will stay active for a period of time set by ZeroSpdFloatTime parameter 605 If a digital input parameters 361 366 is set to Micro Pos also Float and it is closed the Float condition will stay active and will disregard the timer This signal is also available through a communication device see TorqProve Setup parameter 601 When encoderless TorqProve is enabled the drive cannot hold the load at zero speed Parameter 606 Float Tolerance will then define the speed at which the brake is set Micro Position
384. use amp Circuit Breaker Ratings The tables on the following pages provide drive ratings including single phase and recommended three phase AC line input fuse and circuit breaker information Both types of short circuit protection are acceptable for UL and IEC requirements Sizes listed are the recommended sizes based on 40 degree C and the U S N E C Other country state or local codes may require different ratings Fusing If fuses are chosen as the desired protection method refer to the recommended types listed below If available amp ratings do not match the tables provided the closest fuse rating that exceeds the drive rating should be chosen s IEC BS88 British Standard Parts 1 amp 2 EN60269 1 Parts 1 E 2 type gG or equivalent should be used e UL UL Class CC T RK1 or J should be used Circuit Breakers The non fuse listings in the following tables include both circuit breakers inverse time or instantaneous trip and 140M Self Protecting Motor Starters If one of these is chosen as the desired protection method the following requirements apply e IEC and UL Both types of devices are acceptable for IEC and UL installations 1 Typical designations include but may not be limited to the following Parts 1 amp 2 AC AD BC BD CD DD ED EFS EF FF FG GF GG GH Publication 20B UM002D EN P A 1 0 Supplemental Drive Information 208 240 Volt Single Phase AC Input Ratings
385. ut UL Type Open Requires user supplied 120V AC See page IP20 NEMA 500 VA 1 1 18 for TB location and page 1 11 for UL Type 1 terminal designations AC IPO0 NEMA 500 VA 1 TB9 Input UL Type Open A transformer matches the input line voltage IP20 NEMA 500 VA 1 to the internal fan voltage If line voltage is UL Type 1 different than the voltage class specified on l the drive nameplate it may be necessary to nput Line Voltage 480 400V AC 50 60 Hz change transformer taps see below F1 F2 H1 H2 H3 480 400 0 SLL 115 JMP 0 D DE X2 toTB9 Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 12 Installation Wiring Frame 9 Fan Connections Connect at TB9 Requires user supplied 120V AC for cap bank fan and phase monitor Blower Terminal Block Three phase power must be supplied to the Blower TB See page 1 18 for TB locations and page 1 11 for terminal designations Drive Rating No of Type Enclosure 120VAC Fans DC IPO0 NEMA 500VA 2 Input UL Type Open IP20 NEMA 500VA_ 2 UL Type 1 AC IP00 NEMA 500VA 2 Input UL Type Open IP20 NEMA 500VA_ 2 UL Type 1 Input Line Voltage 480 400V AC 50 60 Hz Fl F2 nx ns 480 400 0 III 115 JMP 0 F3 x1 XF X2 Jumm os Frame 9 Blower Operation TB9 A transformer see page 1 18 for location matches t
386. ut Ratings 480V Single Phase AC Input 380 400V Single Phase AC Input Drive Three Phase Drive a Three Phase Catalog E Hp Input Output Catalog E kw Imput Output Temp Number Rating Amps VAC Amps Number Rating Amps VAC Amps C 20BD1P1 0 0 25 0 7 0 460 0 6 20BC1P3 O 0 2 1 0 400 0 7 25 20BD2P1 0 0 5 1 4 0 460 1 1 20BC2P1 0 104 1 6 0 400 1 1 25 20BD3P4 0 1 2 3 0 460 1 7 20BC3P5 0 0 75 2 7 0 400 1 8 25 20BD5P0 0 1 5 3 4 0 460 2 5 20BC5P0 0 1 1 3 9 0 400 2 5 25 20BD8P0 0 2 5 6 0 460 4 20BC8P7 0 2 6 9 0 400 4 4 25 20BD011 0 3 75 8 2 0 460 5 5 20BC011 0 2 75 9 3 0 400 5 8 25 20BD014 1 5 10 9 0 460 7 20BC015 1 3 75 12 5 0 400 7 7 25 20BD022 1 7 5 17 3 0 460 11 20BC022 1 55 17 8 0 400 11 25 20BD027 2 10 21 4 0 460 13 5 20BC030 2 7 5 24 6 0 400 15 25 20BD034 2 12 5 27 0 460 17 20BC037 2 9 25 30 3 0 400 18 5 25 20BD040 3 15 31 8 0 460 20 20BC043 3 11 35 2 0 400 21 5 25 20BD052 3 20 41 3 0 460 26 20BC056 3 15 45 9 0 400 28 25 20BD065 3 25 51 6 0 460 32 5 20BC072 3 18 5 59 7 0 400 36 25 20BD077 4 30 62 6 0 460 38 5 20BC085 4 22 5 70 5 0 400 42 5 25 20BD096 5 37 5 78 1 0 460 48 20BC105 5 27 5 87 0 400 52 5 25 20BD125 5 50 101 6 0 460 62 5 20BC125 5 27 5 103 6 0 400 62 5 25 20BC140 5 37 5 117 4 0 400 70 25 20BD156 6 62 5 126 8 0 460 78 20BC170 6 45 142 6 0 400 85 25 20BD180 6 75 146 4 0 460 90 20BC
387. volatile memory 2 User Set 2 to active drive memory 3 User Set 3 199 Save To User Set Default 0 Ready 198 Saves the parameter values in active Options Q Ready drive memory to a user set in drive 1 User Set 1 nonvolatile memory 2 User Set 2 3 User Set 3 200 Reset Meters Default 0 Ready Resets selected meters to zero Options 0 Ready MWh 2 Elapsed Time 201 Language Default 0 Not Selected Selects the display language when using Options 0 Not Selected an LCD HIM This parameter is not 1 English functional with an LED HIM 2 Francais v 3 Espa ol Options 6 8 and 9 are Reserved 4 ftaliano This parameter is not reset when Reset 5 Deutsch to Defaults is selected 7 Portugu s 10 Nederlands Publication 20B UM002D EN P 3 38 Programming and Parameters Kal o S Parameter Name amp Description o 2 se page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 202 Voltage Class Default Based on Drive Cat 041 Configures the drive current rating and No thru associates it with the selected voltage Options 2 Low Voltage 047 i e 400 or 480V Normally used when 3 High Voltage 054 downloading parameter sets Min Max amp 4 Reserved 055 Default values will be changed for 5 Reserved 062 parameters 41 47 54 55 62 63 69 063 70 72 82 148 158 ve ru This para
388. will be interrupted and the drive will go into a not enabled shutdown condition Because the additional digital Input typically Digital Input 5 must be wired to open simultaneously and be configured to put the drive into a fault condition the drive will not restart if a new start command is given until the fault is reset Start Up amp Periodic Drive Testing Requirement The integrity of both the Hardware Enable input Digital Input 6 and the additional Aux Fault input must be maintained and verified periodically to meet certification requirements The interval must be determined by the requirements of the application but not be greater than one year In addition to any requirements to check the integrity of the over temperature device s and the wiring of the over temperature contact closure to the drive terminals the drive circuitry itself requires testing This must be done during a maintenance period when the motor environment is not hazardous and all necessary precautions have been taken to repeatedly start and stop the drive and motor safely following procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied contro
389. witches and select the limit switches again in Digital In1 6 Select Important When properly set up the drive will remember its location during power cycles or power loss unless the load is manually moved during power down conditions If this occurs simply reset the feature using the procedure above Figure C 4 Limit Switch Operation S Stop Commanded Speed Normal Operating Speed Preset 1 Speed Slow this direction only Stop this direction Preset 1 Speed Slow Commanded Speed Normal Operating Speed only 1 1 1 i I l l l End Limit Decel Limit Decel Limit End Limit Switch Switch Switch Switch o lt w lt gt lt w lt o lt Minimum Speed Refer to Reverse Speed Limit on page C 32 Motor Control Technology Within the PowerFlex family there are several motor control technologies e Torque Producers e Torque Controllers e Speed Regulators Publication 20B UM002D EN P Application Notes C 13 Torque Producers Volts Hertz This technology follows a specific pattern of voltage and frequency output to the motor regardless of the motor being used The shape of the V Hz curve can be controlled a limited amount but once the shape is determined the drive output is fixed to those values Given the fixed values each motor will react based on its own speed torque characteristics This technology is good for basic centrifugal fan pump operat
390. x Control Power Refer to page 1 14 PS Aux Control Power Refer to page 1 14 PE PE Ground PE Ground PE PE Ground PE Ground See page 1 42 for notes Publication 20B UM002D EN P 1 42 Installation Wiring 1 2 3 4 5 Important 0 20mA operation requires a jumper at terminals 17 amp 18 or 19 amp 20 Drive damage may occur if jumper is not installed These inputs outputs are dependant on a number of parameters see Related Parameters Differential Isolation External source must be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE Input provides high common mode immunity Contacts in unpowered state Any relay programmed as Fault or Alarm will energize pick up when power is applied to drive and deenergize drop out when a fault or alarm exists Relays selected for other functions will energize only when that condition exists and will deenergize when condition is removed 150mA maximum Load Not present on 115V versions Encoder Terminal Block Table 1 J Encoder Terminal Designations No Description refer to page A 4 for encoder specifications See Detail on 8 12V 1 DC Power Internal power source page 1 39 7 12V DC Return Common 250 mA 6 Encoder Z NOT Pulse marker or registration 5 Encoder Z input 2 4 Encoder B NOT Quadrature B input 3 Encoder B 2 Encoder A NOT Single channel or 1 Encoder A quadrature A input
391. x Sel All bits with zeros in the mask are ignored Z 1 Bit selected 0101010101010101 0101010101010101 0 Bit Masked IB 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Example Mask OR If Any bits in the value are set in the mask then the output is On Selected Value O 0 0 0 1 1 O 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 JO Mask o 0 jO jo O jo jo jo j1 0 O O jo 1 O 10 Result Output On Mask AND If All bits in the value are set in the mask then the output is On Selected Value O O O JO 1 1 J0 JO 1 1 1 1 JO 0 JO JO Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Result Output Off Publication 20B UM002D EN P Related File Programming and Parameters 3 63 Applications File Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 600 TorqProve Cnfg Enables disables torque brake proving feature When Enabled Digital Out1 Sel becomes the brake control Note this value is not changed when parameters are f reset to factory defaults Related gt gt SY SS SITAS AR LEASAAELT E VIAS SIS ASS HELE POLY ES PLIES E 4 Enabled xIxIx1x x x1010 o ololo o o ol0 age EE 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Ol x Reserved Bit 1 Firmware 6 002 and later Factory Default Bit Values Opt

Allen Bradley PowerFlex 700 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents